HomeMy WebLinkAboutTaylor Ball of California Inc; 1998-01-12; 32441 Part 2 of 3there are no bars in position to which dowels may be tied, No. 3 bars shall be added to
provide proper support and anchorage. Bending of dowels after placement of concrete
will not be permitted unless approval is obtained.
H. Check architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings for locations of anchor
botts, anchors, inserts, conduits, sleeves, and other items which are required to be cast
in concrete, and make necessary provisions to ensure that reinforcing steel will not
conflict with the placement of such embedded items.
I. Cleaning: Reinforcement at time of pour, shall be free of coatings that would impair bond
to concrete.
J. Welding: Welding of reinforcing steel will not be permitted except as specifically noted or
approved. ASTM A 706 reinforcing bars shall be used for bars to be welded. Perform
welding, where shown or approved, by the direct electric arc process in accordance.with
AWS D1.4 using the specified low-hydrogen electrodes. Preheat 6” of each bar.
Accelerated cooling is prohibited. Do not tack weld bars. Clean metal surfaces to be
welded of all loose scale, paint and foreign material. Clean welds each time electrode is
changed and chip burn edges before placing welds. When wire brushed, the complete
_ welds must exhibit uniform section, smooth welded metal, feather edges without
undercuts or overlays, freedom from porosity and clinkers, and good fusion and
penetration into the base metal. Cut out welds or parts of welds found defective with
chisel and replace with proper welding. Employ only experienced certified welding
operators. Prequalification of welds shall be in accordance with the Uniform Building Code
and AWS D1.4.
3.03 MlSCELlANEDUS CDNCREIE WORK
A. Provide reinforcing for concrete areaways, cast-in-place valve boxes, pits, splash blocks,
bases, and other miscellaneous concrete as shown and required to complete all work.
Conform to applicable requirements herein.
3.04 DEFECTlVE WORK
A. The following reinforcing steel work will be considered defective and shall be removed and
replaced:
I. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings.
2. Bars injured due to bending or straightening.
3. Bars heated for bending.
4. Reinforcement not placed in accordance with the drawings or specifications.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad Cii Library
Concrete Reinforcement
032004
96013
3.06 RECORD DRAWlNGS
,/^ A. After all steel has been placed, correct or revise the shop and placement diagrams to
correspond with changes made in the field, following which submit record drawings in
compliance with requirements of Section 01720.
END DF 6ECTlON
,-
/-
20 October 1997 Concrete Reinforcement
Carlsbad City Library 03200-5
96013
SECTlON 03300
CAST-lN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not limited to, the Agreement,
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Divisions 1, 2,3,4 and 5 of
these Specifications and the Drawings.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or the details on the drawings,
work shall conform to the applicable provisions of the following codes and standards:
1. “Uniform Building Code” [UBC): 1994 edition, Chapter 19, “Concrete”.
2. American Concrete Institute [ACI): “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete”, ACI 318-95, and other standards hereinafter referred to.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials [ASTM): The specifications and
standards hereinafter referred to.
r 6. In case of conflict between referenced standards, the more stringent requirements shall
govern.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Mix Designs: Mix designs shall be submitted to the Architect for review at least 30 days
prior to scheduled concrete placement.
C. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Pigments for colored concrete.
2. Sample chip set and color chart for colored concrete. Indicate pigment number and
required dosage rate.
3. Curing methods and materials:
a. For standard concrete
b. For colored concrete.
4. Joint sealants.
r 5. Joint fillers.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad Cii Library
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-I
96013
D. Field Samples: Prepare field samples as follows:
1. Colored Concrete: After approval of colored concrete submittals, place and finish a
4 foot-square sample slab-ongrade demonstrating materials, color, finish,
workmanship, control joints and curing methods. The approved field sample shall
provide a visual standard and shall be removed when no longer required for
comparison with finished work.
E. Statements. -
1. Pumping concrete: Submit proposed materials and methods for pumping concrete.
Submittal shall include mix designs, pumping equipment, including type of pump and
size and material for pipe, and maximum length and height concrete will be pumped.
F. Test Reports.
1. Concrete Mix Design: Indicating mix was tested and produced concrete with
specified properties.
- 2. Fly Ash: Test in accordance with A6TM C 618-96.
3. Ponolan: Test in accordance with A6TM C 6 18-96.
4. Aggregates: A6TM C 227 for potential alkali-silica reactions, A6TM C 295 for
petrographic analysis.
G. Field Test Reports.
1. Compressive Strength Tests.
1.04 MIX DESIGNS
A. Mix designs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
1. Contractor shall employ a Testing Laboratory approved by the Architect under the
active direction of a Civil Engineer, who shall determine mix designs to fulfil1 the
specified requirements for strength, aggregate size, workability and placement
method of concrete, and such designs shall be used in proportioning all structural
concrete.
2. Mix designs shall be made in accordance with “Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete”, ACI 211 .I, 1991.
3. Cover and clear distances between reinforcing bars shown on the drawings shall be
considered in determining the aggregate size for mix designs and may result in an
aggregate size smaller than the maximum aggregate size allowed elsewhere in this
specification.
4. A list of where the mix designs are to be used shall accompany the designs.
20 October 1997 Cast&-Place Concrete
Carlsbad Cii Library 03300-2
96013
1.05
A.
QUALllYA66URANCE
At least 5 cylinders for each 50 cubic yards of each separate mix design of concrete of
required strength in excess of 2000 psi, or fraction thereof being placed each day shall
be taken.
B. Cylinders will be taken so as to represent as nearly as possible the batch of concrete from
which they are taken. Sampling procedures shall conform to ASTM C 172-90.
C. Test cylinders shall be made and cured in compliance with ASTM C 31-95, except as
modified herein.
D. Test cylinders from respective batches, two at age of 7 days, and two at age of 28 days.
The fifth will be tested as directed if concrete is under that specified. Cylinder testing
procedures shall conform to A6TM C 3994 for strength.
E. Slump tests shall be taken as required by testing laboratory to certify compliance with
Contract Documents. Slump shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 143-90.
F. Minimum compressive strength of test cylinders, in pounds, per square inch, shall not be
less than the specified required design strength.
G. If minimum strengths of test cylinders fall below those specified, Architect may require
test cores from hardened concrete to be taken and tested. Each core test, if taken, shall
consist of three (3) cores. Costs of such cores and tests shall be borne by the
Contractor. Cores shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C 42-96, from locations
selected by Archiict Contractor shall repair core holes with dry-pack or a non-shrinking
mortar.
I. Concrete tested by coring shall be considered acceptable if the average strength of
three (31 cores is equal to at least 0.85 of the minimum specified 28 days strength
and if no single core strength is less than 0.75 of the minimum 28 day strength.
1.06 INSPECTlON
A. An ICBO certified reinforced concrete special inspector from the Owner’s Testing
Laboratory shall be present at all times during placing of structural, reinforced cast-in-
place concrete in accordance with Section 01400 and the Drawings. Prior to placing
concrete, he will inspect and approve [if satisfactory) accuracy of all formwork, absence
of dirt and debris, and quantity and placement of all reinforcing steel. Work shall not
proceed until inspections are complete and the inspected work is approved.
5. Review by the Architect shall not be considered unqualified approval, and shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish concrete of proper consistency
and specified strengths.
6. In addition to original mix designs, new mix designs shall be provided if change in
brand or type of cement or change in source or gradation of aggregate is permitted,
or if defective concrete occurs.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Cast-In-Place Concrete
033003
96013
1.07 CONCRETE PLANT INSPECRON
A. Manufacturer of structural concrete shall deliver to the Owner’s Testing Laboratory a
certificate with each mixer truck in accordance with ASTM C 94-96, Section 16.1 and
16.2. The Certificate shall identify the source and description of aggregates.
I, Certificates shall be from a Public Weightmaster.
2. The Owner’sTesting Laboratory will not accept concrete which is not accompanied
by and identified by the above certificates.
B. Periodic inspection of quality of materials used may be made by the Owner’s Testing
Laboratory, as directed by Architect
PART 2 - PRODUCT6
2.01 CDNCRRE MlX DESIGN
A. Concrete shall have a minimum 28day compressive strength as indicated on the
Drawings. Slump shall be between 2 and 4 inches except may be increased to a
maximum of 7 inches when superplasticizers are used. Provide ASTM C 33 aggregate
size No. 57 for cast-in-place concrete. Air entrainment shall be 4 to 6 percent using an
air entrainment admixture. Structural concrete (beams, columns, walls, concrete topping
over metal deck and interior slab-on-grade) shall have a minimum of 564 pounds of
cement per cubic yard with a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.50 by weight For
determination of the water/cement ratio, the water weight shall include all water,
including admtires and the cement weight shall include all cementitious materials. The
water soluble chloride ion concentration in hardened concrete at ages from 2842 days
shall not exceed 0.10 percent by weight of cement.
2.02 MATERIALS
A Portland Cement A!3TM C 150-95, Rev. A, Type II, low alkali, color - gray.
B. Regular Weight Concrete Aggregates: ASTM C 33-90, except that the aggregate shall
have dissolved silica of less than 39 millimoles per liter per ASTM C 289-94, or
expansions of less than 10 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1260-94.
1. Furnish aggregates for exposed surfaces from one source. Aggregates shall not
contain any substances which may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the
cement
2. Grading of combined aggregate shall be in conformance with UBC Chapter 7 for
Class A concrete aggregates.
C. Admixtures, if used: A6TM C 494-92, of a type that increases workability and reduces
water demand of concrete, but will not increase shrinkage. Admixture shall be subject to
review as to type and amount used. Admixtures shall be free of chlorides.
0. Air-Entraining Agent A6TM C 260-95, subject to review.
20 October 1997 Cast-ln-Place Concrete
Carlsbad Cii Library 033004
96013
E. Water Used In Mixing Concrete: Potable, clean and free from deleterious amounts of
acid, alkalis, organic or other materials.
F. Vapor Barrier: Reinforced 2ply or 3ply polyethylene “Type 65 Griffolyn Reinforced Vapor
Barrier” by Reef Industries, Inc., “Rufco 400 66B” by Raven Industries, or approved equal.
G. Curing Membrane: Nonstaining paper conforming to A6TM C 171-95 or 6 mil thick
polyethylene film.
H. Curing Compound: ASTM C 30995, liquid membrane forming, with fugitive dye for
identification. Compound shall be compatible with finish to be applied thereto. Curing
compound and areas receiving it must be approved. Curing compound used for colored
concrete shall also be approved by pigment manufacturer.
I. Expansion Joint Filler: Premolded, of sizes and thicknesses shown on drawings,
conforming to A!3TM D 175163, Rev 91,
J. Expansion Joint Sealing Compound: Expansion joint sealant and backer md shall be in
accordance with Section 07920.
K. Clear Sealer Hardener: 6onnebom “Lapidolii”, Protex Industries “Lithoplate”, or approved
equal.
L. Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete: Davis Colors, QC Construction Products, LM.
Scofield Co., or equivalent
.- M. Non6hrink Gmut Master Builders “Embeco 636”, Euclid “NS Grout”, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PLACING MISCEUANEDUS MATERIALS
A. Vapor Barrier: Provide beneath interior on-grade concrete floor slabs. Use the greatest
widths and lengths practicable to eliminate joints wherever possible. Lap joints a
minimum of 12 inches and tape joints in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Remove torn, punctured or damaged vapor barrier material and
provide with new vapor barrier prior to placing concrete. Place a 2 inch layer of clean
concrete sand on vapor barrier before placing concrete.
6. Setting Miscellaneous Material: Place and secure anchors and bolts, pipe sleeves,
conduits, and other such items in position before concrete placement Plumb anchor
bolts and check location and elevation. Temporarily fill voids in sleeves with readily
removable material to prevent the entry of concrete.
3.02 MIXING
A. Ready mixed concrete shall be used and shall be mixed and transported in accordance
with “Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete”, ASTM C 9496.
,* B. Retempering: Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use. Concrete
which has set shall be discarded and shall not be retempered.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Cast-in-Place Concrete
033095
96013
C. Addional water may be added, under supervision of the testing engineer, provided that
both the specified maximum slump and water/cement ratio are not exceeded. When
additional water is added, an additional 30 revolutions of the mixer at maximum speed is
required. The amount of addiional water added shall be noted on the batch ticket by the
testing engineer.
3.03 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE
A The Architect shell be notified at least two working days in advance of the placing of any
concrete.
6. Preparation Before Placing:
I, Hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the inner surfaces
of conveying equipment
2. Formwork shall ha\le been completed; excess water removed; reinforcement secured
in place; expansion joint material, anchors, and other embedded items positioned: and
the entire preparation inspected and approved on the day prior to the placing of
concrete.
3. Semi-porous subgrades shall be sprinkled sufficiently to eliminate suction and
extremely porous subgrades shall be sealed with vapor barrier.
4. Before placing concrete, forms shall be thoroughly cleaned, washed out with water,
and made tight Before reinforcing steel is placed in forms which have been sealed,
excess surface sealer shall be removed so that sealer does not come in contact with
the reinforcing steel.
5. Remove hardened concrete from forms and reinforcing steel at construction joints.
Concrete which has been previously placed shall be prepared by sandblasting to
roughen surface and washed down.
6. Depositing Against Other Concrete: Before depositing new concrete on or against
hardened concrete, retighten forms and roughen surface of hardened concrete as
follows:
a. Concrete which has been placed longer than 3-l/2 hours, but less than 6-l/2
hours - prepare by removing all laitance from concrete by wire brushing.
Concrete which has been placed longer than 6-l/2 hours - prepare by
sandblasting to roughen surfaces. Thoroughly clean off foreign matter and
laitance, and moisten with water.
C. Placement:
1. Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as soon as
practicable after the forms and the reinforcement have been inspected and
approved. Deposit concrete as close as practicable to the final position in the forms.
20 October 1997 Cast-in-Place Concrete
Carlsbad City Library 033006
96013
P”-
Do not exceed a vertical drop of three feet from the point of discharge. Place
concrete in one continuous operation from one end of the structure towards the
other. Position grade stakes at 10 foot centers maximum in each direction when
pouring interior slabs and at 20 foot centers each way maximum for exterior slabs.
2. Conveying equipment shall be of size and design to ensure a continuous flow of
concrete at the delivery end.
3. Concrete deposited in layers shall be placed in layers of 18 inch maximum thickness
such that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently
to cause the formation of seams, planes, or weakness within the section, or visible
pour lines in the finish surface.
4. Furnish a spare vibrator on the job site whenever concrete is placed. Consolidate
concrete slabs greater than 4 inches in depth with high frequency, internal,
mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading and tamping.
Consolidate concrete slabs 4 inches or less in depth by wood tampers, spading, and
setting with a heavy leveling straightedge. Operate vibrators with vibratory element
submerged in the concrete with a minimum frequency of 6000 impulses per minute
when submerged. Do not use vibrators to transport the concrete in the forms.
Insert and withdraw vibrators approximately 18 inches apart Penetrate the previous
lift of concrete with the vibrator when more than one lift is required. External
vibrators shall be used on exterior surfaces of forms when internal vibrators do not
provide adequate consolidation of concrete.
5. Pumping of concrete shall be performed in accordance with “Placing Concrete by
Pumping Methods”, AU 304.2~96. Pumping shall not result in separation or a loss
of materials nor cause interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between
successive increments. Loss of slump in concrete conveyed through pumping
equipment shall not exceed 2 inches. Concrete shall not be conveyed through pipe
made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. Rapid changes in pipe size shall be avoided.
Maximum size of course aggregate shall be limited to one third of the interior
diameter of the pipe. Samples for testing shall be taken at both the point of delivery
to the pump and at the discharge end.
D. Fiatwork:
1. Edge forms and intermediate screed strips shall be set accurately to produce the
designed elevations and contours in the finished surface, and shall be sufficiently
strong to support vibrating bridge screeds or roller pipe screeds if the nature of the
finish specified requires the use of such equipment. The concrete surface shall be
aligned to the contours of screed strips by the use of strike-off templates or approved
compacting type screeds.
2. Slope floors uniformly to drains where drains are indicated. Depress the concrete
base slab where tile or other floor surfaces are indicated.
3. Joints in slabs on grade shall be located and detailed as indicated in the Drawings.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-7
96013
3.04 REPAlR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
A Repair of Surface Defects: Form tie holes shall be filled and repairable defective areas
patched immediately after the forms have been removed. Remove fins and burrs.
6. Removal: After forms have been removed, concrete which is not formed as shown on the
plans, or which is out of alignment or level beyond required tolerances shall be removed
and replaced. Defective surfaces may be repaired and patched in accordance with the
“Repair Procedure” indicated below. All conditions requiring patches and completed
patches will be inspected by the Architect Patches disapproved by the Architect as not
restoring the quality and appearance of the surrounding work shall be removed and
replaced so as to match the surrounding work.
C. Repair Procedure:
1. Honeycombed and other defective concrete greater than 1 square inch surface area
or 0.25 inch maximum depth shall be removed to sound concrete, but in no case to
a depth of less than 1 ‘I. The area to be patched and an area of at least 6” wide
surrounding it shall be dampened to prevent absorption of water from the patching
mortar. A bond of neat pordand cement water and fine sand passing a No. 30 sieve
shall be mixed to the consistency of thick cream and shall then be well brushed into
the surface. Other concrete bonding agents may be used when approved.
2. The patching mixture shall be made of the same material and of approximately the
same proportions as used for the concrete, exept that the course aggregate shall be
omitted and the mortar shall consist of not more than 1 part cement to 2-l/2 parts
sand by damp loose volume. White portlend cement shall be substituted for a part
of the gray portland cement on exposed concrete in order to produce a color
matching the color of the surrounding concrete, as determined by a trial patch.
3. The quantity of mixing water shall be no more than necessary for handling and
placing. The patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to stand with
frequent manipulation with a trowel, without addition of water, until it has reached the
stiffest consistency that will permit placing.
4. After surface water has evaporated from the areas to be patched, the bond coat
shall be well brushed into the surface. When the bond coat begins to lose the water
sheen, the pre-mixed patching mortar shall be applied. The mortar shall be
thoroughly consolidated into place and struck off so as to leave the patch slightly
higher than the surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage, the patches shall be
left undisturbed for at least one hour before being finally finished. The patched area
shall be kept damp for seven days,
D. Prior to proceeding with patch work, establish trial patch areas to develop the approved
patching color and the method of applying and surface-texturing the patching material.
3.05 CONCRETE FINISHES - FORMED SURFACES
A. Interior As-Cast Surfaces: After surface defects have been repaired, as specified,
concrete shall be left with finish imparted by forms.
20 October 1997 Cast-in-Place Concrete
Carlsbad Cii Library 03300-8
96013
,r-
6. Exterior Surfaces: After surface defects have been repaired as specified, concrete shall
be given a medium sandblast finish sufficient to break down the surface plane and expose
the aggregate.
3.06 CDNCRETE flNlSHES - FLATVVDRK
A. Floated finish for subfloors below tile: After concrete has been placed, struck off,
consolidated and leveled, concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating.
Floatjng shall begin when water sheen has disappeared, and/or when mix has stiffened
sufficiently to permit proper operation of a power-driven float Surface shall then be
consolidated with power-driven floats of impact type except in thin sections such as pan
slabs. Hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats shall be used in locations inaccessible
to powerdriven machine. Trueness of surface shall be rechecked at this stage with a 1 O-
ft. straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. All high spots shall be cut
down and all low spots filled during this procedure to produce planes checking true under
the straightedge in any direction, with tolerances as indicated in Section 03100. Slab
shall then be refloated immediately to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
.-
6. Troweled finish for interior concrete finish floors, colored concrete and subfloors for
resilient flooring and carpet Surface shall be finished first with impact power floats, as
specified above where applicable, then with power trowels, and finally with hand trowels.
First troweling after power floating shall be done by a power trowel and shall produce a
smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel
marks. Additional trowelings shall be done by hand after surface has hardened
sufficiently. Final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is
moved over surface. Surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling
operations. finished surface shall be free of trowel marks and shall be uniform in texture
and appearance. On surfaces intended to support floor covering, defects of sufficient
magnitude to show through floor covering shall be removed by grinding.
C. Edge and Joint Finish: Use standard tools to produce rounded edge corners and
intermediate line scoring.
D. Concrete banding immediately adjacent to exterior granite pavers: After surface defects
have been repaired as specified, concrete shall be given a medium sandblast finish
sufficient to break down the surface plane and expose the aggregate.
3.07 PRDTECTlON AND CURING
A. Curing shall be performed in accordance with “Standard Practice for Curing Concrete”,
ACl308-92, unless noted othetwise. Freshly deposited concrete shall be protected from
premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures, and shall be maintained
without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for
the hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete.
6. Initial Curing: Initial curing shall immediately follow the finishing operation. Concrete shall
be kept continuously moist for a 24 hour period. One of the following materials or
methods shall be used.
1. Ponding or continuous sprinkling.
2. Absorptive mat or fabric kept continuously wet.
20 October 1997 Cast-in-Place Concrete
Carlsbad Cii Library 033008
96013
3. Sand or other covering kept continuously wet
4. Curing compounds conforming to ASTM C 30995. Submit to Architect for review.
Such compounds shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer and shall not be used on surfaces against which additional concrete
or other cementitious finishing materials are to be bonded, nor on surfaces on which
such curing is prohibited by other sections of these specifications.
5. The Contra&or is responsible for taking what ever curing measures necessary to
assure the moisture content in the concrete slabs that are to receive subsequent
floor finishes, does not exceed the maximum moisture content allowed by the
manufacture of the subsequent floor finish to be installed.
C. Final Curing: Immediately following the initial curing and before the concrete has dried,
additional curing shall be accomplished by one of the following materials or methods.
1. Continuing the method used in initial curing.
2. Waterproof paper covering.
3. Other moistureretaining coverings, as approved.
D. Duration of Curing: Final curing shall continue for seven days. Rapid drying at the end of
the curing period shall be prevented.
E. Formed Surfaces: Steel forms heated by the sun and wood forms in contact with the
concrete during the final curing period shall be kept wet. lf forms are to be removed
during the curing period, one of the above curing materials or methods shall be employed
immediately. Such curing shall be continued for the remainder of the curing period.
F. Protection from Mechanical Injury: During the curing period, the concrete shall be
protected from damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy
shock, and excessive vibration. Finished concrete surfaces shall be protected from
damage caused by construction equipment, materials, or methods, and by rain or running
water. Setfsupporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to overstress the
concrete.
G. Cure surfaces to receive waterproofing membrane, floor tile and hardeners by covering
with waterproof paper coverings.
3.08 JOINTS
A Construction Joints: Provide construction joints in structural slabs, beams, walls and
other areas as indicated; or if not indicated, not over 60 feet in any hotizontal direction
where concrete is exposed to the elements. Locate joints not indicated to least impair
strength, appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect
I, Provide keyways at least l-1/2” deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and
between walls and footings: accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be
used for slabs.
20 October 1997 Cast&Place Concrete
Carlsbad Cii Library 03300-I 0
96013
2. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue
reinforcement across construction joints, Thoroughly clean reinforcement before
next pour is made.
END OF SECTlON
/-
20 October 1997
Carlsbad Cii Library
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-I 1
96013
SECTION 03350
SPECIAL CONCRETE FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
6.
1.03
A.
,-
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. Submit the following:
Samples: Submit samples not less than 12” x 12” size of each concrete finish, indicating
materials and methods used to produce finishes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
6. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
c-
20 October 1997 Special Concrete Finishes
Carlsbad City Library 03350-I 96013
8. Allow concrete to cure not less than 72 hours before commencing surface finish
operations, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
C. Protect adjacent materials and finishes from dust, dirt and other surface of physical
damage during finishing operations. Provide protections as required and remove from
site at completion of work.
D. Repair or replace other work damaged by finishing operations, as directed.
E. Abrasive Blast Concrete Finish: Apply abrasive-blasted finish to concrete surfaces where
indicated.
1. Surface Continuity: Perform abrasive blast finishing in continuous operation as
possible, utilizing same work crew to maintain continuity of finish on each surface or
area of work. Maintain patterns of variances in depths of blast.
2. Depth of Cut: Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation to expose
aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces to match mockup as follows:
a. Light: Generally expose small aggregate.
b. Medium: Generally expose coarse aggregate.
3: Abrasive Blasting: Abrasive blast corners and edge of patterns carefully, using
back-up boards, to maintain uniform corner or edge line. Determine type of nozzle,
nozzle pressure, and blasting techniques required to match Architect’s samples.
3.03 CLEANING UP AND PROTECTION
A. Maintain control of in each area of work. Clean up and remove such material at
completion of each day of application.
B. Cooperate with other trades for protection of completed finishes.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Special Concrete Finishes
03350-2 96013
rc
SECTIDN 03490
GLASS - FIBER - REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not limited to, the Agreement,
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Divisions 1.2, and 3 of these
Specifications and the Drawings.
CODES AND STANDARDS
Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or the details on the drawings,
work shall conform to the applicable provisions of the following codes and standards:
1. “Uniform Building Code” (UBC): 1994 edition, Chapter 19, “Concrete”.
2. American Concrete Institute [ACI): “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete”, ACI 318-95, and other standards hereinafter referred to.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): The specifications and
standards hereinafter referred to.
4. Prestressed Concrete Institute MNL 117 “Manual for Quality Control for Plants and
Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products”.
5. Standards of the National Precast Concrete Association.
In case of conflict between referenced standards, the more stringent requirements shall
govern.
SUBMllTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications, data and instructions for
manufactured materials and products. Include manufacturer’s certifications and
laboratory test reports, as required.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing complete information for fabrication and
installation of GFRC units. Indicate member dimensions and cross-section; location, size
and type of reinforcement, including special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary
for handling and erection.
Samples: Submit samples approximately 12” x 12” x 2” to illustrate quality, color, and
texture of surface finish.
/-
20 October ‘1997
Carlsbad City Library
Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Precast Concrete
03490-I
96013
1.04
A.
B.
C.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
1.07
A.
QUALlTY ASSURANCE
Fabricator Qualifications: firms which have a minimum of 2 to 5 years successful
experience in the fabrication of architectural Glass - Fiber - Reinforced Concrete (GFRC]
units, similar to units required for this project will be acceptable. Fabricator must have
sufficient production capacity to produce, transport, and deliver required units without
causing delay in the work.
Fabrication Qualiiations: Produce GFRC units at fabricating plant certified by the National
Precast Concrete Association engaged primarily in manufacturing of similar units.
Fabricator shall provide a design for precast GFRC screen walls prepared by a Ciil
Engineer registered in the State of California.
DEUVERY, STORAGE AND HANDUNG
Deliver GFRC units to project site in such quantities and at such times to assure continuity
of installation. Store units at project site to prevent cracking, distortion, warping, staining,
or other physical damage and so that markings are visible. Lift and support units only at
designated lifting or supporting points as shown on final shop drawings.
WARRANTY
Fabricator shall provide warranty for GFRC units as being free from manufacturing defects
for a period of three years,
INSPECTlON
An ICBO certified reinforced concrete special inspector from the Owner’s Testing
Laboratory shall be present at all times during erection of GFFIC screen walls. Prior to
placing GFRC units, he will inspect and approve [if satisfactory] accuracy of all foundations,
base plates and embedded items. He will inspect and approve (if satisfactory) installation
of GFRC units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A. Provide forms of metal, plastic, wood, or other acceptable material that is nonreactive
with GFFIC and will produce required finish surfaces.
B. Maintain formwork to provide completed GFRC units of shapes, lines and dimensions
indicated, within specified fabrication tolerances.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel: ASTM A 36-94.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307-94, Grade A.
C. Nuts: ASTM A 563-94, Grade A.
20 October 1997 Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Carlsbad Cii Library Precast Concrete
03490-2
96013
0.
,- E.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
2.04
A.
.- 8.
2.05
A.
B.
C. Surface Finish: Fabricate GFRC units and provide exposed surface finishes as follows:
Washers: ASTM F 844.
Galvanizing: All steel materials shall be galvanized in accordance with Asrnn A 12389.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. Use only one brand and type of cement
Water: Drinkable, free from foreign materials in amounts harmful to concrete and
embedded steel.
Aggregates: ASTM C 14493.
GFRC MATERIAL
Mix Proportions:
1. GFRC shall be a uniform mix of quality material.
2. Glass fibers shall be alkali resistant zirconia 1” to 2” inches long with a minimum of
5Oh content
3. Forton Polymer: No less than 10 Ibs. of polymer shall be used in each batch.
4. Color: San Diego Precast Concrete, Inc. Mii Design #I “Natural”, or approved equal.
Flexural Strength: All GFRC shall develop a minimum flexural strength of 3000 psi in 23
days unless other strengths are required.
FABRICATION
Fabricate GFRC units complying with manufacturing and testing procedures, quality
control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances of PCI MNL-117, unless otherwise
indicated.
Fabricate units straight, smooth, and true to size and shape, with exposed edges and
corners precise and square, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Precast units which are warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or otherwise
defective will not be acceptable.
1. Smooth surface finish free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycomb, with uniform
color and texture to match color indicated in paragraph 2.04.A.
PART 3 - EXECLJTlON
3.0 1 INSTALlATlON
.
,- A. Deliver anchorage items which are to be embedded in other construction before start of
20 October 1997 Glass-Fiber-Reinforced 96013
Carlsbad City Library Precast Concrete
03490-3
such work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions and directions as required
for installation.
8. Do not install GFRC units until supporting concrete has attained its design compressive
strength.
C. Install GFRC members plumb, level, and in alignment within PCI MNL-17 specified limits
of erection tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain
position, stabilityend alignment as members are being permanently connected.
D. Accessories: Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for erection of precast
units to supporting foundations and for support of gates and other ornamentation.
E. Anchor units in final position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated.
Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring is
completed.
F. Cleaning: Clean exposed facings to remove dirt and stains which may be on units after
erection and complebon of joint treatments. Wash and rinse in accordance with precast
manufacturer’s recommendations. Protect other work from damage due to cleaning
operations. Do not use cleaning materials or processes which could change the
character of exposed concrete finishes.
END OF SXTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad Cii Library
GIass-Fiber-Reinforced
Precast Concrete
034904
96013
SECTION 04220
CONCRETE UNlT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not limited to, the Agreement,
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Divisions 1,2,3,4 and 5 of
these Specifications and the Drawings.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or the details on the Drawings,
work shall conform to the applicable provisions of the following codes and standards:
1. “Uniform Building Code” (UBC): 1994 edition, Chapter 21, “Masonry”.
2. American Concrete Institute [ACI]: “Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures”, ACI 530.1-92.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (AS??vl]: The specifications and
standards hereinafter referred to.
1.03 SUBMllTALS
A Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Mix Designs: Mii designs shall be submitted to the Architect for review at least 30 days
prior to scheduled grout and mortar placement.
C. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Anchors and ties.
2. Control joints,
D. Test Reports.
1. Mix Designs: Indicating mixes were tested and produced grout and mortar with
specified properties.
2. Masonry Prism tests.
3. Mortar and Grout tests.
E. Field Test Reports.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Concrete Unit Masonry
04220-I
96013
I, Mortar and grout compressive strength tests.
2. Masonry Core tests.
F. Certificates
1. Concrete Block: Provide certificate of sampling and compliance for each shipment
of masonry units stating conformance with specified grade, strength and moisture
content -
2. Reinforcing Steel: Provide certificates stating the grades and physical and chemical
properties of the reinforcing steel, and conformance with ASTM Specifications.
Certificates shall be submitted before delivery of the steel to the job site.
G. Shop Drawings
1. Submit shop and placement drawings of all reinforcing for review.
2. Placement drawings shall show the locatjons and spacing of reinforcing in the various
parts of the structure with details, as required, in accordance with ACI 315-80,
[Revised 1986). Cutting and bending lists submitted without placement drawings will
be returned without review as incomplete. Placement drawings shall be complete so
that placement of the reinforcing may proceed without reference to the design
drawings.
3. Review shall not act to relieve the Contractor from responsibility for accuracy of the
fabrication details and placing diagrams. Dimensions and locations shall be verified
prior to the preparation of shop drawings.
4. No work shall be done except from approved shop drawings which must be kept at
the site.
1.04 MIX DESIGNS
A. Mix designs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
1. Contractor shall employ a Testing Laboratory approved by the Architect under the
active direction of a Civil Engineer, who shall determine mix designs to f&ill the
specified requirements for strength, aggregate size, workability and placement
methods of mortar and grout, and such designs shall be used in all structural
masonry.
2. Review by the Architect shall not be considered unqualified approval, and shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish masonry of specified strengths.
1.05 QUALlTY ASSURANCE
A. Concrete block shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 140-94A and UBC Standard
No. 21-17.
B. Masonry prisms shall be made and tested in accordance with UBC Standard No. 21-17.
20 October 1997 Concrete Unit Masonry
Carlsbad Cii Library 04220-2
96013
C. Mortar and Grout Tests: At the beginning of all masonry work, at least one test sample
of the mortar and grout shall be taken on three successive working days and at least at
one week intervals thereafter. The samples shall be continuously stored in moist air until
tested. Additional samples shall be taken whenever any change in materials or job
condiions occur, or whenever in the judgement of the Architect such tests are necessary
to determine the quality of the material.
I. Test specimens for mortar and grout shall be made as set forth in UBC Standard
Nos. 2 l-l 6 and 21-18 respectively. In making the mortar test specimens, the
mortar shall be taken from the unit soon after spreading. After molding, the molds
shall be carefully protected by a covering which shall be kept damp for at least 24
hours, after which the specimens shall be stored and tested as required for concrete
cylinders.
D.
2. In making grout test specimens, the masonry unit molds shall be broken away after
the grout has taken its set, but before it has hardened. lf an absorbent paper liner
is used, the mold may be left in place until the specimen has hardened. The prisms
shall be stored as required for concrete cylinders. They shall be tested in the vertical
position.
Masonry Core Tests: Not less than six cores having a diameter of approximately two
thirds of the wall thickness shall be taken. At least one core shall be taken for each 5000
square feet of floor area or fraction thereof. The Architect shall select the areas for
sampling. The shear loading shall test both joints between the grout core and the outside
widths of masonry. Core samples shall not be soaked before testing. Materials and
workmanship shall be such that for all masonry when tested in compression, cores shall
show an ultimate strength at least equal to fm assumed in design but not less than 1,500
pounds per square inch. When tested in shear, the unit shear on the cross section of the
core shall be not less than
2.5 Pm/in2.
Visual examination of all cores shall be made to ascertain if the joints are filled.
1. The Owner’s Testing Laboratory shall inspect the coring of the masonry walls and
shall prepare a report of coring operations for the testing laboratory files and provide
two copies to the Architect Such reports shall include the total number of cores cut,
the location, and the condition of all cores cut on each project regardless of whether
or not the core specimens failed during cutting operation. All cores shall be
submitted to the laboratory for examination.
1.06 MASONRY INSPECTION
A. An ICBO certified reinforced masonry special inspector from the Owner’s Testing
Laboratory shall be present at all times during construction of structural masonry in
accordance with Section 01400 and the Drawings. Prior to placing grout, he will inspect
and approve [if satisfactory] accuracy of all block work, absence of dirt and debris, and
quantiQ and placement of all reinforcing steel. Grouting shall not proceed until inspections
are complete and the inspected work is approved.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad Cii Library
Concrete Unit Masonry
042208
96013
1.07 SAMPLE PANEL
A The first 100 square feet of masonry work shall be considered as a sample only, and if
found acceptable, may be incorporated into the work. tf the sample is deemed
unstisfactoty by the Archii the sample shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense
and the process repeated until approval is given. All masonry shall match the accepted
sample panel in terms of quality and workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS -
2.01
A.
CONCRETE BLDCKS
Blocks shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 90-94, Type I, open end, standard
gray color, precision block, medium weight units, strength as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Provide special shapes where required for lintels, corner jambs, sash, control joints,
headers, bonding and other special conditions.
-B.
2. Sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Limit moisture absorption during delivery, storage and until time of installation to the
maximum percentage specified for Type I units.
2.02
A.
MORTAR
All mortar for concrete block shall conform to ASTM C 270-94, Type S and shall have
compressive strength indicated on Drawings.
B. Mortar shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed and be of spreadable, workable
consistency.
C. Mortar should be retempered with water as required to maintain high plasticity.
Retempering on mortar boards shall be done only by adding water within a basin formed
with the mortar and the mortar worked into the water. Any mortar which is unused after
one and one-half hours from the initial mixing time shall not be used.
D. After all ingredients are in the batch mixer they shall be mechanically mixed for not less
than three minutes.
E. If mortar is to be colored, inert coloring pigments may be used, but not to exceed six
percent by weight of cement.
F.
G.
2.03
A.
The use of fire clay, rock dust dirt and other deleterious materials is prohibited in mortar.
Sand for mortar shall conform to ASTM C 14493.
REINFORCEMENT STEEL
Reinforcement Bars: New, deformed billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615-95,
Rev. A, Grade 60 for bars No. 4 and larger, Grade 40 for No. 3 bars.
B. Reinforcement to be welded shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 706-95, Rev. B.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad Cii Library
Concrete Unit Masonry
042204
96013
,f-
C. Deliver bars new and free from rust and mill scale in original bundles with tags intact.
2.04 GROUT
A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C 476-91 and shall have minimum strength indicated on
Drawings. Use Type II, low alkali cement
B. Aggregate for masonry grout shall conform to ASTM C 404-97.
2.05 UME
1. Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C 207-91, Type S.
2.06 CONTROL JOINTS
1. Control joints shall be “Rapid Control Joints - Rubber” regular shape as manufactured
by DUR-DWAL “#RS Series Rubber” as manufactured by Huhman and Barnard, Inc.,
or approved equal
2.07 DTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to
acceptance by the Architect
PART 3 - EXECUTION
/-
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
3.04
A.
INSPECTlON
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
CDDRDlNATlON
Carefully coordinate with archiiral, civil, mechanical, plumbing and electrical drawings
and all other trades to ensure proper and adequate interface of the work of other trades
with the work of this Section. Place and secure anchors and bolts, pipe sleeves and other
such items before grout placement.
MIXING MORTAR
Use a mechanical mixer of one sack minimum capacity. Mix mortar for at least three
minutes after all materials have been added. Mix only as much mortar as can be used in
one hour after water has been first mixed into the batch.
INSTALlATlON
Masonry shall not be started when the horizontal and vertical alignment of the foundation
is out of plumb or line one inch or more.
20 October 1997 Concrete Unit Masonry
Carlsbad Cii Library 042205
96013
8. Care shall be taken to prevent grout and mortar stains. Keep wall continually clean; if
grout does run over, clean immediately.
C. Tolerances: Lay masonry plumb, true to line, with courses level. Keep bond pattern plumb
throughout Lay masonry within the following tolerances:
1. Maximum variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of walls and arises:
a. In adjaoent masonry units - l/8 inch.
b. In 10 feet - l/4 inch.
c. In a story or 20 feet maximum - 3/8 inch.
d. In 40 feet or more - l/2 inch.
2. Maximum variations from the plumb for external corners, expansion joints and other
conspicuous lines:
a. In a story or 20 feet maximum - l/4 inch.
b. In 40 feet or more - l/2 inch.
3; Maximum variations from the level or grades indicated for exposed lintels, sills,
parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines:
a. In a bay or 20 feet maximum - l/4 inch.
b. In 40 feet or more - l/2 inch.
4. Maximum variations of the linear building lines from the established position in plan
and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions:
a. In a bay or 20 feet maximum - l/2 inch.
b. In 40 feet or more - 3/4 inch.
5. Maximum variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls:
a. Minus - l/4 inch.
b. Plus - l/2 inch.
D. The masonry units shall be cut accurately to fii all plumbing, ducts, openings, electrical
work, etc., and all holes are to be neatly patched.
E. No construction support shall be attached to the wall except where specifically permitted
by the Architect
F. The top surface of the concrete foundation shall be clean and free of laitance and the
aggregate exposed before starting masonry construction,
20 October 1997 Concrete Unit Masonry
Carlsbad Ci Library 042208
96013
,-
G. Where no bond pattern is shown, the wall shall be laidup in straight, uniform courses with
regular half or running bond.
H. All work, bond patterns, special cuts or special details as shown on the Drawings shall be
accurately and uniformly executed.
3.05 JOINT9
A The starting joint on foundations shall be laid with full mortar coverage on the bed joints
except that the area where the grout occurs shall be free from mortar so that the grout
will be in contact with the foundation.
B. Mortar joints shall be straight clean, and uniform in thickness. Unless otherwise specified
in the details on the plans, the horizontal and vertical mortar joints shall be 3/8” thick.
C. All joints shall be tooled with a concave surface except surfaces to receive stucco or
waterproofing membrane shall be tooled with a flush joint Tooling shall be done when the
mortar is partially set and still sufficiently plastic to bond. All tooling shall be done with a
tool that compacts the mortar.
D. Vertical head joints shall be buttered for a thickness equal to the face shell of the unit and
these joints shall be shoved tightly so that the mortar bonds well with both units.
E. lf it is necessary to remove a unit after it has been set in place, the unit shall be removed
from the wall, cleaned and set in fresh mortar.
,,- F. i All work, bonds or special details shall be accurately and uniformly executed.
G. Where control joints are required or specified, they shall be located as detailed on the
Drawings.
3.06 REINFORCING
A. When a foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical core, it shall be sloped at not
more than one horizontal to six vertical. Dowels shall be grouted into a core in vertical
alignment even though it is in an adjacent cell to the vertical wall reinforcing.
B. Reinforcing bars shall be straight except for bends around corners and where bends or
hooks are detailed on the Plans.
C. Reinforcing steel where spliced shall be lapped a minimum of 40 bar diameters, 24
inches minimum , or as indicated on the Drawings.
D. When full length vertical bars are used, they shall be held in position at top and bottom at
intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters of the reinforcement.
E. Horizontal reinforcing shall be laid on the webs of bond beam units and shall be solidly
grouted in place. Reinforcing in channel units shall be spaced off the bottom of the unit.
F. Vertical reinforcing shall have a minimum clearance of 3/4” from the masonry.
20 October 1997 Concrete Unit Masonry
Carlsbad City Library 04220-7
96013
G. Welding of reinforcing steel shall not be permitted except as specifically approved or
detailed on the Drawings. ASTM A 706 reinforcing shall be used for bars to be welded.
Welding shall comply with Section 03200, paragraph 3.02.J of these Specifications.
Coordinate the placement and location of steel reinforcing detailed to be welded to
structural steel members with the structural steel fabricator and erector.
3.07 GROUTING
A. General: -
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Reinforcement shall be in place before grouting starts.
Mortar droppings shall be kept out of a grout space.
All grout shall be mechanically vibrated and then reconsolidated after initial water loss
and settlement have occurred.
Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment to maintain a continuous
unobstructed cell area not less than two inches by three inches.
Cleanouts shall be provided for all grout pours over 5 feet in height. Where required,
cleanouts shall be provided in the bottom course at every vertical bar but shall not be
spaced more than 32 inches on-center. ‘When cleanouts are required, they shall be
sealed after inspection and before grouting.
Cells containing reinforcement shall be solidly filled with grout and pours shall be
stopped one inch below the top of a course to form a key or joints.
Grouting at beams over opening shall be done in one continuous operation.
All cells containing reinforcement, anchor bolts and inserts shall be grouted solidly
without exception. Unless otherwise noted, all walls are to be solid grouted [all cells
filled with grout).
Spaces around metal door frames and other built-in items shall be filled solidly with
grout or mortar.
10. Columns, beams, joists, and similar structural members shall be anchored to the wall
with anchor botts or their equivalent Anchors shall be fully, solidly embedded in place.
Embedment shall not be less than 2/3 of the wall thickness, unless otherwise noted.
Beam pockets shall be filled with concrete after erection of structural steel.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Concrete Unit Masonry
Carlsbad Cii Library 042208
96013
SECTION 04415
INTERIOR STONEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
8. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
a. Provide setting drawings showing sizes and arrangement, provisions for jointing,
anchoring, and fastening. Indicate location with number corresponding to
number marked on each unit. Show location of inserts which are to be built into
other work.
4. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples not less than actual size for each type, color, and finish of stonework units.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations,
comply with the following:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. Al 08. l-l 992 Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Quarry Tile and Paver Tile
installed with Portland Cement Mortar.
b. ANSI Al08.10 Specifications for Installation of Grout in Ceramic Tile Installa-
tions.
20 October 1997 Interior Stonework
Carlsbad City Library 04415-I 96013
2. Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 1996
edition.
3. National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (NBGQA).
a. Specifications for Building Granite.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Granite: “Academy Black” granite, quarried in Raymond, California, as produced by Cold
Spring Granite Co., as follows:
1. Window Sills: l-1/4” thick, Honed finish.
2. Countertops: l-1/4” thick, Honed finish.
3. Wall Panels: 718” thick, Honed finish.
4. Stair Treads: l-114” thick, Thermal finish.
5. Stone Flooring: l-1/4” thick, Thermal finish, l-1/4” mortar setting.
6. Wall Base: 718” thick, Thermal finish.
8. Stone Panels at Donor Wall (Room 143):
1. Stone: 3/4” thick New Mexico Travertine.
2. Color: Sterling Fleuri.
3. Finish: Honed.
4. Supplier: New Mexico Travertine, Inc. (l-800-962-7253).
5. Setting: Dry set with concealed stainless steel clips and exposed fasteners as
detailed. Stone panels to be removable for future inscription of donors names.
C. Stone Dedication Plaque (at courtyard):
1. Stone: 3/4” thick New Mexico Travertine.
2. Color: Sterling Fleuri.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Interior Stonework
044 15-2 96013
3. Finish: Honed.
4. Supplier: New Mexico Travertine, Inc. (l-800-962-7253).
5. Setting: Thinset flush to face of stucco wall.
6. Text: Text to be cut into the face of the stone prior to setting as part of work in this
contract. Text and layout to be provided by the Architect in field.
D. Granite Tile to Match Granite Flooring:
1. Stone: 12” x 12” x 3/8” Granite Tile, thermal finish.
2. Color: Academy Black.
3. Finish: Thermal.
4. Supplier: Cold Springs Granite Co.
5. Setting: Thinset to slab on grade. Match joint widths at granite flooring.
E. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray or white as needed to produce mortar color
required.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
F. Sand: ASTM C 144.
1. For white pointing mortar, use selected natural white sand or ground white stone
sand.
2. For colored pointing mortar, use ground marble, granite or other sound stone to
match Architect’s sample.
G. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.4.
1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix with re-emulsifiable powder as additive, for mixing with
water only.
H. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI Al 18.6 of the following composition.
1. Prepackaged dry grout mix with re-emulsifiable powder as additive, for mixing with
water only.
I. Water: Potable, neutral pH.
20 October 1997 Interior Stonework
Carlsbad City Library 044 15-3 96013
J. Setting Bed Reinforcement: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2” x 2” - W0.3 x W0.3 (16
ASW gage or 0.0625” diam.); ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire
size.
K. Anchors: Nonferrous metal, as required to suit stone installations.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Precut stone units to required sizes and shapes. Use powered masonry saw for cutting
units at site. Avoid use of less-than-half-size units.
1. At stair treads, provide shop-fabricated abrasive insert strips of aluminum oxide or
silicon carbide.
2.03 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Do not use stone units with chips, cracks, voids, stain or other defects visible in finished
work. Clean stone before setting by scrubbing with fiber brushes and water. Wet stone,
as required, before setting. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for application of
proprietary materials.
Installation of Interior Wall Facing and Trim: Erect interior wall facing and trim plumb and
true with joints uniform in width and accurately aligned.
20 October 1997 Interior Stonework
Carlsbad City Library 044 15-4 96013
1.
2.
Set interior stone units against plaster spots located at or near anchors spaced not
farther than 18” apart.
a. For interior stone on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated, set stone
with portland cement mortar in lieu of plaster for setting spots.
Point joints after setting with pointing mortar mixed in proportions of 1 part portland
cement mortar, 1 part lime and 3 parts sand. Rub joints with plastic tool.
E. Install new stone flooring where required on plastic mortar bed to comply with require-
ments of ANSI A 108.1 for setting bed, and of ANSI A108.10 and TCA “Handbook for
Ceramic Tile Installation”, respectively, for TCA installation method and grout indicated
below:
1. Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA Fll 1 (cleavage membrane).
2. Grout: Latex-portland cement.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Interior Stonework
Carlsbad City Library 044 15-5 96013
SECTION 05100
SlRUCTLJFiALSlEEL
PART I- GENERAL
.-
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not limited to, the Agreement,
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Divisions I, 2,3,4 and 5 of
these Specifications and the Drawings.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or the details on the drawings,
work shall conform to the applicable provisions of the following codes and standards:
1. “Uniform Building Code” [UBC]: 1994 edition, Chapter 22, “Steel”.
2. American Institute of Steel Construction [AISC): “Manual of Steel Construction,
Allowable Stress Design”, Ninth edition.
3. American Welding Society (AWS): ‘Structural Welding Code”, AWS Dl .I-94.
4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): “Steel Structures Painting Manual”, Third
edition.
5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM]: The specifications and
standards hereinafter referred to.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
8. Shop Drawings
1. Submit shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and
shop assembly of members. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and
other perbnent data. Indicate welds by AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type
of weld. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor
bolts and other anchorages. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail number
on the Drawings.
2. Submit the entire structural steel submittal package at one time. Exceptions can be
requested by the Contractor prior to the first submittal to expedite the construction
schedule by subdividing the submittal package into the following order and categories:
a. All base plates, anchors, templates, and plans showing their locations and all
related details.
i-
b. All columns, beams, and plans showing their location and all related details.
20 October 1997 Structural Steel
Carlsbad City Library 05100-1
96013
c. Section 05300: All metal deck information, closure plates, shear connectors,
bracing, and plans showing their location, and any miscellaneous structural steel
items and all related details.
C. Product Data:
1. Load indicator washers.
2. Shop primeF;
D. Statements:
1. Welding procedures and qualifications: Prior to welding, submit certification for each
welder statjng the type of welding and positions qualified for, the code and procedure
qualified under, date qualified, and the firm and individual certifying the qualification
tests. If the qualification date of the welding operator is more than one year old, the
welding operator’s qualification certificate shall be accompanied by a current
certificate by the welder attesting to the fact that he has been engaged in welding
since the date of certification, with no break in welding service greater than 6
months.
E. Test Reports.
I; Bolts, nuts, and washers: Supply the certified manufacturer’s mill reports which
clearly show the applicable ASTM mechanical and chemical requirements together
with the actual test results for the supplied fasteners.
F. Certificates.
1. Steel.
2. Bolts, nuts, and washers.
3. Shop primer.
4. Welding electrodes and rods.
5. ICBO Quality Certification.
1.04 QUALllY ASSURANCE
A. Fabrication and Erection:
1. Perform all work in accordance with the applicable provisions of AISC “Specifications
for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,” and AWS
“Structural Welding Code”.
2. All structural steel, both in the shop and in field shall be transported and handled and
erected in such manner as will preclude any injury thereto and in no case shall the
material be subjected to any undue stresses in any part of connection or member.
20 October 1997 Structural Steel
Carlsbad City Library 05100-2
96013
B. Cooperation: Coordinate the work in the Structural Steel section with that of all other
sections. Provide all punchings and drilling indicated on the drawings, or required for the
abzachment of their work to the structural steel framing for masonry reinforcing seismic
connections, pipe and duct supports, anchors, aluminum sash, doors and similar work.
Provide necessary drilling and punching: accurately locate and arrange to receive and
engage the same.
C. field Measurements: Before starting work, secure all field measurements pertaining to
or affecting the work of this section and verify the locations and exact position of all anchor
bolts occurring therein.
D. Certification of Materials: Identify all structural steel by heat or meld number and
accompany with mill analysis and test reports. Furnish evidence to the Architect that the
materials conform with the requirements of these specifications.
1.05 INSPECTlON
A. An ICBD certified structural steel special inspector from the Owner’s Testing Laboratory
shall be present at all times during structural steel erection in accordance with Section
01400 and the Drawings.
1. It is assumed that steel will be fabricated within the State of California. All
transportation costs and per diem living costs for inspection at fabricator’s plants
outside of California will be back-charged to the Contractor.
2. All fabrication must be performed in a shop approved by International Conference of
Building Officials. It is assumed that all fabrication will take place in one shop location
only. All additional inspection costs resulting from fabrication at more than one shop
location will be backcharged to the Contractor.
3. All mill tests and costs of retests of plain materials shall be at the expense of the
Contractor.
B. Tests for Structural Steel shall be made and reports furnished in accordance with the
following requirements:
1. Perform all testing of structural steel in accordance with the requirements of
‘Standard Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products,” ASTM
A 370-94.
2. X-ray, Gamma Ray and Ultrasonic testing shall conform with requirements of AWS
Dl .I, Chapter 6.
3. Magnetic Particle testing shall conform to requirements of ASTM E 709-95 and
AWS D1.l.
4. zlPenetrant testing shall conform to requirements of ASTM E 165-95 and AWS
. .
20 October 1997 Structural Steel
Carlsbad City Library 051003
96013
. c- Mill Tests and Inspection of Structural Steel:
1. Tests of Mill Drder A36 Steel: Where steel, ordered from the mill, cut to lengths, is
identjfied by heat or meld numbers and is accompanied by mill analysis test reports,
material shati be used without further local tests, provided an affidavit is given that
materials conform with requirements. In case of controversy, tension and bend tests
of materials, either locally or at mill, as required for local stock will be required.
2. Test of Unidentified Steel: In the event structural steel cannot be identified by heat
or melt numbers and is accompanied by mill analysis and test report, such stock may
be used, provided 1 tension and 1 bend test is made for each 50 tons or fractional
part, of stock as may be used in work. Complete 4 sided surface inspection may be
required for materials. Each piece of high-strength local stock steel shall be tested
and stamped.
Il.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Any steel that cannot be identified or whose source is questionable shall be rejected and
removed from the job site.
Steel pipe shall have one tension, one bend and one flattening test for each lot of 500 foot
lengths or fraction thereof of each size.
Inspection of the structural steel will be performed in the mill, shop and field but such
inspections or tests shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish
satisfactory materials. The Architect shall have the right to inspect and reject faulty
materials or workmanship at any time prior to the final acceptance of the erected
structural steel.
Tests of Welding and Botbng: The Dwner’s Testing Laboratory shall inspect shop and field
welding and high tensile bolting. Testing shall comply with regulations of the Cii of
Carlsbad Building Inspection Department and shall certify in writing, upon completion of
work, that welding and high tensile bolting has been performed in accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications and applicable city ordinances.
Continuous Inspection High Tensile Bolts: The Owner’s Testing Laboratory shall check bolt
tightness on not less than 10% of bolts selected at random in each high strength bolt
connection with a minimum of two bolts per connection. lf the tension in any bolt tested
falls below the proper value then all bolts in that connection shall be tested. Inspection
procedure shall be as described in the “Specification for Structural Joints Using A!3TM A
325 or A 490 Bolts” by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints.
Testing of Complete Penetration Welds: The Testing Laboratory shall inspect moment
connections as indicated on the Drawings.
5. Test specimens shall be taken under direction of the Owner’s Testing Agency and
shall be machined by the Contractor to dimensions as required by the related
applicable Standard ASTM Specifications or AWS Standards.
1. Ultrasonic testing shall be performed by a specially trained, qualified technician, who
shall operate the equipment, examine welds and maintain a record of welds
examined, defects found and disposition of each defect. Cost of repairing and
retesting of defective welds shall be borne by the Contractor.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad Cii Library
Structural Steel
05 1004
96013
2. Ultrasonic instrumentation shall be calibrated by technician to evaluate the quality of
the welds in accordance with AWS Dl .I, Appendix C.
3. other methods of inspection, for example, xray, gamma ray, magnetic particle, or dye
penetrant, may be used on welds if deemed necessary by the inspection agency with
the cooperation of the Contractor.
J. Ultrasonic Material Inspection:
1. All column material within 1 foot (6 inches either side) of a direct complete
penetration weld for girder flange connections is to be ultrasonically tested for
laminations in accordance with ASTM designation A 578, Level II.
2. Material in designated location shall be tested for laminations by ultrasonic means
prior to fabrication, with written reports submitted to Architect
3. Detection of Laminations: Rejectable defects discovered by ultrasonic means are
defined as follows: Using suitable calibrated ultrasonic equipment, any recordable
disc0ntinu.Q causing complete loss of back reflection and which cannot be
encompassed within a 3inch diameter circle is unacceptable (Level II Standard of
Acceptance). Should such flaws be detected, they may be repaired by welding,
subject to the Architect’s approval.
K. Retesting of Welds and Laminations in Field: 25 percent of girder to column moment
connectjons shall be retested in the field. These connections shall be retested after the
welds are approximately 30 days old. Similarly, recheck column material for laminar
tearing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
MATERIALS
All materials shall conform with the following requirements and shall be free from scale,
defects and imperfections, of recent manufacture and unused. Where two or more
identical articles or pieces of equipment are required, they shall be of the same
manufacture.
Structural steel shall conform with ASTM A 36-94 for shapes, plates and bars, unless
noted otherwise.
Welding electrodes shall conform with AWS Dl .I, E70, series. Electrodes for welding
reinforcing steel to be low hydrogen electrodes.
Anchor bolts shall conform with ASTM A 307-94, Grade A High strength bolts shall
conform to A6TM A 325-94, Type 1. The bolt heads must be marked with the
manufacturer’s identification mark, strength grade and type.
Nuts: ASTM A 563-94, Grade and Style for applicable A6TM bolt standard
recommended.
Washers: ASTM F 84490 washers for ASTM A 307 bolts, and ASTM F 436-93
washers for A6TM A 325 bolts.
20 October 1997 Structural Steel
Carlsbad City Library 05100-5
96013
G. Load Indicator Botts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, with a manufactured notch between the bott
tip and threads. The bolt shall be designed to react to the opposing rotstional torques
applied by the installation wrench, with the bolt tip automatically shearing off when the
proper tension is obtained.
H. Load Indicator Washers: ASRvl F 95994.
I. Headed Welded Studs: Nelson “Granular RuxRlled Shear Connector and Anchor Studs,” -
“K6M Shear Connector Studs”, or approved equal, manufactured of Cl 015,1010, IO 17,
or 1020 cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A 108-95.
J. Expansion Anchors: lTW/Ramset “Redhead Dynabott Sleeve anchors”, Hilti “Kwik-Bolt”
anchors, or approved equal. Anchors shall have ICBC Cetication for use in concrete and
concrete block masonry.
K. Epoxy/Adhesive Anchors: ‘SET Adhesive Anchors” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co. (ER-52791
or Gunnebo Fastening Corp. (ER-4320) for use in concrete and concrete block masonry.
L Pipe Columns: ASTM A 53-95, Grade B.
M. Tube Steel: A6TM A 500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi.
N. Galvanizing shall conform to A6TM A 123-89.
0. shop Primer: Fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal primer; selected for
compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for compatibility to provide a sound
foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
P. Galvanizing Repair Paint High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized
steel, complying with Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships) or Steel Structures
Painting Council (SSPC] Paint 20.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WELDING
A. structural welding shall be done by the electric submerged or shielded metal arc process
and shall have inspection by the Owner’s Testing Laboratory. Operators shall be
thoroughly trained and experienced in arc welding of structures, capable of making
uniformly reliable butt and fillet welds in flat, vertical and overhead positions and by
producing neat and consistent work in actual operation. Each operator shall have ICBO
certification.
B. Surfaces to be welded shall be free of any paint, grease, loose scale and foreign matter.
Clean welds each time the electrode is changed and chip clean all burned or flame-cut
edges before welds are deposited thereon. The same electrode may be used with various
thicknesses of plate, but change current used and number of passes made
proportionately.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Structural Steel
051006
96013
.-
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
After being deposited, brush welds with wire brushes. Welds shall exhibit uniform section,
smoothness of welded metal, feathered edges without undercuts or overlays, and
freedom from poros*Q and clinkers. Visual inspection at edges and ends of fillet and butt
joint welds shall indicate a good fusion with penetration into base metal.
During assembly and welding, hold component part of a built-up member with sufficient
clamps or other adequate means to keep the parts straight and in close contact. In
welding, precautions shall be taken to minimize “lockup” stresses and distortion due to
heat. No welding shall be done under windy conditions until adequate wind protection
screening has been provided. Any welds or parts of welds which are found to be defective
shall be cut out with a chisel and replaced.
The maximum space between members to be butt welded shall not exceed l/4”, except
at web doubler plates. Bevel all pieces or members up to l/8” thickness to form a single
or double “vee” before being welded. Bevel welds over 3/8” in thickness to form a double
“vee” wherever possible.
Lay filled welds in the position indicated on the drawings and to the sizes shown. In
measuring fillet welds, consider only the effective portion. The maximum space between
pieces for members to be fillet welded shall not exceed l/l 6”.
Those members indicated “AESS on the drawings shall be welded in conformance with
the requirements of Section IO of the Al6C Code of Standard Practice entitled
“Archiirally Exposed Structural Steel”. Grind welds smooth on all AE66 members and
additional locations indicated on the Drawings.
Welding of steel reinforcing to structural steel shall be in accordance with Section 03300,
paragraph 3.02.J.
Touch-up Painting: As soon as possible after erection of primed structural steel, clean
painted areas which have been abraded or otherwise damaged by welding, bolting, or
other field operations. Apply touch-up paint matching shop coating by brush or spray to
all damaged paint areas, achieving a minimum final thickness of 1.5 mils.
ERECTION
Erect all structural steel with qualified riggers and carefully plan and lay out so that a
minimum of cutting shall be required. Erect work plumb, square and true to line and level,
and in precise position, as indicated. Provide temporary bracing and guys, wherever
necessary, to provide for the loads and stresses to which the structure may be subjected,
including those due to erection equipment and their operation, and leave in place as long
as it may be required for safeguarding all parts of the work.
As erection progresses, securety bolt-up work as required to maintain the steel in proper
position while field bolting and welding is being done and as required to take care of all
dead loads, wind and erection stresses. No field bolting or welding shall be done until the
work has been properly aligned, plumbed and leveled.
Set each column base plate in exact position as to alignment, plumb and height. The
center of each base shall be true to the column center within a tolerance of l/l 6”, and
its height shall be adjusted in exact position. Maintain all bases at the exact position and
level while they are being grouted.
20 October 1997 Structural Steel
Carlsbad Cii Library 05100-7
96013
D. Carry out erection of structural steel work in proper sequence with the work of other
trades, and frame, bed and anchor to concrete, masonry and related work in strict
accordance with the detail drawings and approved shop drawings.
E. field Modification: Written acceptance from the Architect must be obtained before using
cutting torch for field modification or refabrication of structural steel. The structural steel
fabricator shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit in the field.
F. Allowable Tolerances: Comply witi requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice.
Bases of all columns shall be located on the established column lines within plus or minus
l/8”. All leveling and plumbing shall be based on a mean temperature of 70 degrees F.
Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection.
G. Those members indicated “AESS” on the drawing shall conform to the stricter tolerances
and requirements of Section IO of the AISC Code of Standard Practice entitled
“Architecturally Exposed Structure Steel”.
3.03 CDNNECTlONS
A. Unfinished Bolts: Make field connections with unfinished bolts only were indicated.
B. High Strength Steel Boltings: Where structural joints are made using high strength bolts,
hardened washers and nuts tightened to a high tension, the materials, method of
installation and tension control, types of wrenches to be used, and inspection methods
shall conform to the “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts”, established by the Research Council on Structural Connection of the Engineering
Foundation, November 13,1985, except that Calibrated Wrench Tightening is not to be
used.
I, High strength bolts used shall have a suitable identifying mark placed on top of the
head before leaving the factory.
2. Bolts that have been completely tightened shall be marked with identifying symbol.
3. Hardened washers shall be installed as per AISC Specifications.
4. Contact bearing surfaces of bolted parts shall be free of scale, slag, burrs, and pits,
or dirt, paint or other foreign material and/or any defects which would prevent solid
seating of parts,
3.04 HEADED WELDED SllJDS
A. field install welded stud connectors in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
3.05 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Inspect the installation of anchor bolts, make all necessary field measurements and
furnish templates to insure that all structural steel will f& the job conditions. Locate all
columns as indicated on the drawings. Details for setting of anchor bolts in hardened or
existing concrete, which may be necessary because of error or oversight, shall be
submitted to the Architect for review and approved prior to installation,
20 October 1997 Structural Steel
Carlsbad Cii Library 05100-8
96013
3.06 FlNlSH
A. Clean all steel of any grease, rust, mill scale or other foreign matter. Material to be
welded or embedded in concrete shall not be primed.
END OF SECTlON
20 October 1997 Structural Steel
Carlsbad Cii Library 05 100-S
96013
6ECllON 05300
METAL DECKING
PART I- GENERAL
1 .Ol
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not limited to, the Agreement,
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Divisions I, 3,4 and 5 of these
Specifications and the Drawings.
CODES AND STANDARDS
Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or the details on the drawings,
work shall conform to the applicable provisions of the following codes and standards:
1. “Uniform Building Code” [UBC): 1994 edition, Chapter 20, “Lightweight Metals” and
Chapter 22, “Steel”.
2. Steel Deck Institute (SDI]: “Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and
Roof Decks”, SDI No. 28-l 992. “Manual of Construction with Steel Deck”, SDI, 1992.
3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI]: “Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual, 1989
edition.
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): The specifications and
standards hereinafter referred to.
In case of conflict bebtveen referenced standards, the more stringent requirements shall
govern.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Submit shop drawings, manufacturer’s technical data and material specifications, and
samples, as applicable, for all products specified herein for Architect’s review prior to start
of work in this section.
1. Submit shop Drawings: Note diaphragm deck welding pattern, deck gauge, closure
plates and other accessories on shop drawings.
2. Product Data: Comprehensive manufacturer’s descriptive data including
specifications and installation recommendations. Specifications shall include all
physical properties and load tables.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Metal Decking
05300-I
96013
I .04
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.05
A.
QUAUTY ASSURANCE
Bections and properbes of metal shall conform to minimum specifications for the design
of “Light Gauge Cold Formed Steel Structural Members”, as published by AfSI.
The Standards of the Steel Deck Institute, and all applicable codes and ordinances shall
be fully complied with.
Metal deck is designed for diaphragm action to resist lateral forces. Welding pattern
provided shall conform to an approved IBCD welding pattern arrangement.
Testing of stud shear connections and deck welding shall be performed in accordance
with Section 05 100, paragraph 1.05 G.
PRODUCT DELlVERY, SKIRAGE AND HANDLING
Deliver, store and handle metal decking is such a manner that it will not be damaged or
deformed. Exercise special care so as not to damage or overload the decking during the
entire construction period. Do not use metal decking for storage or as a working platform
until the sheets have been welded in position. Stack decking stored at the site before
erection on platforms or pallets and suitably protect from the weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCT6
2.0 1 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall conform with the following requirements and shall be of new stock of
the highest grade available, free from defects and imperfections, of recent manufacture
and unused. Where two or more identical articles or pieces of equipment are required,
they shall be of the same manufacture.
B. Metal Deck:
‘1 . 6ectional profile depth and minimum gauge are indicated on the structural drawings.
2. Decking shall be galvanized corrugated metal deck.
3. Floor decking shall be U.L rated.
C. Steel for Galvanized Deck: ASTM A 653, Designation GSO.
D. Flashing and Closures: Galvanized sheet steel as specified for decking.
E. Protective Coating: Zinc, ASTM A525 and Fed. Spec. QQ-S775d, Type I, Class e.
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: A6TM A 780-93, high zinc-dust content paint for repair of
damaged galvanized surfaces.
2.02 FABRlCATlON
20 October 1997
Carlsbad Cii Library
Metal Decking
05300-2
96013
,-
A. Form deck units in length to span three or more support spacings with flush, telescoped or
nested 2” end laps and interlocking side laps, unless otherwise shown or specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
r
3.01
A.
INSTALLATlON
Install all decking as per governing codes, drawing requirements, and manufacturer’s
specifications and recommendations.
B. ship all deck units to job site in standard widths and cut to proper lengths such that end
joints occur over supporting members. Perform all column notching, bevel cuts and other
field cuts, as required.
C. Place steel deck units on supporting framework and adjust to final position with proper
bearing before permanent& fastening. Verify that supports are properly aligned and
sufficiently level to permit proper bearing and report all discrepancies.
D. Provide flashings and closures where required to prevent concrete leakage. Provide
between decking and columns and at open ends of all cell runs at columns, walls,
openings, etc., and those which occur where cells change direction. Fasten in place by
welding or sheet metal screws as per manufacturer’s directions.
E. The positioning and placement of stud shear connectors shall be in accordance with AWS
specification on requirements for stud welding and as detailed on the drawings and in
Section 05100. The height of stud shall be a minimum of l-1/2” above the top deck flute
and a minimum of 1” below the top concrete surface. Where a shear stud and a plug
weld overlap, the shear stud may take the place of the plug weld.
F. Make all welds in accordance with structural drawings. Use only welders certified for
welding in light gauge metal.
G. Opening reinforcement shall be as detailed on the drawings. Cutting of holes other than
those detailed on the drawings shall be done only as specifically approved by the Architect.
Holes not shown on structural drawings shall be reinforced in accordance with details on
drawings under this section, but shall be located and paid for by trade requiring openings.
In general, reinforcing is not required for holes 6” or less in diameter.
H. Leave slag in place at welds to be covered by concrete. Elsewhere touch up all welds and
field cut edges with galvanizing repair paint. Grind smooth all welds in areas that will be
exposed to view.
3.02 CLEAN-UP
A. During the progress of the work, the premises shall be kept free of debris and waste
resulting from the work in this section. Upon completion, all surplus material and debris
shall be removed from the site.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad Cii Library
Metal Decking
053003
96013
SECTION 05400
LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not fully
dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer’s product data.
1. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations,
number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental strapping, bracing,
splices, bridging, accessories, and details required for proper installation.
2. Connections shall be designed in accordance with details and design criteria outlined
on the drawings and load and deflection criteria. Calculations and drawings shall be
signed by a California registered civil engineer.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Component Design: Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with
AISC “Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.”
20 October 1997 Lightgage Metal Framing
Carlsbad City Library 05400-I 96013
C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated
for a fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing
regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Welding: Comply with American Welding Society (AWS) Dl.3, Structural Welding Code -
Sheet Steel. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS
standard qualification procedures.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Angeles Metal Systems, conforming to ICBO No. 1715-P, or approved
equal.
B. System Components: With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer’s
standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements,
fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated,
as needed to provide a complete exterior metal framing system.
C. Materials and Finishes:
1. For 16 gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural
quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; ASTM A 570, Grade D.
2. For 16 gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of structural
quality sheet steel per ASTM A61 1, Grade C.
3. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A 525
for minimum G 60 coating.
D. “C”-Shape Studs: Manufacturer’s standard load-bearing steel studs of size, shape, and
gage indicated, with minimum 1.625” flange and flange return lip.
E. Stiffeners: l-l /2” cold-rolled steel channels, 16 gage.
F. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code, E70 Series.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate panels
plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting
of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion.
20 October 1997 Lightgage Metal Framing Carlsbad City Library 05400-2 96013
B. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by
welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer.
1. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted.
C. Fabrication Tolerance: Fabricate panels to maximum allowable tolerance variation from
plumb, level, and true to line of l/8” in 10 feet.
2.03 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02 r
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered
as acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper
installation of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturers recommended installation procedures.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls
or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to
supporting structure.
Field Painting: Touch-up shop-applied protective coatings damaged during handling and
installation. Use compatible primer for prime coated surface; use galvanizing repair paint
for galvanized surfaces.
END OF SECTION
F-- 20 October 1997 Lightgage Metal Framing
Carlsbad City Library 05400-3 96013
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
-a-- 1 -s-.-m.. l-‘AK I
1 .Ol
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
1 - GtNtKAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
a. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and
type of fasteners, and accessories.
b. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Metal Fabrications
05500-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
C. Bolts, Nuts, and-Washers: ASTM A307, ASTM A 325N, and ASTM A 449.
D. Welding Materials: AWS Dl .I ; type required for materials being welded.
E. Primer Paint:
1. Shop Paint: SSPC-Paint 2.
2. Omit shop paint on surfaces to be enclosed in concrete or surfaces to be welded.
F. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fed. Spec. n-P-641.
G. Provide zinc-coated or cadmium plated fasteners for exterior use and where built into
exterior walls.
H. Stainless Steel Fabrications: Provide austenitic stainless steel in form indicated
complying with the following requirements:
1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grades MT 301, MT 302, or MT 304, as standard with
manufacturer.
2. Pipe: ASTM A 312, Grade TP 304.
3. Plate: ASTM A 167, Type 301, 302, or 304.
4. Bar Stock: ASTM A 276.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Metal Fabrications
05500-2 96013
D.
/-
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed
edges to small uniform radius.
Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively
located; consistent with design of structure, except where specifically noted otherwise.
Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline.
Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications, Fabricate anchorage
and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where
specifically noted otherwise.
Interior Lighting Fabrications: Steel sections and plates in sizes and shapes indicated.
Continuous welds unless otherwise shown. Grind all welds flush and smooth. Shop
prime fabrications.
Exterior Stainless Steel Lighting Fabrications: Stainless steel sections and plate in sizes
and shapes indicated. Continuous welds unless otherwise indicated. Grind all welds
flush and smooth, polish to blend with adjacent unwelded surface. All fasteners and
accessories to be stainless steel.
Exposed Ends of Pipe or Tube Sections: Provide continuous smooth welded cover
plates.
FINISH
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is
required.
Prime paint items scheduled with one coat; except, apply two coats to surfaces
inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Galvanize items to minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 386.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Metal Fabrications
05500-3 96013
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturers recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly
into position for-long life under hard use.
Clean and strip site primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is scheduled.
Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS Dl .I.
After installation, touch-up field welds, scratched or damaged surfaces with primer.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
END OF SECTION
Metal Fabrications
05500-4 96013
SECTION 05712
STEEL STAIR SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
a. Shop drawings and calculations shall be signed and stamped by a State of
California registered civil engineer to indicate compliance with these specifica-
tions. Show locations, sizes, connection attachments, methods of anchoring,
openings, type of fasteners, accessories, and finishes.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Steel Stair System
05712-I 96013
YAK I - - -- 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
MATERIALS
Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36.
Steel Sheets: ASTM A 466, Grade B, Structural Quality.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S, seamless Grade B, standard weight Schedule 40,
galvanized for exterior applications, l-1/2” I.D., unless otherwise noted, for railings, posts,
and handrails.
Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 307, galvanized.
Shop Paint: SSPC-Paint 2.
FABRICATION
Use materials of size and thicknesses shown or if not shown of required size and
thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in finished product for intended
use.
Work to dimensions shown on the drawings or accepted on shop drawings, using proven
details of fabrication and support. Verify dimensions at site prior to shop fabrication. Use
type of materials shown or specified for various components of work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately l/32” unless otherwise
shown on the drawings. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.
Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with recommendations of
AWS. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining
surfaces.
Form exposed connections with hairline light-proof tight joints which are flush and
smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners with
Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts.
Provide for anchorage of type shown on the drawings, coordinated with supporting
structure and progress schedule. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and
as required to provide adequate support for intended use of work.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to
minimize field splicing and assembly of units at project site. Disassemble units only to
extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re-assem-
bly and coordinated installation.
20 October 1997 Steel Stair System Carlsbad City Library 05712-2 96013
H. Accurately form components required for anchorage of stairs, landings, and railings to
each other and to building structure.
2.03 SHOP PAINTING
A. Shop paint all steel stair work, except those members or portions of members to be
embedded in concrete or masonry, covered with fireproofing, field welded, galvanized
surfaces, or used in a high strength bolted connection, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before shop coat of paint is applied.
Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-2 “Hand Tool
Cleaning,” SSPC SP-3 “Power Tool Cleaning” or SSPC SP6 “Commercial Blast
Cleaning.” Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1
“Solvent Cleaning.”
C. Apply one shop coat of paint to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to
surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat
to distinguish it from the first.
D. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on metal primer paint, applied in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and at rate to provide a uniform dry film
thickness of 2.0 mils per coat applied. Use painting methods which will result in full
coverage of joints, comers, edges and all exposed surfaces.
2.04 FABRICATION
/- A. General:
1. Fabricate stairs with closed risers and pan treads to receive concrete fill or
granite treads, as indicated.
2. Form treads with minimum 12 gage bent plate with deformed bars full length of
tread welded to bent ends.
3. Secure treads to stringers with clip angles, welded in place.
4. Form stringers of structural steel channel sections or rolled steel rectangular
hollow sections, as indicated in drawings.
5. Use welding for joining pieces together, unless otherwise shown or specified.
Fabricate units so that bolts and other fastenings do not appear on finish
surfaces.
6. Construct stair units to conform to sizes and arrangements as shown. Construct
entire assembly to support a minimum live load of 100 Ibs. per sq. ft. Stair treads
shall be capable of supporting a point load of 300 Ibs. applied to any location on
the tread.
20 October 1997 Steel Stair System
Carlsbad City Library 05712-3 96013
7. Fabricate all components of Stairs 3 and 4 including guardrails and handrails to
AESS standards as specified in Section 05100.
8. Provide metal framing, columns, struts, clips, brackets, hanger rods, bearing
plates and other components as required for support of stairs and platforms.
B. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of structural steel, as shown on the drawings. Provide
closures for exposed ends of stringers.
2. Construct platforms of structural steel headers and miscellaneous framing
members, as shown. Bolt or weld framing members to stringers and headers.
Support platform as shown on the drawings.
C. Metal Pan Units:
1. Form metal pans of structural steel sheets. Shape pans to conform to
configuration shown.
2. Construct riser and subtread metal pans with steel angle supporting brackets
welded to stringers. Secure metal pans to brackets with welds.
3. Reinforce stair and platform pans with wire mesh and fill with concrete.
D. Stair Handrails: Provide steel pipe handrailing and wall brackets.
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in
other work for interface with the work of this Section.
20 October 1997 Steel Stair System
Cansbad City Library 05712-4 96013
rc-
.-
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the
approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures, anchoring
all components firmly into position for long life under hard use.
C. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing steel stair
items to in-place construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry
inserts, toggle bolts through-bolts and other connectors as required.
D. Erect stair work accurately to line, plumb, level, square, true and free of rack,
measured from established lines and levels and registering level with floor and
platform levels.
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld
connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint
coat.
F. Adjust railing prior to securing in place to insure proper matching at butting joints and
correct alignment throughout their length. Plumb posts in each direction.
G. Do not field cut or alter members.
H. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean and brush field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and paint all exposed areas with same
material as used for shop painting. Sand field welds and abraded areas which will be
exposed in the finish work. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film
thickness of 2.0 mils.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
END OF SECTION
Steel Stair System
057 12-5 96013
SECTION 05720
HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMI-I-TALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
a. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and
type of fasteners, and accessories.
4. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Handrail Fittings: Flanges, ells, and miscellaneous fittings by Julius Blum, or
approved equal. Size and radius of ells as required by handrail dimension and details.
r- 20 October 1997 Handrails and Railings
Carlsbad City Library 05720-I 96013
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.03
A.
- B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500; seamless, type and grade as selected by fabricator and as
required for design loading; primed finish for interior and galvanized for exterior.
Solid Bar Sections: ASTM A36 in sizes and shapes indicated.
Primer Paint:
1. Shop Paint: SSPC-Paint 2.
2. Omit shop paint on surfaces to be enclosed in concrete or surfaces to be welded.
Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fed. Spec. l-T-P-641.
Wood Guardrail: Specified in Section 06400.
FABRICATION
Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.
Fit and shop assemble sections in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site and
installation.
Supply components required for secure anchorage of handrails and railings.
Form simple and compound curves by bending tubing in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required.
Maintain cylindrical cross-section of tubing throughout entire bend without buckling,
twisting or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of tubing. At fabricator’s option, form
bends by use of prefabricated elbow fittings and radius bends, however, do not alter
handrail design by use of prefabricated fittings.
Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline.
Accurately form components required for anchorage of railings to each other and to
building structure.
Galvanize exterior steel railings, including tubing, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other
ferrous components in accordance with ASTM A 386.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
20 October 1997 Handrails and Railings
Carlsbad City Library 05720-2 96013
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements ofgovernmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturers recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly
into position for long life under hard use.
C. Supply items to be cast into concrete with setting templates and erection drawings to
appropriate sections.
D. Erect work square and level, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or
performance.
E. Anchor handrailings to structure.
f. Weld field connections and grind smooth to complete assembly. Touch-up welds with
primer.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Handrails and Railings
05720-3 96013
SECTION 05810
EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMllTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide prefabricated expansion joint covers, as manufactured by Construction
Specialties, Inc., or approved equal.
20 October 1997 Expansion Joint Covers
Carlsbad City Library 0581 O-l 96013
1. Exterior Seismic Expansion Joint at Wall and Ceiling/Wall Locations: Model SF-400
Flush Exterior Wall Seal, Biege color.
2. Interior Seismic Joints at Wall and Ceiling Locations: Model MIA-400 Aluminum
Flush Wall to Wall Cover, white color, 11” overall width, 2” free horizontal movement
to cover 3” building seismic joint.
3. Exterior Seismic Joints at Roof/Wall Locations: Model BRJW-400, use 4” to cover
3” building seismic joint.
B. Accessories: Manufacturers standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible
seal and filler materials, adhesive and other accessories compatible with material in
contact, as shown or required for complete installations.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
2.93 FABRICATION
A. Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile, materials, and
operation indicated. Select units comparable to those indicated or required to
accommodate joint size, variations in adjacent surfaces, and structural movement.
Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize number of end joints. Provide
hairline mitered comers where joint changes directions or abuts other materials. Include
closure materials and transition pieces; tee-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and
other accessories, as required to provide continuous joint cover assemblies.
B. Protection: Cover exposed metal surfaces with factory-applied adhesive paper or
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) protective strippable coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
20 October 1997 Expansion Joint Covers
Carlsbad City Library 058 1 O-2 96013
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement:
1. Perform all cutting, drilling and fitting required for the installation of the items. Set
the work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true, measured
from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork
for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.
2. Install joint cover assemblies in true alignment. Set floor covers at elevations to be
flush with adjacent finished floor materials. Locate wall, ceiling, and soffit covers in
continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. Securely attach in place with all required
accessories. Locate anchors approximately 3-in. from each end, 12-in. O.C. between
ends for set screws, and 18-in. O.C. between ends for other fasteners, unless closer
spacing is recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Hold end joints to the minimum; make end joints with strong, rigid, mechanical splice
plate in true alignment, with hairline joints.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Do not remove strippable protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is
complete. When protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Expansion Joint Covers
Carlsbad City Library 058 1 O-3 96013
SECTION 06111
ROUGHCARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide miscellaneous backing, nailers, blocking, and plywood as required by conditions.
Wood Treatment Data
Submit chemical treatment manufacturers instructions for handling, storing, installation and
finishing of treated material.
..-
1.03
A.
B.
1.5
1.51
a. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant
stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of
preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards.
c. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treated material
complies with specified standard and other requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of the following codes and
standards, unless modified by the specifications or drawings.
1. Uniform Building Code, current adopted edition.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Delivery and Storage
Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with
damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air
circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene
and similar materials.
20 October 1997 Rough Carpentry
Carlsbad City Library 06111-l 96013
a. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, sticker between
each course to provide air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Douglas Fir, DF-L No. 1, S-Dry.
B. Plywood: Douglas Fir, PS-1, Exterior type, CDX.
C. Moisture content at time of placing:
1. Treated lumber shall not exceed 19%, kiln dry after pressure treatment.
2. Plywood shall not exceed 15%.
D. Sizing and Surfacing: Mill size. All exposed surfaces of wood members shall be
surfaced smooth except as indicated otherwise.
E. Pressure Preservative Treatment: Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA
Standards, C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB standards listed below. Mark
each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements.
F. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant
chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and AWPA C27, respectively, for treatment type
indicated below; identify fire-retardant treated lumber with appropriate classification
marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection or
other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Interior Type A: Use for interior applications.
2. Exterior Type: Use for exterior, exposed applications.
3. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged
or defective pieces.
G. Rough Hardware: Furnish all items of rough hardware, connections, bolts, etc., required
to complete the work. Bolts, nuts, and washers where exposed to elements shall be
hot-dipped galvanized, conforming to ASTM Al 53.
1. Nails: Common wire. Use galvanized nails for all exposed framing. Use ring
shank nails for floor sheathing.
2. Bolts: Standard mild steel, square or hexagonal head machine bolts with matching
nuts and cut washers, or carriage bolts with square nuts and cut washers as
indicated.
20 October 1997 Rough Carpentry Carlsbad City Library 06111-2 96013
3. Lag Bolts and Screws: Conform to Fed. Spec. FF-B-561B, of sizes shown or noted
on drawings.
4. Toggle Bolts: Galvanized conforming to Fed. Spec. FF-B-588B(2), of sizes shown
or noted on drawings.
H. Rough carpentry work and miscellaneous items and their related components which are
to be furnished and/or installed under this section are not necessarily individually
described. The most important features and those requiring detail description are
mentioned. Rough carpentry work and miscellaneous items not mentioned or described
shall be furnished and/or installed in accordance with the intent of the drawings and
specifications and as required to complete the work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer’s
recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly into position for
long life under hard use.
All rough carpentry shall produce joints true, tight, and well nailed, with all members
assembled in accordance with the Drawings and with all pertinent codes and regulations.
Nailing: Do all nailing without splitting wood. Pre-bore as required. Replace all split
members.
Bolting: Drill holes l/16 inch larger in diameter than the bolts being used. Drill straight
and true from one side only. Bolt threads shall not bear on wood. Use washers under
head and nut where both bear on wood; use washers under all nuts.
Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, pre-bore holes same diameter as root of
thread; enlarge holes to shank diameter for length of shank. Screw, do not drive, all lag
screws and wood screws.
20 October 1997 Rough Carpentry
Carlsbad City Library 06111-3 96013
3.03 CLEANING UP
A. Keep the premises in neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of this
portion of the Work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut ends, and debris.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Rough Carpentry
06111-4 96013
SECTION 06400
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
r
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturers specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
a. Show each of the items to be provided under this section. Shop drawings shall
indicate the material grade and species, full size profiles of moldings, thickness-
es, size of parts, construction, fastening, blocking, clearances, assembly and
erection details, applied finishes and surfacing, mill applied and/or built-in hard-
ware, and necessary connections to other work.
b. Shop drawings shall bear the WIC “Certified Compliance Label” on the first page
of the drawings.
4. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
5. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
a. Plastic laminate.
b. Wood veneer.
6. WIC “Certified Compliance Certificate” prior to delivery certifying that products
comply with all requirements of the WIC grade specified.
20 October 1997 Architectural Woodwork
Carlsbad City Library 06400-l 96013
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
1.05
A.
B.
7. WIG “Certified Compliance Certified for Installation” after completion of installation.
QUALlPl ASSURANCE
Comply with the “Manual of Millwork” of the Woodwork Institute of California (WIG) for
the grades specified.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary-crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural
woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production ‘capacity to
produce required units without causing delay in the Work.
Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm that
can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar
in type and quality to those required for this project.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage,
soilage, and deterioration.
Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that
could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas.
If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose
environmental conditions meet requirements specified in “Project Conditions.”
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer’s and
Installer’s coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for
woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these
conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1 .O
percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of
construction period.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction,
check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before
manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
dimensions and proceed with manufacture of woodwork without field measurements.
20 October 1997 Architectural Woodwork
Carlsbad City Library 06400-2 96013
Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Interior Trim: WIC Section 10 “Interior Trim”, WIC Premium grade, Select White Maple,
solid stock, for transparent finish.
B. Miscellaneous Interior Millwork: WIC Section 11 “Miscellaneous Interior Millwork” and
WIC Section 12 “Interior Jambs”
1. Solid Stock: Premium grade Select White Maple for transparent finish.
2. Veneer: Plain-sliced maple, Uniform Light, Grade A for transparent finish.
C. Wood Casework: WIC Section 14 “Wood Casework”, WIC Premium grade.
1. Construction Style: Style A Frameless.
2. Construction Type: Type 1 Multiple shelf supporting units rigidly joined together or
Type II Single length sections to fit access openings.
a. Shelves shall be 314” thick for spans up to 35” and i” thick for spans over 35” up
to 48”, and adjustable to 1” centers. Do not recess metal shelf standards into
the end panels; notch shelving to clear standards.
3. Materials:
a. Exposed Materials: Solid Stock of Select White Maple, Premium grade for
transparent finish. Veneer to be plain-sliced Maple, Uniform Light, Grade A for
transparent finish.
b. Semi-Exposed Materials: High pressure laminate cabinet liner.
4. Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay, WIC Type A.
5. Toe Kick Base: Wood base as specified in this section. Rubber base as specified
in Section 09650.
D. Plastic Covered Casework: WIC Section 15, Plastic Covered Casework, Premium grade.
1. Construction Style: Style A Frameless.
2. Exposed Materials: High pressure laminate .028” minimum thickness, NEMA LD-1.
Colors are indicated on drawings.
20 October 1997 Architectural Woodwork
Carlsbad City Library 06400-3 96013
3. Cabinet Interiors: As called out for each type.
4. Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay, with miter comers at plastic laminate.
a. Drawer Boxes: Provide sub-fronts and applied finish fronts securely, with square
comers and self-edges. Provide drawers with metal slides specified.
b. Doors: Hinged to swing flat against the face of adjoining cabinet or the side of
the cabinet. Do not notch door or cabinet ends or divisions to receive hinges.
5. 12” wide melamine shelves, with all edges faced, lengths as indicated on drawings.
a. Shelves shall be 314” thick for spans up to 35” and i” thick for spans over 35” up
to 48”, and adjustable to 1” centers. Do not recess metal shelf standards into
the end panels; notch shelving to clear standards.
6. Toe Kick Base: Rubber base as specified in Section 09650.
E. Plastic Laminate Countertops and Splashes: WIC Section 16, “Laminated Plastic
Countertops, Splashes, and Wall Paneling”, Premium grade.
1. Plastic laminate tops with solid stock Select White Maple Premium Grade splash and
front edge.
2. Countertops and Splashes: As shown on drawings for each type.
F. Tack Board Material: Claridge Bulletin Board No. 1106, or approved equal, l/4” cork on
hardboard, “Natural Tan” color, with soil resistant washable oxidized linseed oil binder.
G. Granite Tops: Specified in Section 04415.
2.02 HARDWARE
A. Provide all cabinet hardware for all casework included in work of this section:
1. Unless otherwise specified, all hardware shall be US26D, Satin Chrome or
equivalent.
2. Hinges: Stanley 15600 Series, or approved equal, self-closing, appropriate for
cabinet construction. Provide two hinges for doors up to 20 pounds; 3 hinges for
doors 20 pounds up to 40 pounds; and 4 hinges for doors from 40 pounds up to 60
pounds.
3. Door Locks: Corbin 0737 with metal tube for proper door thickness.
4. Drawer Locks: Corbin 0738 with 314” metal tube.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Architectural Woodwork
064004 96013
5. Magnetic Catches: Amerock V-9765, or approved equal, for doors 5 sq. ft. and less,
and Epco 592 for doors larger than 5 sq. ft.
6. Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley 4484, US27 (solid satin aluminum), or approved
equal.
7. Metal Drawer Guides: Knapp & Vogt 1500, Grant 335, Washington 2300, or
approved equal, except for heavily loaded drawers use Knapp & Vogt 1395, Grant
328, or approved equal, full-extension drawer guides.
8. Adjustable Shelf Standards: Knapp & Vogt 255, Garcy U373, Grant 125, or
approved equal.
9. Adjustable Shelf Arms: Grant heavy duty ,or approved equal.
10. Slot-Wall Slot Trim: Clear anodized aluminum slot channels.
11. Adjustable Glass Shelf Support Brackets: Knapp & Vogt 229, or approved equal.
12. Recessed Sliding Glass Cabinet Door Hardware, Knapp & Vogt, or approved equal.
a. Upper Channel: Knapp & Vogt 993.
b. Shoe: Knapp & Vogt 955.
C. Ball Bearing Carrier: Knapp & Vogt 997.
d. Lower Track: Knapp & Vogt 999.
e. Glass Door Lock: Knapp & Vogt 965.
13. Communicating Door Hardware:
a. Hinges: Soss UP21 8, or approved equal, four 94) each at full height door, three
(3) each at low doors.
b. Tall Door Lockset: Lock and latchset on interior face only; no hardware on
outside of panel. Coordinate with Section 08710.
c. Low Door, Adjustable Catch: Knapp & Vogt 905, or approved equal, and
Mortise Bolt H.B. Ives SP48B, or approved equal, on interior face of panel.
14. Counter Support Brackets: Stanley V796 Series, or approved equal.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Architectural Woodwork
06400-5 96013
A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of type,
size, material and finish suitable for intended use and required to provide secure
attachment, concealed where possible.
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
1. Coordinate with installation of granite countertops and granite wall panels integral to
wood casework.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with WIC Section 26 for same grade
specified in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved.
Coordinate work with Divisions 15 and 16 for Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical work
to be integrated into casework.
Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required
with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of l/8 inch in 8’-0” for plumb and level
(including tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged
finish at cuts.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and
20 October 1997 Architectural Woodwork
Carlsbad City Library 06400-6 96013
.-+-
blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching
fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and
filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
H. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible,
using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent
possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at
corners.
G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and
are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and
to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and
accessory items as indicated. Maintain veneer sequence matching (if any) of cabinets
with transparent finish.
H. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated.
I. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips and
by blind nailing on backup strips, splined-connection strips, and similar associated trim and framing. Do not face nail unless otherwise indicated.
J. Complete the finishing work specified in this section to whatever extent not completed at
shop or before installation of woodwork.
K. Refer to Section 09900 for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally
and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and Installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
rc 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Architectural Woodwork
06400-7 96013
SECTION 07115
SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
B.
C.
D.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Manufacturer: Obtain primary waterproofing materials of each type required from a single
manufacturer, to greatest extent possible. Provide secondary materials only as
recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
Pre-installation Conference: Prior to installation of waterproofing and associated work,
meet at project site with Installer of each component of associated work, and installers
of work requiring coordination with waterproofing work, for purpose of reviewing material
selections and procedures to be followed in performing work.
Coordinate installation of waterproofing materials and associated work to provide
complete system.
Schedule installation to minimize period of exposure of sheet waterproofing materials.
20 October 1997 Sheet Waterproofing
Carlsbad City Library 07115-I 96013
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
SITE CONDITIONS
Weather: Proceed with waterproofing and associated work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with
manufacturers’ recommendations and warranty requirements.
WARRANTY
Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver
to the Architect two copies of a Warranty signed by the Contractor and cosigned by the
subcontractor for the work of this Section, agreeing to replace and reinstall all work of this
section found defective in material or workmanship within a period of five years from date
of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.02
A.
MATERIALS
Sheet Waterproofing: “Jiffy Seal 40/60”, by Protect0 Wrap Co., or approved equal.
Adhesives: Provide types of adhesive compound and tapes recommended by
waterproofing sheet manufacturer, for bonding to substrate (if required), for waterproof
sealing of seams in membrane, and for waterproof sealing of joints between membrane
and flashings, adjoining surfaces and projections through membrane.
Primers: Provide type of concrete primer recommended by manufacturer of sheet
waterproofing material for applications required.
Protection Course: Provide type recommended by waterproofing sheet manufacturer.
Prefabricated Drainage Panel: Composite system consisting of a drainage fabric bonded
to a three-dimensional, highly impact-resistant plastic core, “Miradran 6000”, by Mirafi,
Inc., “J-Drain”, by JDR Enterprises, Inc., or approved equal.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Sheet Waterproofing
07115-2 96013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
r^ 3.01
A.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered
as acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper
installation of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Prime substrates if recommended by the manufacturer. Apply primer to concrete and
masonry surfaces at rate recommended by manufacturer of primary waterproofing
materials. Prime only area which will be covered by sheet waterproofing membrane in
same working day; reprime areas not covered by membrane within 24 hours.
Extend waterproofing sheet and flashings as shown to provide complete membrane over
area indicated to be waterproofed. Seal to projections through membrane and seal
seams. Bond to vertical surfaces and also, where shown or recommended by
manufacturer, bond to horizontal surfaces.
Install protection course or prefabricated drainage panel over completed membrane, com-
plying with manufacturer’s recommendations for both sheet waterproofing membrane and
protection course materials.
1. Prefabricated Drainage Panel:
a. Position the panel with the filter fabric toward the soil. Use a mastic adhesive,
self-adhesive metal clips, or similar method, subject to approval of the
membrane manufacturer.
b. Panel Overlaps: Peel the fabric back from the attached panel to expose 3” of
core. Overlap the core of the next panel by 2” and interlock. Reattach the
fabric to completely cover the core overlap. Shingle each course, overlapping
both the core and the fabric in the direction of water flow.
2. Place a compact fill within seven days. Avoid damaging the panels with the
compactors hoe exhaust or tamper foot. Replace any damaged fabric or panels.
/c 20 October 1997 Sheet Waterproofing
Carlsbad City Library 07115-3 96013
3.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. It is required that waterproof membranes be watertight and not deteriorate in excess of
limitations published by manufacturer.
B. In-place Testing: Before completed membranes on horizontal surfaces are covered by
protection course or other work, test for leakswith 2” depth of water maintained for 24
hours. Repair any leaks revealed by examination of substructure and repeat test until
no leakage is observed.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Institute all required procedures for protection of completed membrane during installation
of work over membrane, from exposure by ultra violet rays, and throughout remainder of
construction period. Do not allow traffic of any type on unprotected membrane.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Carlsbad City Library Sheet Waterproofing
071154 96013
SECTION 07200
BUILDING INSULATION
-_-- . --_.--_.
,-
PART
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturers specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Thermal Conductivity: Where insulation is identified by “R” value, provide thickness
required to achieve indicated value.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Protect insulation from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with
manufacturers recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation.
7 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Insulation
07200-I 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Insulation materials shall be fiber glass batts or blankets of the types and R-values
specified below for the various applications as manufactured by Schuller International,
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp., or approved equal.
1. Ceiling Insulation: R-19 FS-25 faced batts. Where exposed to view, facing shall be
painted black.
2. Exterior Walls: R-l 1 FS-25 faced batts.
B. Sound Insulation in Interior Walls: Unfaced batts designed for friction fit, full thick, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where insulation is included in rated wall and ceiling
construction, provide mineral units which have been tested and rated as required for the
indicated assembly.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Do not install insulation until such a time as the construction has progressed to the point
that inclement weather will not damage or wet the insulation material.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Fully insulate all small areas
between closely spaced framing members. Remove projections which interfere with
placement. Install full height of the wall or between joists.
20 October 1997 Building Insulation
Carlsbad City Library 07200-2 96013
,-
D. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or
required to make up total thickness. Insulation shall be continuous behind all light
switches, convenience outlets, etc.
E. Cut and fill insulation materials around pipes, conduits, etc., as necessary to maintain the
integrity of the insulation. Where pipes are installed in spaces to receive insulation, place
insulation between exterior wall and the pipe, compressing insulation if necessary.
F. Install batt insulation between framing with flanges continuously tight against framing
members, using staples or nails.
G. Install insulation between framing for friction fit where enclosed between two hard
surfaces. Install with wire support where enclosed on one side only.
END OF SECTION
F-
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Insulation
07200-3 96013
SECTION 07225
LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturers specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Test Reports: Submit independent laboratory test results for the following performance
criteria:
1. Thermal insulation value per ASTM C 177.
2. Mix design compressive strength per ASTM C495.
3. Mix design wet and dry density range per ASTM C 495.
4. Polystyrene density per ASTM C 578.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Insulating Concrete Supplier: Regularly engaged in production of lightweight insulating
concrete roof insulation.
20 October 1997 Lightweight Insulating Concrete Roof Insulation System
Carlsbad City Library 07225-I 96013
C. Insulating Concrete Applicator: Regularly engaged and properly equipped for application
of lightweight insulating concrete roof insulation, and approved in writing by the
manufacturer to install roof insulation system.
C. Codes and Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the following:
1. Factory Mutual Approval Guide for FM Class I, l-60, and l-90 Wrndstorm Construc-
tion. -
2, Underwriter’s Laboratories “Building Materials Directory” for Class 90 Wind uplift
Resistance.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original undamaged packages or acceptable bulk
containers.
C. Store packaged materials to protect them from elements or physical damage.
D. Do not use cement which shows indications of moisture damage, caking, or other signs
of deterioration.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee: Provide the Owner with the manufacturers written ten (10) year guarantee
against any and all defects in materials or workmanship on those furnished and installed.
The guarantee shall have an option to the Owner, that at nine and one half (9-l/2) years
of the ten (10) year guarantee, the Owner may require a manufacturer’s inspection of the
lightweight insulating concrete roof insulation system prior to the expiration of the ten (10)
year guarantee. The Manufacturer shall make repair recommendations at that time. If
the Owner elects to make the recommended repairs, then the guarantee shall be
extended automatically for ten (10) more years.
B. This guarantee shall be a part of guarantee of the modified bitumen roofing systems
guarantee specified in Section 07535.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lightweight Insulating Concrete Roof Insulation System: Provide a lightweight insulating
concrete roof insulation system incorporating vermiculite aggregate and polystyrene
supplied by a single source manufacturer, ZIC Roof Insulation System, by Siplast Inc.,
or approved equal.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II or III.
20 October 1997 Lightweight Insulating Concrete Roof Insulation System
Carisbad City Library 07225-2 96013
D. Aggregate: Vermiculite concrete aggregate conforming to ASTM C 332, Zonolite
Concrete Aggregate, by Siplast, Inc., or approved equal.
E. Water: Clean, potable.
F. Insulation Board: “lnsulperm”, with 30 slots and 30 circular hole openings in each sheet,
by Siplast Inc., or approved equal.
G. Control Joint Filler: ASTM C 612, Class 2, glass fiber type.
H. Roofing Fasteners: Provide roofing fasteners approved by both the fastener and
membrane manufacturers for use in lightweight insulating concrete.
1. Fasteners shall be manufactured from steel treated with a minimum G-90 galvanized
coating and having a corrosion resistant coating pre-applied to the fastener head.
2. Provide fasteners listed in the Factory Mutual Approval Guide for use in lightweight
insulating concrete, Zono-tite Fasteners, by Siplast, Inc., or approved equal.
I. Moisture Relief Vents: As recommended by the manufacturer.
2.02 DESIGN MIX
A. Zonolite Insulating Concrete: Design lightweight insulating concrete mix to produce the
following physical properties.
1. Density at Point of Placement: 44 - 60 pcf, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C 138.
2. Oven Dry Density: 22 - 28 pcf, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 495.
3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 125 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM C
495.
4. Cement to Aggregate Ratio: 1:6 cf.
2.03 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
20 October 1997 Lightweight Insulating Concrete Roof Insulation System
Carlsbad City Library 07225-3 96013
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures, using equipment and pro-
cedures to avoid segregation of mix.
C. Insulating Concrete:
1. The metal deck configuration shall be filled with a slurry of insulating concrete to a
level of l/8” above the top of the corrugations.
2. Insulation board shall be placed into the slurry with joints staggered in a brick-like
pattern. All boards shall be butted together and placed in a manner that provides
full contact of slurry to board.
3. Insulation board shall be installed in a stair-stepped configuration when the insulation
is designed to provide slope for the roofing system.
4. A minimum of 2” of insulating concrete shall be placed over the insulating board and
screeded to an even surface.
5. Insulating board must be placed within 30 minutes of insulating concrete slurry
placement. Installation of top layer of insulating concrete must be made within 4
hours of insulating board placement.
6. Install moisture relief vents in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage an independent testing laboratory to take samples and conduct tests to evaluate
lightweight insulating concrete. Do not use same testing service which provided initial
mix designs.
1. Take samples as follows:
a. 3” x 6” cylinders taken at time of the pour in accordance with ASTM C 495.
b. Samples taken from in-place deck in accordance with ASTM C 513.
c. Curing: In accordance with cited ASTM procedures.
20 October 1997 Lightweight Insulating Concrete Roof Insulation System
Carlsbad City Library 072254 96013
d. Samples must be dried prior to testing.
2. Determine compressive strength and oven dry density in accordance with ASTM C
495. Make at least 6 molds during each placement.
B. Report test results to the Architect within 24 hours of completion of each test.
3.04 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Refinish or remove and replace lightweight insulating concrete surfaces which are too
rough to receive built-up roofing or where physical properties do not meet specified
requirements, as determined by Architect.
END OF SECTION
/- 20 October 1997 Lightweight Insulating Concrete Roof Insulation System Carlsbad City Library 07225-5 96013
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
-
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMIT-I-ALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
4. Submittals shall show the construction compliance in accordance with UL FRD or FM
P7825 for the specific wall or floor assembly being penetrated and firestopping
protected.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Qualifications of Installers: Proper installation of firestopping require that installers be
thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary skills and thoroughly familiar with
the specified requirements.
C. Codes and Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the following:
1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM E814, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
.- 20 October 1997 Firestopping
Carlsbad City Library 07270-I 96013
2. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM)
a. FM P7825, Approval Guide.
3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
a. UL FRD, Fire Resistance Directory.
b. UL 1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver to the job site in unopened containers or cartons bearing manufacturer’s names,
brand designations and product descriptions. Store products under cover and protect
from damage. Do not use damaged materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Firestopping System: 3M Fire Barrier System, Dow Coming, or approved equal.
B. Product Characteristics:
1. Fire barrier materials shall be asbestos-free, intumescent in nature, and capable
of maintaining effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance
with the requirements of ASTM E 814 and UL 1479.
2. Devices and equipment for firestopping service shall be UL FRD listed or FM
P7825 approved for use with applicable construction, and penetrating items.
3. Materials shall be suitable for the firestopping of penetrations made by steel,
glass, plastic and insulated pipes.
4. On insulated pipe, the fire-rating classification must not require removal of the
insulation.
5. The rating of the firestops shall be one (1) hour minimum, but in no case less
than the rating of the time-rated floor or wall assembly.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the
Architect.
20 October 1997 Firestopping
Carlsbad City Library 07270-2 96013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I- 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Surface Preparation: Surfaces to be in contact with firestopping materials shall be
free of dirt, grease, oil, loose material, rust, or other substances that may affect proper
fitting or the required fire resistance.
C. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in
other work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturers
recommended installation procedures.
C. Install firestopping assembly at locations shown and as specified in accordance with
UL FRD systems or FM P7825 designs, and as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Firestopping System:
1. In general, use foam for complex fire-rated wall and floor penetrations, including
multiple cables, multiple conduits and pipes, and mixtures of cables, conduits, and
pipes.
2. In general, use sealant for simple fire-rated wall and floor penetrations, including
plumbing fixtures, simple cable systems, conduit or pipe through sleeves, and
fire-rated expansion joints.
3. Coordination: Coordinate the other work. Fire-stopping materials at penetrations
of insulated pipes and ducts shall be applied prior to insulation, unless the
insulation meets the requirements specified for firestopping.
E. Examination of Firestopped Areas: Examine firestopped areas to ensure proper
installation prior to concealing or enclosing the firestopped areas.
END OF SECTION
I- 20 October 1997 Firestopping
Carlsbad City Library 07270-3 96013
SECTION 07320
CLAY ROOFING TILES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
4. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
Samples: Submit two sets of clay tiles. Within each set submit sufficient tiles to indicate
the full range of color variation.
Sample Panel: Prepare sample panel of tile on roof deck for Architect’s review. Sample
panel to be 15 rows wide by minimum of 8 tile high.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997 Clay Roofing Tiles
Carlsbad City Library 07320-I 96013
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver
to the Architect two copies of a Warranty signed by the Contractor and cosigned by the
subcontractor for the work of this Section, agreeing to replace and reinstall all work of this
section found defective in material or workmanship within a period of two years from date
of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS-
2.01
A.
B.
C.
2.02
A.
MATERIALS
Roofing Tile: Gladding McBean Italian Pans and Cordova Covers, “Red”, by Gladding
McBean, or approved equal.
1. Provide bird stops.
Tile Fasteners: “Twisted Wire Tyle-Tye” single line tile tie system, copper or brass, with
Double Plate Anchor PN 102 S, by Newport Fastener, or approved equal.
Underlayment: Jiff Seal Ice & Water Guard, with granulated surface, by Protect0 Wrap
Co., or approved equal.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturers
recommended installation procedures.
20 October 1997 Clay Roofing Tiles
Carlsbad City Library 07320-2 96013
C. Underlayment: Apply one layer of sheet membrane underlayment over entire roof
surface, beginning at eaves, with courses perpendicular to slope of roof. Roll to obtain
maximum contact. When the second course of the membrane underlayment is ready to
be placed, remove the “Zip Strip” from the first course and continue this process. Side
laps with the “Zip Strip” removed are approximately 2-112” and end laps should be no
less than 4”.
1. When application of the membrane is completed, check for any damage areas,
fishmouths, etc., and repair in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
2. After application of the membrane is completed, roll the entire surface, giving special
attention to rolling the overlapped areas.
D. Tile Fasteners: Install tile fastener system in accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications.
1. Nailing of the tile will not be allowed.
2. Install sheet metal strapping as needed under roof board to provide positive
fastening of tile fastener systems. Apply mastic over fasteners per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
E. Roofing Tiles: Lay tile at right angles to eaves at spacing of 1 l-1/2” on center with
minimum 3” head lap. Boosters and starters (first row on eave) to be laid to 12”
exposure with booster under starter for double cover. At eaves, close with clay eave
closure. Where tile joins hips and ridges, voids shall be filled with cement mortar.
F. All tile in contact with mortar shall be immersed in water for three minutes before laying
to assure an adequate bond with mortar.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Clay Roofing Tiles
Carlsbad City Library 07320-3 96013
SECTION 07410
COPPER CLADDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
.-
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show profile, jointing pattern, jointing details,
fastening methods, installation details, and interface of the work of this Section with
the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Samples: Submit two samples, 24 x 24 inch in size, of copper cladding on
plywood backing illustrating typical seam, material, and finish.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
C. Perform Work in accordance with the following:
1. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Contemporary Copper, A Handbook of
Sheet Copper Fundamentals, Design, Details and Specifications, Copper Roofing -
A Practical Handbook, and Sheet Copper Applications.
20 October 1997 Copper Cladding
Carlsbad City Library 0741 o-1 96013
2. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MATERIALS -
Copper: ASTM B370, cold rolled temper, 20 oz/sq ft, of size to suit seam locations and
arrangements shown.
B.
C.
D.
Fasteners and Anchoring Devices: Hard copper, brass or bronze. Finish exposed
fasteners same as flashing metal.
Underlayment: No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt.
Sealant: ASTM C920, one component silicone based material, color as selected by the
Architect.
E. MasticSealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating
sealant.
F.
2.02
A.
Paper Slip Sheet: &lb. rosin-sized building paper.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
2.03
A.
FABRICATION
Form components true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or
defects. Form pieces in longest practical lengths.
B. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Copper Cladding
074 1 o-2 96013
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
C. Conform to SMACNA details for configuration indicated on drawings.
D. Seal metal joints watertight with specified silicone sealant.
END OF SECTION
/- 20 October 1997 Copper Cladding
Carlsbad City Library 074 1 o-3 96013
,- MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEMS
PART
1 .Ol
A.
1.02
A.
B.
c- C.
D.
E.
F.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
SECTION 07535
1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
SUBMIT-I-ALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data, installation instructions and
recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating
that materials comply with requirements and that specified insulations are acceptable to
the roofing materials manufacturer.
I, For asphalt bitumen, provide label on each container or certification with each load
of bulk bitumen indicating flash point (FP), finished blowing temperature (FBT),
softening point (SP) and equiviscous temperature (EVT).
Samples: Submit 12” square samples of final ply sheet to be exposed as finished roof
surface.
Submit certification of manufacturer’s qualifications as required.
Submit certification of installer qualifications as required.
Submit experience record of installer’s field supervisor as required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide primary products, including each type of roofing
sheet (felt), bitumen, flashings, produced by a single manufacturer, which has produced
that type product successfully for not less than 5 years.
1. Provide secondary products only as recommended by manufacturer of primary
products for use with roofing system specified.
Installer Qualifications: A single Installer (“Roofer”) shall perform the work of this section;
and shall be a firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in installation of
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Modified Bitumen Roofing Systems
07535-l 96013
modified bitumen roofing systems similar to those required for this project and be certified
in writing by the roofing materials manufacturer to install primary roofing products.
1. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer of MBR system
certifying that Installer is approved by manufacturer for installation of specified
roofing system. Provide copy of certification to Architect.
D. Installer’s Field Supervision: Installer must maintain full-time supervisor/foreman on
jobsite during times that roofing work is in progress, Supervisor must have minimum of
5 years experience in roofing work similar to nature and scope of specified roofing.
E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: As soon as possible after award of modified bitumen
roofing work, meet with Installer (Roofer), installers of lightweight insulating concrete roof
insulation, and other work adjoining roof system including penetrating work and roof-top
units, Architect, and representatives of other entities directly concerned with performance
of roofing system.
F. UL Listing: Provide modified bitumen roofing system and component materials which
have been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for Class A external fire exposure, Class l-90.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and handle roofing sheets in a manner which will ensure that there is no possibility
of significant moisture pick-up. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weather-tight place.
Unless protected from weather or other moisture sources, do not leave unused felts on
the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. Store rolls of felt and other
sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised surface. Handle and store materials or
equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee: Provide the Owner with the manufacturer’s written ten (IO) year guarantee
against any and all defects in materials or workmanship on those furnished and installed.
The guarantee shall have an option to the Owner, that at nine an one half (9-l/2) years
of the ten (10) year guarantee, the Owner may require a manufacturer’s inspection of the
roof prior to the expiration of the ten (10) year guarantee. The Manufacturer shall make
repair recommendations at that time. If the Owner elects to make the recommended
repairs, then the guarantee shall be extended automatically for ten (10) years.
B. This guarantee shall be a part of guarantee of the lightweight insulating concrete roof
insulation system guarantee specified in Section 07225.
20 October 1997 Modified Bitumen Roofing Systems
Carlsbad City Library 07535-2 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
f-- 2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
/- G.
2.02
A.
MATERIALS
Roofing system shall be by Siplast Inc., or approved equal.
Roofing membrane assembly shall be Siplast Roofing Specification 2030 CBT-2435.
1. Base Sheet: Siplast “Parabase”, modified bitumen base/ply sheet.
2. Base Ply Sheet: Siplast “Paradiene 20 TG (torchable grade)“.
3. Finish Ply Sheet: Siplast “Paradiene 30 FR TG (torchable grade)“.
4. Ceramic Granules: No. 11 Grade Specification Ceramic granules of color scheme
matching granule surfacing of finish ply.
Flashing Membrane Assembly: Siplast “Veral” aluminum, “Slate Gray” color.
Cant Strips: Rigid insulation units molded to form 3-l/2-inch by 3-l/2-inch by 45-degree
cant strips and l-5/8-inch by 18-inch tapered edge strips to receive roofing.
Mopping Asphalt: Type IV asphalt, ASTM D 312, Siplast PA-100 asphalt.
Walktread: Siplast “Paratread” roof protection material.
Lightweight insulating concrete roof insulation system is specified in Section 07225.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
20 October 1997 Modified Bitumen Roofing Systems
Carlsbad City Library 07535-3 96013
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.03
A.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer’s
recommended installation procedures.
1. Apply all layers of roofing free of wrinkles, creases or fishmouths. Exert sufficient
pressure on the roll during application to insure prevention of air pockets. Stagger
the lap seams between the base ply layer and the finish ply layer. Stagger courses
to ensure this.
2. Apply all layers of roofing perpendicular to the slope of the deck.
3. Fully bond the base ply to the prepared substrate, utilizing three (3) inch side and
end laps. Apply each sheet directly behind the torch applicator. Tagger end laps
a minimum of three (3) feet.
4. Fully bond the finish ply to the base ply, utilizing minimum three (3) inch side’and
end laps. Apply each sheet directly behind the torch applicator. Stagger end laps
of the finish ply a minimum three (3) feet. Stagger side laps of the finish ply a
minimum twelve (12) inches from side laps in the underlying base ply. Stagger end
laps of the finish ply a minimum three (3) feet from end laps in the underlying base
PlY.
Cant Strips: Except as otherwise shown, install preformed 45deg insulation cant strips
at junctures of roofing system membrane with vertical surface. Provide preformed,
tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
Set-On Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set on built-up roofing membrane,
set metal flanges in a bed of roofing cement and seal penetration of membrane with bead
of roofing cement to prevent flow of bitumen from membrane.
Roof Drains: Fill clamping ring base with a heavy coating of roofing cement. Set lead
flashing sheet in a bed of roofing cement on completed built-up roofing ply sheet courses,
with lead sheet clamped in roof drain ring and extended 12 inches onto roofing. Cover
lead sheet with roofing, with plies extended 4 inches to 6 inches beyond edges of lead
sheet.
Protect other work from spillage of MBR materials, and prevent liquid materials from
entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace and/or restore other work damaged
by performance of MBR system work.
Coordinate the installation of insulation, roofing sheets, flashings, stripping, coatings and
surfacings, so that felts are not exposed to precipitation nor exposed overnight.
PROTECTION OF ROOFING
Upon completion of roofing work (including associated work) Contractor shall comply with
recommended procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of
construction period. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining
construction work will in no way affect or endanger roofing, Contractor shall make a final
20 October 1997 Modified Bitumen Roofing Systems Carlsbad City Library 07535-4 96013
inspection of roofing and prepare a written report to the Architect describing nature and
extent of deterioration of damage found in the work. /-
B. Contractor shall repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at
time of final inspection. Contractor to repair damages to roofing which occurred
subsequent to roofing installation and prior to final inspection. Repair or replace the
roofing and associated work to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of
substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Modified Bitumen Roofing Systems
075355 96013
SECTION 07620
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Manufacturers’ data: Submit the following:
1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this
Section.
2. Submit shop drawings showing layout, joining, profiles, and anchorages of fabricated
work, including major counter flashings, gutters, downspouts, scuppers and
expansion joint systems, and interface of the work with the work of adjacent trades.
/- 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
C. Codes and Reference Standards: In addition to cornprying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the following:
1. “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”, current edition, of the Sheet Metal and Aircon-
ditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver
to the Architect two copies of a Warranty signed by the Contractor and cosigned by the
/- 20 October 1997 Flashing and Sheet Metal
Carlsbad City Library 07620-l 96013
subcontractor for the work of this Section, agreeing to replace and reinstall all work of this
section found defective in material or workmanship within a period of ,two years from date
of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.02
A.
MATERIALS
Copper: ASTM B 370; temper HO0 (cold-rolled) except where temper 060 is required for
forming; 16 oz. (0.0216-inch thick) except as otherwise indicated.
Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, 0.20 percent copper, 26 gage (0.0179 inch);
ASTM A 525, designation G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized.
Lead: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing sheet lead, minimum 4 Ib/sq ft
(0.0625-inch thick) except not less than 6 lblsq ft (0.0937-inch thick) for burning (welding)
unless otherwise indicated.
Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as
recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being
fastened.
Solder: Type solder and flux recommended. by manufacturer of sheet metal.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of
sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material
being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
20 October 1997 Flashing and Sheet Metal
Carlsbad City Library 07620-2 96013
3.02
r A.
B.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
C. General:
.-
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1. Form all sheet metal accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing
all molded and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and,
where intercepting other members, coping to an accurate fit, soldering securely.
2. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Architect, turn all exposed edges back
l/2”.
Expansion: Form, fabricate, and install all sheet metal so as to adequately provide for
expansion and contraction in the finished Work.
Fabricate sheet metal with flat-lock seams; solder with type solder and flux recommended
by manufacturer.
Provide for thermal expansion of running sheet metal work by overlaps of expansion
joints in fabricated work. Where required for water-tight construction, provide hooked
flanges filled with polyisobutylene mastic for l-inch embedment of flanges. Conceal
expansion provisions where possible.
Weatherproofing:
1. Finish watertight and weathertight where so required.
2. Make all lock seam work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder.
3. Make all lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, at least l/2” wide.
4. Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch but in no case less than
3”.
5. Make all flat and lap seams in direction of flow.
Joints:
1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength or stiffness.
2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for all runs of more than 40’, except
where closer spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper installation.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Flashing and Sheet Metal
07620-3 96013
G. Nailing:
1. Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats without nailing through
the metal.
2. In general, space all nails, rivets, and screws not more than 8” apart and, where
exposed to the weather, use lead washers.
3. For nailing into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs.
H. Soldering:
1. Thoroughly clean and tin all joint materials prior to soldering.
2. Perform all soldering slowly with a well heated copper soldering irons in order to heat
the seams thoroughly and to completely fill them with solder.
3. Perform all soldering with a heavy soldering copper soldering irons of blunt design,
properly tinned for use.
4. Make all exposed soldering on finished surfaces neat, full flowing, and smooth.
5. Cleaning: After soldering, thoroughly wash acid flux with a soda solution.
3.03 TESTS
A. Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate by hose or standing water that all flashing
and sheet metal is completely watertight.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Flashing and Sheet Metal
07620-4 96013
SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections. -
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Roof Hatch: Provide roof hatch, complete including cover, hold open arm, lifting
mechanism, spring latch, padlock hasp. Hatch shall be galvanized steel, prime painted,
14-gage cover and curb, 22-gage cover liner, with 12” high curb, as manufactured by the
Bilco Company, Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc., or approved equal, as follows:
20 October 1997 Roof Accessories and Specialties
Carlsbad City Library 07720-I 96013
1. “S” Series, 2’-6” x 3’-0”.
2. “L” Series, 2’-8” x 8’-0”.
B. Prefabricated Expansion Joints: Metal flanged elastic sheet joint system, of configuration
indicated, “Expand-O-Flash”, by Schuller International, Inc., “Rufseal”, by MM Systems
Corp., or equal.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. Determine that construction of openings for roof accessories have been completed.
2. Assure that surfaces to receive roof accessories are free of debris.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly
into position for long life under hard use.
Set units plumb, level, and true to line without warp or rack.
Install roof expansion joints where indicated.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Roof Accessories and Specialties
07720-2 96013
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Remove debris from work site.
END OF SECTION
/- 20 October 1997 Roof Accessories and Specialties
Carlsbad City Library 07720-3 96013
SECTION 07820
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings showing adaptation of the manufacturer’s standard system to the
Project. Include typical and special unit plans, elevations and sections at l/2 inch
scale and details at 3 inch scale or larger, to show dimensioning, tolerances,
member profiles, anchorage, field welding, connections and fasteners, provisions for
expansion and contraction, drainage, flashings, finishes, pane opening sizes, glazing,
and interface with building construction.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
s- 20 October 1997 Metal Framed Skylights
Carlsbad City Library 07820-l 96013
C.
D.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
Design Criteria: Aluminum framing and glazing shall support a 30 psf live load, a
negative 25 psf wind load plus dead load.
Skylight units shall be engineered and stamped by the manufacturer for submittal to the
building official in compliance with California Title 24 and UBC.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
WARRANTY
Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver
to the Architect two copies of a Warranty signed by the Contractor and cosigned by the
subcontractor for the work of this Section, agreeing to replace and reinstall all work of this
section found defective in material or workmanship within a period of two years from date
of Substantial Completion.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to structural failures; abnormal deterioration of
metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering; uncontrolled
leakage; sealant failure; and failure of the assemblies to meet performance
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Architectural Skylight Co., Waterboro, ME (800) 345-7899.
2. Super Sky Products Inc., Mequa, WI (800) 558-0467.
3. Bristolite Skylights, Santa Ana, CA (800) 854-8618.
B. Skylights: Aluminum framed, laminated glass glazed, as follows:
1. Principal Framing Members: Extruded aluminum, alloy and temper 6063-T5.
2. Aluminum Finish: “Duranar XL” fluoropolymer coating systems containing Kynar 500
resin, by PPG Industries. Coating system and colors to be selected by the Architect
from manufacturer’s full range of colors.
3. Glazing: Type 2, “Sea Foam Clear” l/4” laminated glass by Southwall Technologies,
with “etch matte” obscure glass finish on the interior face. Daylight Transmittance
71%, Solar Transmittance 34%, Summer Daytime U-Value .86, Shading Coefficient
.53.
4. Sealants: Dow Corning 795.
20 October 1997 Metal Framed Skylights
Carisbad City Library 07820-2 96013
5. Glazing gaskets to be neoprene.
6. Flashing: .060 (min.) 5052 aluminum finished to match framing members.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal-framed skylights to meet aesthetic and performance criteria specified.
Fit and assemble components in the manufacturer’s shop to the fullest extent practicable
and prior to application of finishes. Shop assemble, mark and disassemble before
shipment the components which cannot be permanently shop assembled.
B. Construct skylights using extruded aluminum components similar to sections shown on
Drawings, except where formed aluminum members are indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
/-
Anchor components securely and permanently in place, shimming and using attachment
methods permitting adjustment for construction tolerances, irregularities, and alignment.
Allow for structural movement and changes due to varying thermal conditions.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Comply with skylight and glazing material manufacturer’s instructions for protecting,
handling and installing fabricated skylight components, with particular care and attention
to preservation of applied finishes and use of sealants. Discard members damaged
before installation and remove installed members that become damaged; provide new
acceptable components.
Metal Framed Skylights
07820-3 96013
E. Separate aluminum components from contact with dissimilar materials by separating the
materials by method recommended by skylight manufacturer.
F. Erection Tolerances: Install skylight components in plane, plumb, level, accurately
aligned and correctly located in reference to building features and without warpage or
racking.
G. Glazing: Inspect glazing material and framing for compliance with manufacturing and
installation tolerances, including size, squareness, and offsets at comers; edge or face
clearances; and effective sealing. Comply with combined instructions of glazing material
and glazing sealant manufacturers as specified in Division 8 section. Avoid point loading
of glazing material.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean both metal and glazing material of the completed skylights, inside and outside,
during or promptly after erection, allowing for nominal curing of liquid sealants. Remove
temporary protective coverings and strippable coatings from prefinished metal surfaces.
Also remove labels and part number markings from all components. Wash down exposed
surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water applied with soft clean cloths
and wipe clean. Take care to clean the member connections and inside corners. Avoid
use of harsh cleaning materials and methods that would damage metal finishes or
glazing.
B. Remove remaining excess sealant by moderate use of solvent acceptable to the sealant
manufacturer.
C. Follow recommendations of the skylight manufacturer for proper and adequate protection
and cleaning procedures during the remainder of the construction period, so that the
system will be without damage at the time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Carlsbad City Library Metal Framed Skylights
078204 96013
SECTION 07920
SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
4. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
5. Samples of each item, color, and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
6. Certification that materials conform with the requirements of this specification section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Qualifications of Installers:
1. Proper installation of sealants require that installers be thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary skills and thoroughly familiar with the specified
requirements.
2. For installation of sealants throughout the Work, use only personnel who have been
specifically trained in such procedures and who are completely familiar with the joint
20 October 1997 Sealants
Carlsbad City Library 07920-l 96013
1.04
A.
B.
C.
1.05
A.
details shown on the Drawings and the installation requirements called for in this
Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Deliver to the job site in unopened containers or cartons, each bearing product name and
color.
Store materials in waterproof, dry sheds. Do not permit material to be stacked in such
a way as to cause damage to the containers.
WARRANTY
Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver
to the Architect two copies of a Warranty signed by the Contractor and cosigned by the
subcontractor for the work of this Section, agreeing to replace and reinstall all work of this
section found defective in material or workmanship within a period of five years from date
of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard sealant of type indicated, complying
with ASTM C 920 requirements.
B. Type “A” Sealant: Multi-part nonsag, urethane sealant, “Sonolastic NP2”, by Sonneborn
Building Division, “Dynatrol II”, by Pecora Corp., “Sikafiex 2c NS”, by Sika Corp., or
approved equal.
1. In general, at exterior or perimeters of openings in exterior walls such as
concrete-to-concrete, metal-to-metal, metal-to-concrete, masonry, or stucco.
C. Type “B” Sealant: One-part nonsag urethane sealant, “Vulkem 116” or ‘l/ulkem 921”, by
Mameco International, Inc., “Dynatrol I”, by Pecora Corp., “Sikaflex la” or “Sikaflex
15LM”, by Sika Corp., or approved equal.
1. In general, at interior or perimeters of openings in exterior walls such as
metal-to-metal, metal-to-concrete, masonry, or stucco.
D. Type “C” Sealant: Multi-part, pourable, urethane sealant, “Vulkem 245”, by Mameco
International, Inc., “Sonalastic SL-2”, by Sonneborn Building Division, “Sikaflex 2c SL”,
by Sika Corp., or approved equal.
1. In general, for use on areas subject to foot or vehicle traffic.
E. Type “D” Sealant: Butyl sealant, “PTI 757”, by Protective Treatments, Inc., “BC-158”, by
Pecora Corp., “ADCO B-100 Butyl Sealant”, by Adco Products, Inc., or approved equal.
20 October 1997 Sealants
Carlsbad City Library 07920-2 96013
.-
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
1. In general, for interior wall penetrations for piping or conduit which are to be covered
by escutcheon or other trim or plate.
Type “E” Sealant: One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant, “Dow Coming 786”, by
Dow Corning Corp., “SCS 1702 Sanitary”, by General Electric Co., or approved equal.
1. In general, for interior wall penetrations and comers and joints in wet areas where
mildew could form.
Type “F” Sealant: One-part nonacid-curing silicone sealant, “Dow Coming 791”, by Dow
Corning Corp., “Dow Corning 795”, by Dow Coming Corp., “864”, by Pecora Corp.,
“Baysilone 400”, by Miles Industries, or approved equal.
1. For use in conjunction with fluorpolymer coatings. Use Dow Coming 795 for glass-
to-glass, glass-to-metal, and metal-to-metal. Use Dow Corning 791 for perimeter
sealing at porous surfaces.
Type “G” Sealant: Two-part silicone sealant, “Dow Corning 756”, by Dow Coming Corp.,
or approved equal.
1. For use in conjunction with granite.
Acoustic Sealant: “BA-98”, by Pecora Corp., ‘ADCO BP400 Acoustical Sealant”, by
Adco Products, Inc., “PTI 404”, by Protective Treatments, Inc., or approved equal.
1. In general, for sound retardant sealant at sound-rated partitions or partitions with s-
ound-retardant material therein.
Acoustic Tape Sealant: “Extru-Seal Tape”, by Pecora Corp., “Norton 730 Foam Tape”,
by Norton Performance Plastics, “SM5050”, by Schnee-Morehead, or approved equal.
1. In general, at sound-rated partitions or partitions with sound-retardant material
therein.
Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates.
Sealant Backings: Nonstaining, compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and
other joint fillers, and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer.
Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at
back of joint.
Solvents or cleaning agents shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,
as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Sealants
07920-3 96013
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
-A.
B.
C.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.04
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered
as acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper
installation of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
As work progresses, immediately remove sealant that may be adhered to adjacent
materials.
JOINT DIMENSIONS .
Joint dimension shall be as shown on the drawings. In joints up to l/4 inch in width the
depth of the sealant shall be the same as the joint width.
In open joints over l/4 inch wide, the depth of the sealant shall be approximately one-half
the width of the joint, but in no case less than l/4 inch deep.
When open joints exceed the depth requirements, insert backup material to the
necessary depth stated above. If not, place bond breaker tape in bottom of joint.
When perimeter joints around frames that are to be sealed do not have built-in stops,
insert backup material to provide a joint with a minimum depth of l/4 inch and a
maximum depth of l/2 inch.
APPLICATION
Back-up Material: Install in clean dry joints at the proper depth to provide sealant
dimensions as specified earlier.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Sealants
079204 96013
B. Masking: If required, shall be applied in continuous strips aligned with joint edge.
Remove tape immediately after joints have been tooled.
/-
C. Primer: Apply where recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
D. Sealant: Shall be applied under pressure to clean dry joint, using hand or power guns,
or other approved methods.
1. Nozzles shall be of the proper size and shape to form the required bead and
completely fill the joint. Joint shall be filled from the bottom, making sure air bubbles
are not left in the joint.
2. Joints shall be tooled as directed or approved, using lubricants recommended by the
manufacturer. Joints shall be slightly concave and recessed at least l/8” from the
top of the joint.
3.05 MISCELLANEOUS SEALING WORK
A. The entire extent of sealing work is not necessarily fully or individually described herein.
Sealing shall be provided wherever required to prevent light leakage as well as moisture
leakage. Refer to drawings for conditions and related parts of the work.
3.06 CLEANING
A. At the completion of this work, all surfaces adjoining joints shall be cleaned of all excess
sealant and left in a neat condition subject to the approval of the Architect.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Sealants
07920-5 96013
SECTION 08110
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
,-
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
a. Indicate details of each frame type, elevations of each door design type, details
of all openings, and all details of construction, installation, and anchorage.
The Owner/Architect is not responsible for verifying the throat thickness of door
frames.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the work of this Section shall be
produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with
history of successful production acceptable to the Architect.
B. Comply with “Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames”, SDI 100,
by the Steel Door Institute.
C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
20 October 1997 Metal Doors and Frames
Carlsbad City Library 08110-I 96013
D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and
frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined per ASTM
E 152 and which are labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Wamock Hersey, or other
testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
MATERIALS
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel.
Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard units, except hot-dip galvanize
items to be built into concrete walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as
applicable.
-C. Shop Applied Paint: Use rust-inhibitive baked enamel or paint, suitable as a base for
specified finish paints.
2.02
A.
DOORS
Manufacturers: Amweld Building Products, Inc, Steelcraft Manufacturing Co., or
approved equal.
B. Materials: Commercial quality, stretcher leveled, cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM
A 366 or hot rolled steel, pickled and oiled conforming to ASTM A 569, free from scale,
pitting or surface defects; with edges, angles and comers square.
C. Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models specified below or as indicated on
drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 3 or 4, minimum 18gage
cold-rolled sheet steel faces.
2. Exterior Doors: ANSIKDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 4, minimum 16-
gage galvanized steel faces.
D. Door Louvers: Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated,
constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24-gage cold-rolled steel
set into minimum 20-gage steel frame.
2.03 WELDED STEEL FRAMES
A. Manufacturers: Amweld Building Products, Inc, Steelcraft Manufacturing Co., or
approved equal.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Metal Doors and Frames
0811 O-2 96013
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.04
A.
2.05
A.
2.06
A.
B.
C. Finish Hardware Preparation:
Provide metal frames of the types and styles indicated on the Drawings or schedules and
complying with SDI 100 for minimum materials and construction requirements.
Fabricate frames of welded construction; exterior 16 gage, interior 16 gage, hot-rolled or
cold-rolled sheet steel. Miter all corners.
Fabricate frames for exterior doors of 16 gage hot-dip galvanized sheet steel. Comers
shall be fully welded type with welds ground smooth. Stops shall be a minimum of 5/8
inch deep.
Fabricate frames for all other doors of 16 gage hot-rolled or cold-rolled sheet steel.
Comers shall be welded type. Provide standard and drywall frames as required.
Anchors: Provide one floor anchor and the number of wall anchors listed below, welded
into each jamb member. Wall anchors shall be of a type recommended by the
manufacturer for the specific wall condition. All anchors shall be 18 gage minimum.
Door Silencers: Provide 3 silencers on strike jambs of frames.
LABELED FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES
Doors and frames designated to be labeled shall bear Underwriters Laboratory, Wamock
Hersey, or other testing and inspecting organization label acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, rating as indicated on door schedule.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
FABRICATION
Comply with SDI 100 for minimum materials and construction requirements.
Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat Phillips or Jackson heads for exposed
screws and bolts. Fill countersunk heads with Bondo, sand and paint.
1. Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware,
including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with final Finish
Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware suppliers. Comply with
applicable requirements of ANSI Al 15.
2. Reinforce hollow metal units to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and
tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at site.
3. Locate finish hardware in accordance with “Recommended Locations for Builders
Hardware”, published by the National Builders Hardware Association.
20 October 1997
Car&bad City Library
Metal Doors and Frames
0811 O-3 96013
D. Shop Painting: After fabrication, clean, phosphate treat, and dip or spray coat all
exposed surfaces of doors and frames with a rust-inhibitive primer complying with ANSI
A 224.1.
1. Finish field painting is specified in Section 09900.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Setting Welded Frames:
1. Comply with the provisions of SDI 100, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Set frames prior to construction of enclosing walls. Set frames accurately in position,
plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall
construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces
smooth and undamaged.
3. When installed in prepared openings, install sealant between frame and wall in com-
pliance with the requirements of Section 07920.
Door Installation:
1. Fit doors accurately in their respective frames, within clearances specified in SDI
100.
2. Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Metal Doors and Frames
081104 96013
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
.- A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal
work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating
condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are
warped, bowed or othewise damaged.
B. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.
END OF SECTION
F--
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Metal Doors and Frames
08110-5 96013
SECTION 08210
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Samples: Submit samples, l-0” square or as indicated, for the following:
1. Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces with solid wood edging representing typical
range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Color
charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer in the
specified products.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the following:
1. Woodwork Institute of California, “Manual of Millwork”, latest edition.
2. National Wood Windows and Door Association, NWVVDA I.S. I, ” Series Industry
Standard for Wood Flush Doors”.
3. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 80. “Standard for Fire Doors and
Windows”.
20 October 1997 Wood Doors
Carlsbad City Library 0821 O-l 96013
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
4. American Society for Testing and Materials”, ASTM E 152, “Methods for Fire Tests
of Door Assemblies”.
NWWMA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWWDA Wood Flush Door
Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of NWWDA I.S.l
Series.
1. For manufacturers not participating in NWWDA Hallmark Program, a certification of
compliancemay be substituted for marking of individual doors.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical in materials and
construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152 and which are
labeled and listed for ratings indicated by UL, Wamock Hersey or other testing and
inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations
of NWWDA pamphlet “How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors”,
as well as with manufacturer’s instructions.Protect wood doors during transit, storage and
handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative
humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas
during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements
applicable to project’s geographical location:
WARRANTY
Door Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturers
standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or
replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing
of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of
referenced quality standards.
20 October 1997 Wood Doors
Carlsbad City Library 082 1 O-2 96013
1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial
Completion.
a. Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
B. Contractors Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractors work
contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturers warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division.,
Weyerhauser Company, or approved equal.
8. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Faces: Grade A plain sliced maple, uniform light.
2. WIC Grade: Custom.
3. Construction: PC-5 or PC-7 (Particleboard core, 5- or 7-ply).
C. Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following requirements.
1. Faces and WIC Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non-rated doors in same
area of building, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Construction: Manufacturer’s standard core construction as required to provide fire-
resistance rating indicated.
3. Edge Construction: Provide manufacturers standard laminated edge construction
for improved screw-holding capability and split resistance as compared to edges
composed of a single layer of treated lumber.
D. Metal Frames: Specified in Section 08110.
E. Hardware: Specified in Section 08710.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
20 October 1997 Wood Doors
Carlsbad City Library 082 1 O-3 96013
-- -- 3 - EXECUTION YAK I
3.01
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement-of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02
A.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.03
A.
B.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
Clearances:
1. Non-Rated Doors: Provide clearances of l/8” at jambs and heads; l/8” at meeting
stiles for pairs of doors; and l/2” from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish
or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide l/4” clearance from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
2. Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80.
Hardware: Install hardware in accordance with Section 08710.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely.
Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Wood Doors
08210-4 96013
SECTION 08305
ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Access Doors: Milcor Type DW flush panel access door for drywall by Milcor, Bilco Co., Karp Associates, or approved equal, steel 16 gage frame and 14 gage panel.
B. Fire Rated Access Doors: Milcor Type UFR U.L. fire rated access door, with reduced sound transmission, rating to be same as wall, by Milcor, Bilco Co., Karp Associates, or approved equal. Steel 16 gage frame and 14 gage panel, baked enamel prime coat, self- closing door, with knurled knob plus mortise cylinder.
C. Fire Rated Ceiling Access Doors: Type ATR for suspended gypsum board ceilings, by Milcor, Bilco Co., Karp Associates, or approved equal. Panels shall be 18 gage steel pan
i r
20 October 1997 Access Doors
Carlsbad City Library 08305-I 96013
D.
2.02
A.
type with I-112 inch recess to receive single layer of 518 inch gypsum board, screwdriver operated lock assembly with metal cams and grommet to access hole through finish, with baked enamel finish.
Access Doors - Ceramic Tile: Style M, non-rated, stainless steel, by Milcor, Bilco Co., Karp Associates, or approved equal.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
3.03
A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
Repair damage to metal items to match manufacturer’s original finish.
Leave work area clean and free of debris.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Access Doors
08305-2 96013
SECTION 08335
ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protection: Protect the materials of this Section during transit, storage, and handling to
prevent deterioration, damage, and soiling.
C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary at no additional cost to the Owner.
,’ I-
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Rolling Counter Shutters
08335-I 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rolling Counter Shutters: Model Cl 1 rolling counter shutter, by Atlas Door Corp., or
approved equal.
B. Operation: Manual push-up.
C. Mounting: Interior face mounted on a prepared opening.
D. Door Curtain:
1. Slats: Extruded aluminum of 6063 alloy, in continuous lengths, interlocked to form
curtains.
2. Endlocks: Each end of alternate slats to be fitted with endlocks to act as a wearing
surface and to maintain slat alignment.
3. Bottom Bar: Reinforce curtain with bottom bar.
4. Astragal: Bottom bar to be furnished with a vinyl astragal to protect counter top
finish.
E. Spring Counterbalance:
1. Counterbalance: Housed in a steel pipe of diameter and wall thickness to restrict
maximum deflection to .03” per foot of shutter width.
2. Springs: Shall be designed to be helical tension type designed to include an
overload factor of 25% and for optimum ease of operation. Springs to be grease
packed and are to be mounted on a steel inner shaft.
3. Ball Bearing: Sealed, to minimize wear of pipe shaft rotation around inner shaft,
F. Bracket plates carrying pipe counterbalancing shaft are to be no less than l/8” thickness
and to house ends of shutter coil.
G. Guide Assembly:
1. Guides: Extruded aluminum of 6063 alloy with integral wear strips for contact with
slats.
2. Retainer: Guide construction to have an integral curtain retainer.
3. Trim: Same extruded material as guides to cover fasteners.
H. Hoods: To be rectangular and fabricated of .040” aluminum.
I. Locking: Slide bolts on bottom bar.
20 October 1997 Rolling Counter Shutters
Carlsbad City Library 08335-2 96013
J. Finish: 204Rl clear anodized finish.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
I, Verify that openings are prepared with headers level, jambs plumb, floor level,
without projections, and are correctly dimensioned to receive rolling counter shutters.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures, anchoring allcomponents firmly
into position for long life under hard use.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Moving parts shall operate smoothly and controls function properly.
Doors shall be free from warp, twists, or distortion.
Safety features shall function properly.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
Repair damage to overhead coiling doors to match manufacturers original finish.
Adjust mechanism so moving parts operate smoothly.
Leave work area clean and free of debris.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Rolling Counter Shutters
Carlsbad City Library 08335-3 96013
SECTION 08465
SLIDING DOOR OPERATOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections. I--
4. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturers maintenance and service data for sliding door
operators and control system including the name, address and telephone number of the
nearest authorized service representative.
I .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: For installation of the sliding door operators, engage an
experienced Installer who is an authorized representative of the manufacturer for both
the installation and maintenance of the type of units required for this Project.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
C. Codes and Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the following:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. ANSI Al 56.10, Power Operated Pedestrian Doors.
20 October 1997 Sliding Door Operator
Carlsbad City Library 08465-l 96013
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Sliding Door Operator: “EZ-Fit: No. 4050, or approved equal, microprocessor control
overhead surface mounted sliding electro-mechanical door operator consisting of a DC
shunt-wound permanent magnet motor with sealed ball bearings, and mechanical drive
assembly.
1. The microprocessor system shall automatically define and set the opening and
closing creep positions, and the fully open and fully closed position of the door
system. Mechanical limit switches will not be accepted. The control shall include
an adjustable time delay (1 to 60 seconds).
2. Software shall incorporate a self diagnosing system for easy serviceability.
3. Motor shall operate from 115 VAC, 60 cycle, single phase power supply. Motor shall
require less than 5 amps at surge and full power stall.
4. Mechanical drive assembly shall include helical gear drive transmission sealed in
cast aluminum filled with lubricant for extreme conditions.
B. Activating Devices:
I. Presence Detection: The presence zone shall run the complete width of the door
opening and shall extend up to 16” on either side of the active leaf. The system
shall detect motionless people and/or inanimate objects. The detector shall remain
energized and monitor the doorway at all times. The presence detection zone shall
not be turned off before or during door closing cycle.
1. Microprocessor software controlling presence detection shall be programmed to
provide a “learn mode” so that self-adjustment to changes in floor conditions will
be made automatically.
2. Motion Detection: Built into the “Eye-Cue” system shall be an adjustable motion
detection field running the complete width of the doorway and up to 60” out from the
doorway.
3. Both detection systems shall be capable of operation within minus 20°F and 125OF,
and be uneffected by ambient light, radio, or ultrasonic frequencies.
4. The entire system shall not be false impulsed by rain, snow, or frost and shall
comply with ANSI Standard 156.10 for detection field sizes and function. Functions
shall be de-energized through position switch when not in use.
20 October 1997 Sliding Door Operator
Carlsbad City Library 08465-2 96013
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturers recommended installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Sliding Door Operator
Carlsbad City Library 08465-3 96013
SECTION 08511
STEEL WINDOWS AND DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol
A.
I .02
A.
B.
,-
I .03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
I. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturers specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Submit color charts for finishes and sealants.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Has completed installation similar to those required with a record
of successful in-service performance.
Standards: Comply with Steel Window Institute specifications.
Design Concept: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements and are
based on specific types and models indicated. Windows by other manufacturers may be
considered provided deviations are minor and do not change design concept.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
Allowable Tolerances: Size dimensions plus/minus l/l6 inch.
20 October 1997 Steel Windows and Doors
Carlsbad City Library 0851 I-l 96013
I .04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer: Hopes Architectural Products, Inc., or approved equal, as follows:
B. Heavy Intermediate Grade Windows and Doors:
1. Heavy intermediate grade windows and doors shall be manufactured from solid hot
rolled steel shapes. Sections shall be made from new billet steel with flanges rolled
integral at the mill.
2. Perimeter frames and door sections shall have glazing rebates providing an
unobstructed glazing surface 3/4” in height. Muntin glazing rebates shall provide an
unobstructed glazing surface 518” in height for up to 518” thick glazing.
3. Glazing rebate surfaces shall be perpendicular to the web or stem of the section.
Rebate surfaces that are tapered will not be acceptable.
4. Combined weight of frame and door sections shall be a minimum of 4.0 pounds per
lineal foot. Steel window frames shall weight not less than I.55 pounds per lineal
foot.
5. The door leaf sections shall have an integral dovetail groove weatherstripping.
B. Formed Doors and Frames: 5000 Series formed steel doors and frames shall be
manufactured from IO and I2 gage galvanized sheet steel.
C. Glazing beads shall be extruded aluminum alloy, 6063-T5, with a minimum thickness of
.062 inches.
D. Weatherstripping:
I. Heavy Intermediate Steel Doors and Frames: Extruded vinyl.
2. Formed Steel Doors and Frames: Silicone rubber at head and jamb, “Finseal” pile
at sill.
E. Door Hardware:
1. Hinges: FBB179 steel ball-bearing, 4.5 x 4.5 x 0.180.
2. Latching Hardware: Hope’s mortise lock with No. 20-86H lever handles, rosette,
thumb turn, and key cylinder for ANSI F-21 dormitory and bedroom function, with
Glynn-Johnson No. FB6 top and bottom flush bolts.
20 October 1997 Steel Windows and Doors
Carlsbad City Library 0851 l-2 96013
/-
F.
G.
2.02
A.
2.03 i-
A.
B.
C. Formed Steel Doors and Frames:
3. Panic Hardware: Von Duprin No. 33 rim device, Von Duprin No. 3327 exposed
vertical rod device (touchbar).
4. Push/pull hardware.
5. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5 or T6, finished in 204-RI clear
anodize or dark bronze color anodize to match hardware, Reese No. 204, Hope’s
No. 1 I2 for floor closer condition only.
6. Floor Closers: Dor-0-Matic No. PH3600 Series (Handicap operation).
7. Overhead Closers: LCN No. 4040.
8. Door Holder/Stop: Glynn-Johnson No. 300 Series.
Kickpanels shall be fabricated from10 and 12 gage galvanized steel.
Finish: Factory primed with finish coat of Hopes Ultrathane aliphatic acrylic polyurethane.
Colors to be selected by the Architect.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
FABRICATION
Fabricate steel windows and doors in accordance with approved shop drawings.
Heavy Intermediate Steel Windows and Doors:
1. Prior to fabrication, all hot rolled steel sections shall be cleaned by shot blasting.
2. Corners of frame and door sections shall be mitered or coped, then solidly welded.
Exposed and contact surfaces shall be finished smooth, flush with adjacent surfaces.
1. 12 gage steel perimeter frame sections shall be notched and back welded the full
depth of the frame for maximum strength and weathertightness.
2. The 10 gage steel exterior door skin shall be fabricated from a single sheet of steel
to eliminate any exposed joints and welding.
3. The 12 gage steel interior door skin shall be coped and backwelded
4. Interior and exterior skins shall be welded together at 12” intervals to form door
leaves. Welds shall be dressed smooth and neatly cleaned.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Steel Windows and Doors 0851 l-3 96013
D. Muntins shall be tenoned and welded to the perimeter frame. Muntin intersections shall
be either slotted and cross-notched, or tenoned and welded to each other.
E. Glazing:
1. All windows and doors shall be designed for outside glazing.
2. Provide continuous snap-in glazing beads to suit the glass specified.
F. Weatherstrip: Continuous vinyl weatherstripping shall be applied to the integral
weatherstrip groove in the interior contact surface of the ventilator and door sections, and
shall be on the same plane around the interior perimeter of the ventilated area.
Weatherstripping that is surface applied or requires additional retainer or requires crews
for application, shall not be acceptable except at the sill of the door. sill sweep
weatherstripping shall be applied to a retainer in a manner that allows for easy
replacement.
G. Steel kickpanels shall be welded to the door sections at unexposed surfaces.
-H. Factory Finishing:
1. After fabrication, doors, windows, mullions, covers, and trim shall be zinc phosphate
treated in a continuous five-stage process as a preparation for receiving paint.
2. Following this pretreatment, one coat of special primer shall be applied and oven
cured.
3. Following the prime coat, all windows, doors, and frames shall be given a spray coat
of Hope’s Ultrathane aliphatic acrylic polyurethane, applied by an automated electro-
static process and then oven cured.
4. Colors to be selected by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. Window and door openings shall conform with details, dimensions, and tolerances
shown on the approved shop drawings.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
20 October 1997 Steel Windows and Doors
Carlsbad City Library 0851 l-4 96013
3.02 INSTALLATION
/- A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturers recommended installation procedures.
C. Set plumb, level true to line, without warp or rack of frames or operating components.
Provide support and anchor securely to surrounding construction.
D. Anchor units securely to surrounding construction with manufacturers recommended
fasteners.
E. Separate corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of
contact with other materials.
F. The exterior joints shall be properly sealed watertight with an approved sealant and joints
shall be neatly pointed.
G. Adjust doors and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping, smooth
operation and a weather-tight closure.
- ,’
E. Clean surfaces after installation. Avoid damage to the finish. Remove excess glazing
and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other
moving parts.
F. Clean glass after installation.
G. Repair any abraded areas of factory finish with matching finish.
END OF SECTION
/- 20 October 1997 Steel Windows and Doors
Carlsbad City Library 08511-5 96013
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMIT-I-ALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections. /-
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each color and finish available in specified grades from the proposed
manufacturers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles and dimensional requirements of
aluminum windows. Window units having minor deviations from dimensions and profiles
indicated on drawings may be accepted, provided such deviations do not materially
detract from design concept or intended performances and subject to approval of the
Architect.
B. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, requirements for aluminum windows,
terminology and standards of performance, and fabrication workmanship are those
specified and recommended in ANSVAAMA 302.9 and applicable general recommenda-
tions published by AAMA and AA.
,F-- 20 October 1997 Aluminum Wtndows
Carlsbad City Library 08520-l 96013
C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
D. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Efco Corp., Fleetwood Aluminum Products, Inc., or approved equal. To
establish quality and quantities, the products of Efco Corp. are described.
B. Wrndows: Efco Series 4550, fixed and slider, for l/4” glazing, as indicated on the
drawings.
1. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended for strength, corrosion
resistance, and application of finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile
strength and not less than 0.062 inch thick at any location for main frame and sash
members.
2. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other
materials warranted to be noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.
3. Except for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application
of hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of the member or hardware being
fastened, as appropriate.
4. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer’s standard at each edge of each operable sash or
ventilator.
5. Hardware: Heavy duty type, stainless steel, or corrosion-resistant material
compatible with aluminum of sufficient strength to perform the function for which it
is intended.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Aluminum Windows
08520-2 96013
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate windows to comply with indicated standards. Include complete system for
assembly of components and anchorage of windows. Provide units that are reglazable
without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
B. Aluminum Finish: Manufacturer’s standard painted finish. color to be selected by the
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
,f- B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.03
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Install all windows with adequate provision for vertical building movements, allowing
expansion and contraction to occur without breaking glass.
Anchoring: Firmly anchor all windows, using all anchoring devices required to ensure
positive attachment.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
Protect all finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage during progress of the
Work.
CLEANING UP
Immediately prior to acceptance of the Work, remove all protective materials from the
windows and clean all exposed members.
/- 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Aluminum Windows
08520-3 96013
B. Abrasives: Do not use abrasives or harmful cleaning agents.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Aluminum Windows
08520-4 96013
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Door Hardware.
B. Related Sections:
1, Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Installation of finish hardware.
2. Section 08100 - Steel Doors and Frames.
3. Section 08200 - Wood Doors.
C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Windows.
Cabinets of all kinds, including open wall shelving and locks.
Signs, Except as noted.
Toilet accessories of all kinds including grab bars.
Installation.
Rough hardware.
Folding partitions.
Sliding aluminum doors.
1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS & SUBMITTALS
A. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1.
1. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by the Owner to
meet existing standard.
B. Submittals: Submit six copies of schedule in accordance with Division 1. Organize
schedule into “Hardware Sets” with an index of doors and heading, indicating complete
designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following
information:
1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of each hardware item. Use BHMA
Finish codes as per ANSI A156.18.
2. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4. Location of hardware set cross referenced to indications on drawings both on floor
plans and in door schedule.
5. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
6. Mounting locations for hardware.
7. Door and frame sizes and materials and degree of swing..
8. Include a list of all manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone number.
20 October 1997 Finish Hardware
Carlsbad City Library 0871 O-1 96013
9. Submit manufacturers technical data and installation instructions for the electronic
hardware.
C. Fabricate doors, frames and walls with necessary reinforcement to receive the specified
hardware. No extra cost will be allowed for changes or corrections necessary to facilitate
the proper installation of hardware.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets, exit devices, hinges, and closers)
from one manufacturer.
2. Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who has in employment a certified
hardware consultant (AHC) who is available at all reasonable times, during the
course of the work, for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect, and
Contractor.
(1) Has a maintenance and service facility located within 100 miles of the project
site. This facility will stock parts for products supplied and be capable of
repairing and replacing hardware items found defective within the warranty
period specified in section 1.06.
B. Exit Doors: Openable from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge
ok effort.
C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware forfire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA
Standard No. 80. Provide hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for the type
and size of each door and door frame label. Latching hardware, door closers, ball
bearing hinges, and seals are required whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not.
1. Where exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide supplementary marking
on door UL label indicating “Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware”, and
provide UL label on exit device indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Acceptance at Site: Individually package each unit of finish hardware complete with
proper fastening and appurtenances, clearly marked on the outside to indicate contents
and specific locations in the Work.
B. Deliver packaged hardware items at the times and to the locations (shop or field) for
installation, as directed by the Contractor.
C. Unused Hardware: Return new hardware not installed and existing hardware not
indicated to be reinstalled to the Owner.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper
design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar
20 October 1997 Finish Hardware
Carlsbad City Library 0871 O-2 96013
requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of
omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents.
B. Upon request, check the Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that
adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide guarantee from hardware supplier as follows:
1. Closers: Ten years, except electronic closers, two years.
2. Exit Devices: Three years.
3. Hinges: Life of the Building.
4. All other Hardware: Two years.
B. State that the supplier has made an inspection of the finished installation, including the
electrical, electronic and pneumatic hardware, and has verified that the hardware is
functioning properly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Listed Acceptable Substitutes must provide the function and features of the specified
product otherwise it will not be approved.
Item:
Hinges
Locks
Exit Devices
Closers
Auto Flush Bolts
Coordinators
Silencers
Push & Pull Plates
Kickplates
Stops & Holders
Overhead Stops
Thresholds
Seals & Bottoms
Key Cabinets
Manufacturer:
(STA) Stanley
(SCH) Schlage
(VON) Von Duprin
(LCN) LCN
(GLY) Glynn Johnson
(GLY) Glynn Johnson
(GLY) Glynn Johnson
(QUA) Quality
(QUA) Quality
(GLY) Glynn Johnson
(GLY) Glynn Johnson
(ULT) Ultra
(ULT) Ultra
(LUN) Lund
Acceptable Sub:
McKinney, Hager
None
None
None
Ives, DCI
Ives, DCI
Ives, Rockwood
Ives, Rockwood
Ives, Rockwood
Ives, Sig.Brass
None
Reese, NGP
Reese, NGP
Tele Kee
B. Furnish items of hardware required to complete the work in accordance with these
specifications and the manufacturers instructions, including items of hardware
inadvertently omitted from this specification. Items to be of equal quality and type.
C. Where the exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to the finished shape or
size of the members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having as nearly as
practicable the same operation and quality as the type specified, subject to Architect’s
approval.
20 October 1997 Finish Hardware
Carlsbad City Library 087 1 O-3 96013
D. Carefully inspect Project for the extent of the finish hardware required to complete the
Work. Where there is a conflict between these Specifications and the existing hardware,
furnish finish hardware to specification.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Locksets and latchsets: as specified. Strikes shall be 16 gage curved steel, bronze or
brass with 1” deep box construction, and have lips of sufficient length to clear trim and
protect clothing.
1. Latchbolts: minimum 3/4-inch throw.
2. Deadbolts: l-inch minimum throw.
3. Comply with requirements of local security ordinances.
4. Thumbtums: accessible design not requiring a pinching or twisting motion to
operate.
5. Lock Series and Design: L9000, 06L.
B. Hinges: Hinge open widths shall be minimum, but of sufficient size to permit door to
swing 180”. Furnish hinges with steel or stainless-steel pins and concealed bearings.
1. Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 foot, 6 inch height. Add one for each additional 30
inches in height or fraction thereof.
2. Provide extra heavy weight hinges on doors over 3 foot, 5 inches
3. Outswinging exterior doors to be non-ferrous and have nonremovable (NRP) pin.
4. Provide shims and shimming instructions for proper door adjustment.
C. Exit Devices: Furnish devices at wood doors with sleeve nuts unless doors are furnished
with blocking for exit devices. Lever handle trim design: match locksets. Touch Bar type
devices: quiet return, deadlocking latchbolt, stainless steel touchpads, non-handed.
Device push bar must release with 32 Ibs. maximum pressure when 250 Ibs. of pull is
applied against the pull side of door.
D. Surface Door Closers: Rack and pinion type with removable non-ferrous case and cast
iron body. Provide thru-bolts at wood doors unless doors are furnished with blocking for
closers. Non-handed, non-sized, and adjustable. Place closers inside building, stairs, and
rooms.
1. Flush transom offset brackets where parallel arm closers are listed for doors with
fixed panels over.
2. Drop brackets at narrow head rails.
3. Opening pressure: Exterior doors 8.5 Ibs, interior doors 5 Ibs, labeled fire doors 15
Ibs.
4. 1/4in., 1/2in., 5/8in., 3/4in., or 7/8in. fifth screw spacers as required for parallel-arm
brackets.
5. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test.
6. Exterior doors shall not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures from 120°F
to -30°F.
E. Kick Plates: Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as
specified. Machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Finish Hardware
0871 O-4 96013
/-
F. Door stops: Provide stops to protect all walls, casework or other hardware.
1. Unless otherwise noted in the Hardware Sets, furnish wall type with appropriate
fasteners. Where wall type cannot be used, furnish floor type. If neither can be used,
furnish overhead type.
G. Seals: Finished to match adjacent frame color. Resilient seal material: Santoprene,
silicone rubber, polyurethane or polypropylene. U.L. label applied to seals on rated
doors.
1. Solid neoprene: MIL Spec. R6855-CL Ill, Grade 40. Sponge neoprene: MIL Spec.
R6130, Type II, Group C
H. Thresholds: As specified and per details.
1. Exteriors: Set in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying
with the requirements in Division 7 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”. Non-ferrous
1/4inch fasteners, Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve
Anchors (FHSL).
I. Screws: Exposed screws to be Phillips head. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be
slotted drive. Sleeve nuts to be full length to prevent door compression.
J. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for
pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door
assemblies.
K. Overhead Stops: Furnish units with non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end
caps.
2.03 FINISH
A. Generally BHMA 626 Dull Chromium.
1. Areas using BHMA 626 shall have push, pulls and kickplates of BHMA 630, Satin
Stainless Steel, unless otherwise noted.
B. Door closet-s shall be factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise
noted.
C. Aluminum items: match predominant adjacent material.
D. Seals to coordinate with frame color.
2.04 KEYING REQUIREMENTS
A. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with the Owner to determine the Key System
requirements. Keying system shall be approved by Owner’s representative in writing.
Furnish construction key system in accordance with lock manufacturers standard. Where
interchangeable core systems are used, use temporary cores for construction keying.
Stamp keys “Do Not Duplicate”.
1. Key system: Schlane 6 pin.
20 October 1997 Finish Hardware
Carlsbad City Library 087 1 O-5 96013
B. Locks and cylinders: keyed at the factory of the lock manufacturer where permanent
records are maintained. Locks and cylinders shall be of the same manufacturer.
C. Permanent keys: deliver only to Owners representative.
D. Keying Schedule: Submit three copies indicating how the Owners final instructions has
been fulfilled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION-
3.01 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility and
security codes.
1. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware which are
scheduled to remain, match locations of the existing hardware.
2. Notify Architect of any code conflicts before ordering material.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install each hardware item per manufacturers instructions and recommendations. Do not
install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set
units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
B. Installation shall conform to local governing agency security ordinance.
C. Thresholds: See 2.2.1.1
D. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.
E. When hardware is to be attached to an existing metal surface without reinforcement, use
RevNuts, or similar anchoring device, for all screws.
3.03 ADJUSTING:
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper
operation or function of every component. Replace components which cannot be
adjusted, to operate freely and smoothly.
1. Hardware damaged by improper adjustment methods to be repaired or replaced to
Owner‘s satisfaction.
B. Inspection: By hardware supplier within 10 days of contractors request. Inspector or
Contractor will sign off the hardware as being complete and correctly installed and
adjusted. Further corrections of defective material shall be the responsibility of his
representative.
C. Follow up inspection: Installer to provide a letter of agreement to the Owner that
approximately 6 months after substantial completion, the installer shall visit the jobsite
20 October 1997 Finish Hardware
Carlsbad City Library 087 1 O-6 96013
,-
/-
with the representatives of the manufacturers of the locking devices and door closers and
accomplish the following:
1. Re-adjust all hardware.
2. Evaluate maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and
instruct owners personnel.
3. Identify items that have deteriorated or failed.
4. Submit a written report identifying problems and likely future problems.
3.04 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE:
A. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which Hardware Set is used with each
door.
Hw Set: 01
3 EA SPRING HINGE 401 O-6 652 BOM
1 EA PANIC DEVICE 35E0 626 VON
BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY GATE SUPPLIER.
Hw Set: 02
3 EA HINGE CB1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
1 EA OFFICE LOCKSET L905OP 06L XL1 l-800
1 EA SURFACECLOSER 1461 X FC X ST
1 EA KICK PLATE 48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
1 EA DOME STOP FB13X
1 SET SEAL WS28OBL (HEAD 8, JAMBS)
652 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 QUA
626 GLY
BLK ULT
Hw Set: 03
ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIE
Hw Set: 04
EA HINGE CB1961 4-l/2 X 4-l/2 NRP
SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB7
EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2
EA STOREROOM LOCK L908OP 06L X 7/8” LTC STK.
EA ASTRAGAL WSO54SP X TB
EA O.H.STOP/HOLDER 90H
SET SEAL WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
EA DOOR BOTTOM DBOOGAN
EA THRESHOLD TH042A MS&A
DOOR CONTACT SWITCH BY OTHERS.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Finish Hardware
08710-7
600 STA
626 GLY
626 GLY
626 SCH
600 ULT
630 GLY
BLK ULT
AL ULT
AL ULT
96013
Hw Set: 05
EA HINGE CB1960 4-l/2 X 4-l/2 NRP
SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB7
EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2
EA STOREROOM LOCK L908OP 06L X 718” LTC STK.
EA ASTRAGAL WSO54SP X TB
EA O.H.STOP/HOLDER 90H
SET SEAL - WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
EA DOOR BOTTOM DBOOGAN
EA THRESHOLD TH042A MS&A
PROVIDE SDG&E QUAD KEYWAY.
DOOR CONTACT SWITCH BY OTHERS.
3 EA HINGE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK
1 -EA DOME STOP
3 EA SILENCER
3 EA HINGE
1 EA OFFICE LOCKSET
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA WALL BUMPER
1 SET SEAL
3 EA HINGE
1 EA OFFICE LOCKSET
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA WALL BUMPER
1 SET SEAL
3 EA HINGE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK
1 EA WALL BUMPER
3 EA SILENCER
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Hw Set: 06
1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L908OP 06L
FB13X
GJ64
Hw Set: 07
CB1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L905OP 06L XL1 l-800
1461 X FC X TB
48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
5ow
WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
Hw Set: 08
CB1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L905OP 06L XL1 l-800
P1461 X FC
5ow
WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
Hw Set: 09
1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L908OP 06L
5ow
GJ64
Finish Hardware
0871 O-8
600 STA
626 GLY
626 GLY
626 SCH
600 ULT
630. GLY
BLK ULT
AL ULT
AL ULT
600 STA
626 SCH
626 GLY
GRY GLY
652 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
BLK ULT
600 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 GLY
BLK ULT
600 STA
626 SCH
630 GLY
GRY GLY
96013
Y--
/-
3 EA HINGE
1 EA OFFICE LOCKSET
1 EA WALL BUMPER
3 EA SILENCER
3 EA HINGE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA WALL BUMPER
1 SET SEAL
3EA HINGE
1 EA PANIC DEVICE
1 EA IC RIM CYLINDER
1 EA PULL
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA O.H.STOP
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 SET SEAL
1 EA DOOR BOlTOM
1 EA THRESHOLD
HwSet: 10
1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L9050P 06L XL1 l-800
5ow
GJ64
HwSet: 11
CBl900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L908OP 06L
1461 X FC X TB
48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
5ow
WS28OBL (HEAD & JAMBS)
HwSet: 12
CB1961 4-l/2 X 4-l/2 NRP
98NL-OP
20-057
521
P1461 X FC
100s
48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
DB022AV
TH042A MS&A
DOOR CONTACT SWITCH BY OTHERS.
3 EA HINGE
1 EA FIRE EXIT DEVICE
1 EA IC RIM CYLINDER
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA WALL BUMPER
1 SET SEAL
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
HwSet: 13
CB1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
98L-F X 9941, X 06
20-057
P1461 X FC X TB
48 IO” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
5ow
WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
Finish Hardware
08710-g
652 STA
626 SCH
630 GLY
GRY GLY
652 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
BLK ULT
600 STA
626 VON
626 SCH
630 QUA
689 LCN
630 GLY
630 QUA
BLK ULT
AL ULT
AL’ ULT
652 STA
626 VON
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
BLK ULT
96013
HwSet: 14
3
1
1
1
1
l-
1
1
1
EA HINGE CBI900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
EA FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L-F X 994L-RIGID X 06
EA IC RIM CYLINDER 20-057
EA SURFACE CLOSER PI481 X FC
EA KICK PLATE 48 IO” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
EA WALL BUMPER sow
SET SEAL - WS28OBL (HEAD & JAMBS)
DOOR CONTACT SWITCH AND AUDIBLE ALARM BY OTHERS.
HwSet: 15
EA HINGE CBI960 4-l/2 X 4-l/2 NRP
EA PANIC DEVICE 98NL-OP
EA IC RIM CYLINDER 20-057
EA PULL 521
EA SURFACE CLOSER PI461 X FC
EA O.H.STOP 100s
SET SEAL WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
EA DOOR BOlTOM DB022AV
EA THRESHOLD TH042A MS&A
DOOR CONTACT SWITCH BY OTHERS.
HwSet: 16
EA HINGE CBI900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2 652 STA
EA PRIVACY SET L9040 08L XL1 l-800 626 SCH
EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 X FC X TB 689 LCN
EA KICK PLATE 48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S 630 QUA
EA WALL BUMPER 5ow 630 GLY
SET SEAL WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS) BLK ULT
3 EA HINGE
1 EA LATCHSET
1 EA SURFACECLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA WALL BUMPER
1 SET SEAL
20 October 1997 Finish Hardware
Carlsbad City Library 08710-10
HwSet: 17
CBI900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L9010 06L
1461 X FC X TB
48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
5ow
WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
652 STA
626 VON
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
BLK ULT
600 STA
626 VON
626 SCH
630 QUA
689 LCN
630 GLY
BLK ULT
AL ULT
AL ULT
652 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
BLK ULT
96013
HwSet: 18
/-
I-
3 EA HINGE
1 EA OFFICE LOCKSET
1 EA O.H.STOP
3 EA SILENCER
3 EA HINGE
1 EA OFFICE LOCKSET
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA OVERHEADSTOP
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 SET SEAL
1900 4-l 12 X 4-I/2
L905OP 06L XL1 l-800
410s
GJ64
HwSet: 19
CB1900 4-I/2 X 4-l/2
L9050P 06L XL1 l-800
1461 X FC X TB
90s
48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
Hw Set: 20
3 EA HINGE CBI960 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
1 EA ENTRANCELOCK L9456P 06L XL1 I-800
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 X FC
1 SET SEAL WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
1 EA DOOR BO-ITOM DBOOGAN
1 EA THRESHOLD TH042A MS&A
DOOR CONTACT SWITCH BY OTHERS.
Hw Set: 21
3 EA HINGE CBI961 4-l/2 X 4-l/2 NRP
1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK L9456P 06L XL1 I-800
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER PI461 X FC
1 EA O.H.STOP 100s
1 SET SEAL WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM DB022AV
1 EA THRESHOLD TH042A MS&A
DOOR CONTACT SWITCH BY OTHERS.
.
Hw Set: 22
6 EA HINGE CBI 900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
2 EA PULL PLATE 151 O-5 4” X 16”
2 EA PUSH PLATE 40-5 4” X 16”
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER PI461 X FC X TB
2 EA KICK PLATE 48 10” X 1” LDW .050 B4S
2 EA WALL BUMPER 5ow
4 EA SILENCER GJ64
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Finish Hardware
0871 O-l 1
652 STA
626 SCH
652 GLY
GRY GLY
652 STA
628 SCH
689 LCN
652 GLY
630 QUA
BLK ULT
600 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
BLK ULT
AL ULT
AL ULT
800 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 GLY
BLK ULT
AL ULT
AL ULT
652 STA
630 QUA
630 QUA
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
GRY GLY
96013
Hw Set: 23
3 EA HINGE CB1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
1 EA FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L-F-BE X 994L X 06
1 EA SURFACECLOSER P1461 X FC X TB
1 EA KICK PLATE 48 IO” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
1 EA WALL BUMPER 5ow
1 SET SEAL WS28OBL (HEAD & JAMBS)
DOOR CONTACT 8WITCH AND AUDIBLE ALARM BY OTHERS.
3 EA HINGE 1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
1 EA LATCHSET L9010 06L
1 EA WALL BUMPER 5ow
3 EA SILENCER GJ64
6 EA HINGE
1 EA PANIC DEVICE
1 EA PANIC DEVICE
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER
1 SET MTG STILE SEAL
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER
2 EA O.H.STOP
1 SET SEAL
2 EA DOOR BOTTOM
1 EA THRESHOLD
Hw Set: 24
Hw Set: 25
CB1960 4-112 X 4-l/2 NRP
CD9847EO
CD9847TL X 372T X LESS PULL
20-001 114
WS227A X WS227AW
P1461 X FC
100s
WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
DBOOGAN
TH042A MS&A
DOOR CONTACT SWITCH BY OTHERS.
Hw Set: 26
3 EA HINGE
I EA OFFICE LOCKSET
I EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA WALL BUMPER
3 EA SILENCER
CBI900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L905OP 06L XL1 l-800
1461 X FC X TB
48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
5ow
GJ64
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Finish Hardware
08710-12
652 STA
626 VON
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
BLK ULT
652 STA
626 SCH
630 GLY
GRY GLY
600 STA
626 VON
626 VON
626 SCH
AL ULT
689 LCN
630 GLY
BLK ULT
AL ULT
AL ULT
652 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
GRY GLY
96013
Hw Set: 27
:F 3 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
3 EA
3 EA
1 EA
I EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 SET
3 EA
1 EA
1 EA .r-- 3 EA
3 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 EA
3 EA
HINGE
PULL PLATE
PUSH PLATE
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
WALL BUMPER
SILENCER
HINGE
STOREROOM LOCK
SURFACE CLOSER
KICK PLATE
WALL BUMPER
SEAL
HINGE
STOREROOM LOCK
O.H.STOP
SILENCER
HINGE
CLASSROOM LOCK
SURFACE CLOSER
O.H.STOP
KICK PLATE
SILENCER
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
CB1900 4-l/2 X 4-I/2
151 O-5 4” X 16”
40-5 4” X 16”
1461 X FC X TB
48 10” X 2” LDW .050 84s
5ow
GJ64
Hw Set: 28
CB1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L9080P 06L
P1461 X FC X TB
48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
5ow
WS280BL (HEAD 8, JAMBS)
Hw Set: 29
1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L908OP 06L
410s
GJ64
Hw Set: 30
CB1900 4-l/2 X 4-I/2
L907OP 06L
1461 X FC X TB X ST
410s
48 IO” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
GJ64
Finish Hardware
08710-13
652 STA
630 QUA
630 QUA
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
GRY GLY
652 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
BLK ULT
652 STA
626 SCH
652 GLY
GRY GLY
652 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
652 GLY
630 QUA
GRY GLY
96013
Hw Set : 31
EA HINGE CB1961 4-l/2 X 4-l/2 NRP
SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB7
EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2
EA ENTRANCE LOCK L9456P 06L XL1 l-800 X 7/8” L
EA ASTRAGAL WSO54SP X TB
EA OVERHEAD STOP 90s
SET SEAL - WS28OBL (HEAD & JAMBS)
EA DOOR BOTTOM DBOOGAN
EA THRESHOLD TH042A MS&A
DOOR CONTACT SWITCH BY OTHERS.
4 EA HINGE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK
1 EA WALL BUMPER
3 -EA SILENCER
3 EA HINGE
1 EA PRIVACY SET
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA WALL BUMPER
3 EA SILENCER
8 EA HINGE
1 EA PANIC DEVICE
1 EA PANIC DEVICE
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER
2 EA PULL
I SET MTG STILE SEAL
2 EA SURFACECLOSER
2 EA O.H.STOP
1 SET SEAL
2 EA DOOR BOTTOM
1 EA THRESHOLD
Hw Set: 32
CB1901 5 X 4-l/2
L907OP 06L
5ow
GJ64
Hw Set : 33
1900 4-l/2 X 4-112
L9040 06L XL1 l-800
48 IO” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
5ow
GJ64
Hw Set: 34
CB1960 4-l/2 X 4-l/2 NRP
CD9847EO
CD9847TL X 372T X LESS PULL
20-001 114
20-001 114 (FOR CYL. DOGGING
521
WS227A X WS227AW
PI461 X FC
100s
WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
DBOOGAN
TH042A MS&A
DOOR CONTACT SWITCH BY OTHERS.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Finish Hardware
08710-14
600 STA
626 GLY
626 GLY
626 SCH
600 ULT
652 GLY
BLK ULT
AL ULT
AL ULT
600 STA
626 SCH
630 GLY
GRY GLY
600 STA
626 SCH
630 QUA
630 GLY
GRY GLY
600 STA
626 VON
626 VON
626 SCH
626 SCH
630 QUA
AL ULT
689 LCN
630 GLY
BLK ULT
AL ULT
AL ULT
96013
- , 3 EA HINGE
1 EA OFFICE LOCKSET
1 EA DOME STOP
3 EA SILENCER
3 EA HINGE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA WALL BUMPER
1 SET SEAL
3 EA HINGE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 SET SEAL
/-
6
1 SET SEAL
EA HINGE
1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK
1 EA ASTRAGAL
2EA SURFACE CLOSER
2 EA OVERHEADSTOP
2 EA KICK PLATE
Hw Set: 35
1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2’
L905OP 06L XL1 l-800
FB13X
GJ64
Hw Set: 36
CBI900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L907OP 06L
1461 X FC X TB
48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
5ow
WS280BL (HEAD & JAMBS)
Hw Set: 37
CB1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
L907OP 06L
Pl461-SPRING CUSH X FC X TB
48 10” X 2” LDW .050 B4S
WS28OBL (HEAD & JAMBS)
Hw Set: 38
CB1900 4-I /2 X 4-112
WS008AN (HEAD & JAMBS)
FB7
DP2
L907OP 06L X 7/8” LTC STK.
WSOI 1AS
1461 X FC X ST
90s
48 IO” X 1” LDW .050 B4S
.*-
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Finish Hardware
0871 O-1 5
652 STA
626 SCH
626 GLY
GRY GLY
652 STA
626 SCH
689 LCN
630 QUA
630 GLY
BLK ULT
652 STA
626 SCH
889 LCN
630 QUA
BLK ULT
600 STA
628 GLY
626 GLY
626 SCH
AL ULT
689 LCN
652 GLY
630 QUA
AL ULT
96013
Hw Set: 39
3 EA HINGE CBl961 4-l/2 X 4-l/2 NRP
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L908OP 06L
1 EA O.H.STOP/HOLDER 90H
1 SET SEAL WS28OBL (HEAD & JAMBS)
1 EA DOOR BO-iTOM DBO22AV
1 EA THRESHOLD TH042A MS&A
Hw Set: 40
6 ‘EA HINGE
2 EA MANUAL FLUSHBOLT
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK
2 EA WALL BUMPER
4 EA SILENCER
1900 4-l/2 X 4-l/2
FB6
DP2
L9080P 06L X 7/8” LTC STK.
5ow
GJ64
Hw Set: 41
EA KEY CABINET 12018
20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
END OF SECTION
Finish Hardware
0871 O-16
600 STA
626 SCH
630 GLY
BLK ULT
AL ULT
AL ULT
652 STA
626 GLY
626 GLY
626 SCH
630 GLY
GRY GLY
GRY LUN
96013
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMIll-ALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association
(FGMA) “Glazing Manual” and “Sealant Manual” except where more stringent
requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards.
C. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities
having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI 297.1 and
testing requirements of CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials.
20 October 1997 Glazing
Carlsbad City Library 08800-I 96013
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
8.
1.06
A.
B.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked
with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Fire Resistance Rated Wrre Glass: Provide wire glass products that are identical to those
tested per ASTM E 163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and
performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each
kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a
single source for each type and class required.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand
normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without
failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in
the work.
1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature
range of 120 deg.F (67 deg.C) and from a consequent temperature range within
glass and glass framing members of 180 deg.F (100 deg.C).
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Where glass thicknesses are not indicated, provide thickness based on the wind
pressures required by the Uniform Building Code.
Wrnd pressure shall be assumed to have a one minute duration. Upon first application
of design wind load for the specified durations, probability of breakage shall not exceed
8/l 000.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Delivery: Do not deliver glass to the site until the areas to be glazed are ready to receive
the glass. Deliver glass in manufacturers storage cases with interleaving between lights.
Deliver glazing compound in manufacturer’s original cartons with labels intact.
20 October 1997 Glazing
Carlsbad City Library 08800-2 96013
C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before,
during, and after installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades.
D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
GLAZING MATERIALS
Type 1, Typical at Exterior Openings (except as noted): “Sea Foam Clear” l/4”
laminated glass by southwall Technologies, Palo Alto, CA (800) 365-8794. Daylight
Transmittance 71%, Solar Transmittance 34%, Summer Daytime U-Value .86, Shading
Coefficient .53.
B. Type 2, at clerestory windows at top of the Main Hall: “Sea Foam Clear” l/4” laminated
glass by Southwall Technologies, with “etch matte” obscure glass finish on the interior
face. Daylight Transmittance 71%, Solar Transmittance 34%, Summer Daytime U-Value
.86, Shading Coefficient .53.
C. Type 3, at north facing openings and openings beneath the courtyard arcade, and interior
openings: Clear l/4” Float glass, tempered where required.
D. Type 4 at Rated Interior Openings: Wired glass, Four 1 (wired, polished both sides),
Mesh m2 (square).
E. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge
clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer.
2.02
A.
GLAZING COMPOUNDS AND SEALANTS
Use glazing compounds and preformed glazing sealants approved for the application and,
except as otherwise specified, conforming to the Glazing materials portion of the FGMA
Glazing Manual.
2.03
A.
GLAZING ACCESSORIES
Provide all glazing accessories required to supplement those accessories which
accompany the items to the glazed, and as needed to provide a complete installation,
including glazing points, clips, shims, angles, beads, settling blocks, and spacer strips.
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
/-
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Glazing
08800-3 96013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
3.04
A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. Require Glezier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with
manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of
minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery.
Obtain Glazier’s written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing
work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
PREPARATION
Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer
from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use.
GLAZING
Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufactur-
ers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent
requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards.
Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard,
except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.
Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed
streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to
surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact
with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
20 October 1997 Glazing
Carlsbad City Library 08800-4 96013
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month,
for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence
of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in
other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass
by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Glazing
Carlsbad City Library 08800-5 96013
SECTION 09100
METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Fire-Resistance Rating: Where assemblies with fire-resistance ratings are indicated,
provide materials and installations identical with applicable assemblies which have been
tested and listed by recognized authorities.
C. Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations,
comply with the following:
1. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM C 645, Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid
Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board
/- 20 October 1997 Metal Support Systems
Carlsbad City Library 09100-1 96013
b. ASTM C 754, Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached
Gypsum
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
B. Metal studs shall be delivered to the job site wrapped in protective covering and stored
in dry locations, end in such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide steel materials for metal support systems with galvanized coating ASTM A 525,
G-60, as follows:
1. Suspended and Furred Ceiling Systems: ASTM C 645.
a. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, 12 gage, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
b. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
C. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
d. Angle-Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed from
0.0635 inch thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Coating
Designation G90, with bolted connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts.
e. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated)
metal and 7/16 inch wide flanges, protected with rust-inhibitive paint, l-112 inch
deep, 475 Ibs per 1000 ft., unless othewise indicated.
2. Nonload-Bearing Wall Framing and Furring: ASTM C 645, size and gage as
indicated on drawings.
a. Furring Channels: Minimum 25 gage galvanized sheet steel; 3/4 inch deep;
standard width; lengths as required.
b. Resilient Channels: Minimum 25 gage galvanized sheet steel; size and lengths
as required.
C. Fastening and Anchorage Devices: Approved devices of type and size to suit
application and to rigidly secure furring members in place.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Metal Support Systems
09 100-2 96013
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
/c- A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which- work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Suspended and Furred Ceiling Systems: ASTM C 754, except that framing members
shall be 16” O.C. unless indicated otherwise.
Nonload-Bearing Wall Framing and Furring: ASTM C 754, except as indicated otherwise.
Isolation: Where metal support systems abut building structure horizontally, and where
partition work abuts overhead structure, isolate the work from structural movement.
Install slip or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support.
Fixture Support Framing: Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing where
work is required to support fixtures, equipment, services, shelving and similar work.
Furring: Contractor shall ascertain all locations where partitions must be furred to
accommodate piping, panels and other wall elements prior to erection of the metal studs.
Metal door frames and other frames in metal studs partitions shall be securely braced or
otherwise anchored to the studs at sides of openings. All grounds shall be securely
anchored to the studs.
Erection Tolerances: Framing members which will be covered by finish materials shall
be within the following limits:
/- 20 October 1997 Metal Support Systems
Carlsbad City Library 09100-3 96013
1. Layout of Walls and Partitions: I/4 inch from intended position.
2. Plates and runners: l/8 inch in 8 feet from a straight line.
3. Studs: l/8 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative.
4. Face of framing members: l/8 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Metal Support Systems
09100-4 96013
SECTION 09200
LATH AND PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturers specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Prepare two 24” x 24” sample panels of texture No. 2 specified for approval before
starting any work. Finish texture shall match approved samples.
6. Refer to Section 01350 for mockup requirements of Textures No. 1 and 3.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the following:
1. ANSI A42.2, Specifications for Portland Cement and Portland Cement-Lime
Plastering, Exterior (Stucco) and Interior.
2. ANSI A42.3, Specifications for Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement and Portland
Cement-Lime Plastering, Exterior (Stucco) and Interior.
3. ASTM C 841 Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring.
20 October 1997 Lath and Plaster
Carlsbad City Library 09200-I 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LATHING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Finishes: Manufacturers standard steel products unless indicated as zinc alloy. Where
not othentvise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard galvanized finish on steel
products except as follows:
1. Exterior Components: Hot-dip galvanized finish; ASTM A 525 G90 for 18 gage and
lighter formed metal products, ASTM A 123 galvanized after fabrication for 16 gage
and heavier products.
2. Exterior Exposed Plastering Accessories: Provide zinc alloy accessories for exterior
work, except where fully concealed in plaster.
B. Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 Ibs. per sq. yd.
C. Accessories: Coordinate depth of accessory with thickness of and number of coats of
plaster to be applied.
1.
2.
Small-Nose Corner Beads: Expanded type with 2-7/8” wide flanges.
Comerite: Manufacturer’s standard preformed comer reinforcement made from 2.5
lb. per sq. yd. diamond mesh lath.
3. Square-Edged Casing Beads: Manufacturer’s standard with expanded or short
flange to suit application,
4. “A” Expansion Joint at CMU Expansion Joint: No. PCS-75-25 2 pc plaster control
screed, by Fry Reglet, or approved equal.
5. “B” typical Stucco Control Joint, Vertical and Horizontal: l/4” double “V” expansion
joint, galvanized.
6. Corner Reinforcement: Special stucco-type woven galvanized wire comer reinforcing
strips.
7. Foundation Screed: Type 24-A weep screed, 26 gage.
8. Vented Screed at Exterior Ceiling Areas: 3” wide vented aluminum screed, No.
WPM-75-V-300, by Fry Reglet, or approved equal.
D. Anchorages: Tie wire, nails, screws and other approved metal supports, of type and size
to suit application and to rigidly secure lathing materials in place; galvanized coated.
E. Paper Backing: Comply with Fed. Spec. UU-B-790 as follows:
1. Waterproof (Barrier): Type 1, Grade B.
20 October 1997 Lath and Plaster
Carlsbad City Library 09200-2 96013
F.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
r- H.
I.
2.04
A.
2. Weather Resistant (Breathing): Type 1, Grade D, 60 minute.
Gypsum sheathing substrate is specified in Section 09262.
PLASTER
Cement for plaster shall be portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type II.
Gun plastic portland cement machine application of basecoats shall conform to ASTM C
78, Type I or II. Plasticizing agents may be added in manufacturing process not to
exceed 12% of the total volume.
Sand used for plaster shall be clean and well graded from coarse to fine, and shall
conform to ASTM C 144.
Water used for plaster shall be clean and free from deleterious amounts of acid, alkali,
and organic materials.
Fiber for Base Coats: Alkaline-resistant (AR) glass or polypropylene fibers, l/2-inch long,
free of contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.
Lime: ASTM C 206 Type S or ASTM C 207 Type S.
Gravel: River run gravel not to exceed 3/16” in any dimension. Source of gravel shall
remain constant throughout the plastering portion of the work.
Waterproofing Additive: Thoroseal Plaster Mix, polymer-modified plaster waterproofing
additive, by Thoro System Products, by Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc., or approved
equal.
1. For use at uncoped parapet wall tops.
Elastomeric Coating: Specified in Section 09800.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
/- 20 October 1997 Lath and Plaster
Carlsbad City Library 09200-3 96013
B.
3.02
A.
B.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.04
A.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements ofgovernmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures
FURRING AND LATH INSTALLATION
Erect metal furring and lath as required for cement plaster in accordance with referenced
standards.
Install members true to lines and levels and to provide surface flatness with maximum
variation of l/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
Control Joints: Install control joints as indicated on the drawings.
Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends, Secure rigidly
in place.
Continously reinforce internal angles with comer mesh, ‘except where the metal lath
returns 3 inches from comer to form reinforcement. Fasten at perimeter edges only.
Place beaded external angle with mesh at corners. Fasten at outer edges only.
Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.
Use 3/8” head forced entry fasteners to secure lath. Secure to concrete masonry unit
walls at grout joints wherever possible.
Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing
materials. Secure rigidly in place.
PLASTERING
Portland Cement Plaster Proportions and Mixing: Comply with ASTM C 926. Proportion
materials by volume. Adjust mix proportions within limits specified to attain workability.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least
2 minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer’s directions but do not to exceed 2 tbs.
per cu. ft. of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to
maintain workability.
20 October 1997 Lath and Plaster
Carlsbad City Library 092004 96013
B. Plaster Texture 1 (Building Walls): Texture shall match Architects sample panel
available in Architects office and mockup panel.
1. Scratch coat: Approximately 3/8” thick.
2. Brown Coat: Scratch and brown to total 718” thickness. Brown coat shall be brought
to a true even surface by rodding and floating. The brown coat shall then be struck
off using a minimum 10’ long straight-edge darby. As the surface is darbied, gravel
mixed into the brown coat will be drawn out leaving fissures in the flat surface of the
plaster coat. Additional gravel may be added to the surface during darbying to attain
the fissured and textured surface. The finished surface shall be a flat, consistent
plane with fissures and textures forming voids in the flat plane. There shall be no
texture rising above the darbied surface of the brown coat. The final appearance of
the plaster shall match approved sample panel and mockup and subject to approval
of the Architect.
3. Finish Coat: There shall be no finish or color coat added to the brown coat.
C. Plaster Texture 2 (Exterior Arcade Ceilings):
1. Scratch Coat: Completely cover mesh lath in one heavy coat approximately 3/8”
thick.
2. Brown Coat: Scratch and brown to total 314” thickness. Brown coat shall be brought
to a true even surface by rodding and floating, and left rough, ready to receive finish
coat. Brown coat shall be approved by the Architect prior to application of finish
coat.
3. Finish Coat: Hand troweled sand finish coat to match approved sample panel, total
thickness 7/8”.
D. Plaster Texture 3 (Uncoped Parapet Wall Tops) with Waterproofing Additive:
1. Scratch Coat: Completely cover mesh lath in one heavy coat approximately 3/8”
thick.
2. Brown Coat: Scratch and brown to total 3/4” thickness. Brown coat shall be brought
to a true even surface by rodding and floating, and left rough, ready to receive finish
coat. Brown coat shall be approved by the Architect prior to application of finish
coat.
3. Finish Coat: Hand troweled sand finish coat to match approved sample panel and
mockup, total thickness 7/8”.
E. Cover accesories with minimum of l/8” plaster.
/- i 20 October 1997 Lath and Plaster
Carlsbad City Library 09200-5 96013
F. Curing: Cure portland cement plaster by maintaining each coat in a moist condition
following application; keep enclosed and fog-spray (after initial set) as required to prevent
dry-out.
1. Allow 48 hours between application of base coats. Cure base coats minimum of 10
days after application.
2. Finish coat shall not be moist cured except under adverse conditions. _
G. Complete all plaster work in the same plane and panel each day; do not stop short, such
as at an expansion joint, etc.
H. Plaster surfaces shall be true and flat: edges straight and even. Provide temporary
supplementary bracing to prevent bowing during plaster application.
I. Tolerances: Finish all plaster true and even within a tolerance of one in 500, leaving the
finished surface free from tool marks and all other blemishes.
J. Cleaning Metal Accessories: Wipe all metal accessories clean after application of each
coat.
K. Patching:
1. Patch and repair all damaged plaster surfaces due to other trades, improper
protection, or incomplete work of this Section.
a. Damage includes both physical and color damage.
b. Any patching or repair shall match adjacent color and texture.
3.05 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
A. Keep premises clean and orderly at all times and adequately protect all other work from
damage due to the work of this section.
B. Upon final completion of this work, clean off spatters, remove all tools, equipment and
unused materials and cuttings. Leave the work in a clean orderly manner.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Lath and Plaster
09200-6 96013
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
YAK I - - -11 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
B.
C. Protect installed materials from drafts during hot, dry weather.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
Provide certification that materials meet these specifications.
Provide samples of texture finishes for approval.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
SITE CONDITIONS
Do not install wallboard products unless installation areas comply with minimum
temperature and ventilation requirements recommended by manufacturer. As a
minimum, provide temperatures above 50 degrees F. during and after installation.
Under slow drying conditions, allow additional drying time between coats of joint
treatment.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Gypsum Wallboard
09250-l 96013
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Deliver materials in manufacturers unopened containers, packages or bundles identified
with manufacturers name, brand, type, and grade clearly marked.
Store in dry areas and protect from dampness and deterioration.
Protect ready-mixed products from freezing.
Protect metal products from rusting.
Deliver fire-rated materials bearing testing agency label and required fire classification
number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: United States Gypsum, Georgia Pacific, Domtar Gypsum Co., Gold Bond
Building Products, or approved equal.
B. Gypsum Board:
1. Standard: ASTM C 36; or Fed. Spec. SS-L-30, Type III, Grade R, Class I; 518 inch
thick, tapered edges, ends square cut, maximum permissible lengths.
2. Fire-rated: ASTM C 36 Type X; or Fed. Spec. SS-L-30, Type III, Grade X, Class I;
5/8 inch thick as required, tapered edges, ends square cut, maximum permissible
lengths.
3. Water-resistant: ASTM C 630, Grade X, 518 inch thick, tapered edges, ends square
cut, maximum permissible lengths.
C. Gypsum Wallboard Accessories:
1. Provide gypsum wallboard accessories in accordance with Gypsum Association
GA-216, and as shown on Drawings and specified.
2. Provide all accessories such as corner beads and edge trim as metal fabrications.
3. Plastic materials will not be acceptable.
D. Furring Channels: Provide hat or z-type furring channels fabricated from minimum 22
gage galvanized steel.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Gypsum Wallboard
09250-2 96013
E. Joint Treatment Materials: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840,
and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment
materials for the application indicated.
1. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Compound: Powdered, conforming to ASTM C 475. Taping and topping joint
compound or all-purpose joint compound may be used.
F. Texture Compound: “Texture Compound”, by U.S. Gypsum, or approved equal.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
1. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work
which is to be placed in or behind framing and gypsum wallboard. Allow such items
to be installed after framing is completed.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
3.03 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with Gypsum Association GA-21 6 recommendations.
B. Erect gypsum board in direction most practical and across studs with ends and edges
occurring over continuous firm bearing.
20 October 1997 Gypsum Wallboard
Carlsbad City Library 09250-3 96013
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
3.05
A.
Erect fire-rated assembly vertically, with edges and ends occurring over continuous firm
bearing.
Use screws when fastening gypsum board to framing.
Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.
Place comer beads and trim/melds as shown or required. Use longest practical lengths. Place edge trim-and molds where gypsum board abutts dissimilar materials and at all
board terminations exposed to view.
Construct tight fitting joints in exposed ceiling members, continuously around openings
and obstructions.
All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and three
separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fasteners heads, and
accessories. A smooth surface may be achieved by lightly sanding or wiping joint
compound with a dampened sponge. Care shall be exercised to ensure that the nap of
the gypsum board facing is not raised during sanding operations..
Finish:
1. Level 4 smoothwall finish.
2. Level 5: A thin skim coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured especially
for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth
and free of tool marks and ridges. The prepared surface shall be coated with a
primer/sealer prior to application of finish paint.
Remove and correct or replace defective work in a manner acceptable to the of Architect.
TEXTURE FINISH
Prepare drywall and other surfaces in strict accordance with texture finish manufacturer’s
instructions.
Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to receive finish in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to produce a uniform texture without starved
spots or other evidence of thin application, and free of application patterns. Finish shall
be a smooth texture. Orangepeel texture will not be accepted.
Remove any texture droppings or overspray from door frames, windows and other
adjoining work.
CLEANING
Use all necessary care during execution of this portion of the Work to prevent scattering
of gypsum wallboard scraps and dust and to prevent tracking of joint and finishing
compound onto floor surfaces. At completion of each segment of installation in a room
20 October 1997 Gypsum Wallboard
Carlsbad City Library 092504 96013
or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scraps, debris, and
surplus material of this Section.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Gypsum Wallboard
Carlsbad City Library 09250-5 96013
SECTION 09262
GYPSUM SHEATHING
YAK I
1 .Ol
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
1 - GtNtKAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum sheathing from one source from a single
manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Deliver gypsum sheathing board and related materials in original packages bearing brand
name and identification of manufacturer.
Store gypsum sheathing board so that it is protected against damage from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly
stack gypsum sheathing boards flat on leveled supports off the ground under protective
covering.
Handle gypsum sheathing board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.
20 October 1997 Gypsum Sheathing
Carlsbad City Library 09262-l 96013
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of gypsum sheathing board with installation of exterior cladding to
comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Do not leave gypsum sheathing board exposed to the weather after application for
longer than one month.
2. Do not leave gypsum sheathing board exposed to weather after its application for
more than one month or, if protected as indicated below, for more than 6 months:
a. Protect cutouts, comers and joints in the sheathing by filling them with a flexible
sealant at the time sheathing is applied.
b. As an alternate to sealant application, cover exposed exterior surface of
sheathing with building paper or air infiltration barrier. Apply covering
immediately after sheathing is installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Exterior Sheathing: “Dens-Glass”, glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing board, regular
type, l/2” thick, by Georgia-Pacific Corp., or approved equal.
B. Sheathing at Roof Tile: “Dens-Deck Roof Board”, by Georgia-Pacific Corp.“, or approved
equal.
C. Fasteners: Type S steel drill screws, 1” long, with corrosion-resistant finish in form of
cadmium plating or proprietary coating, and as follows:
1. For attachment of sheathing to light gage steel framing of less than 0.033 of an inch
in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002.
2. For attachment of sheathing to steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 of an inch in
thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
20 October 1997 Gypsum Sheathing Carlsbad City Library 09262-2 96013
,’
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturers
recommended installation procedures.
C. Cut boards at penetrations, edges and other obstructions of the work; fit tight against
abutting work, except provide 3/8 inch setback where non-loadbearing work abuts
structural elements at head and jambs.
D. Coordinate installation of sheathing with installation of flashing and joint sealers so that
these combined materials are installed in the sequence and manner which prevents
exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly to the interior.
E. Apply fasteners so that screw heads bear tightly against face of gypsum sheathing
boards but do not cut into face paper.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints with gypsum sheathing; cut and space edges to
match spacing of structural support elements.
G. Install 4-feet wide gypsum sheathing boards vertically with vertical edges centered over
flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjoining
boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud as
follows:
1. Fasteners spaced approximately 8 inches O.C. and set back 3/8 inch minimum from
edges and ends of boards.
END OF SECTION
P 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Gypsum Sheathing
09262-3 96013
SECTION 09270
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements, General: Provide gypsum board shaft wall systems
complying with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by pretesting
manufacturers corresponding stock systems.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are
identical to those of assemblies, including those incorporating elevator door and other
framing, whose fire resistance has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire-resistance rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to
GA File No.‘s in GA 600 “Fire Resistance Design Manual” or to design designations
in UL “Fire Resistance Directory” or in listings of other testing and inspecting
agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
20 October 1997 Gypsum Board Shaft Systems
Carlsbad City Library 09270-I 96013
B. Codes and Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the following:
C.
1. Metal Support Standard: ASTM C 754.
2. Gypsum Board Standard: ASTM C 840.
3. Gypsum Base Application Standard: ASTM C 844.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain products for gypsum board shaft wall systems from
a single manufacturer for each type of system indicated.
D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site to comply with
requirements of section 01200.
1.05
A.
-B.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
C. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and
other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
D. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Do not bend
or otherwise damage metal corner beads, trim, track, and studs.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with requirements for environmental conditions, room temperatures and
ventilation specified in Section 09250.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: United States Gypsum, Georgia Pacific, Domtar Gypsum Co., Gold Bond
Building Products, or approved equal.
1. Gypsum Shaftwall Board: ASTM C 442, Type X liner panel or coreboard designed
for shaft wall construction, with moisture resistant paper facing.
2. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, Type X.
3. Gypsum Wallboard Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and
manufacturer’s recommendations for application indicated.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Gypsum Board Shaft Systems
09270-2 96013
B. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645 , designed to comply with AISI “Specification for Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.”
C. Cavity Shaftwall Systems: Provide assemblies consisting of gypsum shaftwall boards
inserted between U- or J-shaped metal floor and ceiling tracks; specially shaped studs
engaged in tracks and fitted between shaftwall boards; and gypsum boards on finished
side or sides, applied to studs in number of layers, thicknesses and arrangement
indicated.
1. Shaftwall Board Thickness: Not less than 1 inch.
2. Stud Shape: C-H.
3. Stud Depth: As indicated.
4. Room-Side Finish: Two layers of 5/8 inch thick gypsum board.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
/- A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with gypsum board shaft wall system.
Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing to support fixtures, equipment,
services, heavy trim, railings, door frames, and similar work which cannot be adequately
supported directly by gypsum board shaft wall system.
,- 20 October 1997 Gypsum Board Shaft Systems
Carlsbad City Library 09270-3 96013
E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire resistance rating of entire shaft wall assembly
by installing supplementary fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices,
elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
F. In elevator shafts where inner face of shaftwall surface is located more than 2 inches
from shaft face of structural beams, floor edges and similar projections, provide 5/8 inch
gypsum board cants to cover tops of projections.
3.03 PROTECTION -
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which
ensures gypsum board shaft wall system construction being without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Gypsum Board Shaft Systems
09270-4 96013
SECTION 09330
CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
;f-
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
4. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
5. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers. Submit in duplicate.
a. Ceramic Tile: Two samples for each color and type.
b. Tnm shapes: Each color, type, and shape.
C. Certificates:
1. Master Grade Certificates - Ceramic Tile:
a. Conform to ANSI A137.1.
b. State grade, kind of tile, identification marks or tile packages, and name and
location of project.
C. Issued and signed by manufacturer when tile is shipped.
f- 20 October 1997 Ceramic Tile
Carlsbad City Library 09330-I 96013
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Codes and Reference Standards: In addition-to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the following:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. Al 08.1-l 992 Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Quarry Tile and Paver Tile
installed with Portland Cement Mortar.
b. A108.5-1992 Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
C. Al 37.1-l 988 Recommended Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
2. Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 1996
Edition.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturers original sealed containers.
1. Labels legible and intact identifying brand name and contents.
2. Tile cartons grade-sealed by manufacturer in accordance with ANSI A137.1.
3. Grade-seals unbroken.
4. Manufactured mortars and grouts to contain hallmarks certifying compliance with
reference standards and be types recommended by tile manufacturer for application.
C. Store materials under cover in manner to prevent damage or contamination.
1.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Deliver to the Owner for his use in future modifications an extra stock of approximately
10% of each color and pattern in each material installed under this Section, packaging
each type of material separately, distinctly marked, and adequately protected against
deterioration.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Ceramic Tile
09330-2 96013
1.06 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental:
1. Set and grout tile when ambient temperature is at least 50” F (10’ C) and rising.
2. Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before tile work begins.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A. Ceramic Floor Tile: ANSI A137.1, Section 5.1, Standard Grade, porcelain type,
impervious, 4” x 4” x l/4”, by American Olean Tile Co., Dal-Tile Corp., or approved equal.
Colors to be selected by the Architect.
B. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI Al 37.1, Section 6.1, Standard Grade, non-vitreous, matt glazed,
cushion edge, 2” x 2” x 5/16”, by American Olean Tile Co., Dal-Tile Corp., or approved
equal. Colors to be selected by the Architect.
C. Ceramic Tile Trim Units: Provide tile units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile
and to comply with the following requirements:
1. Size: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile.
2. Shapes for Thickbed Installations:
a. Base: Coved.
b. Wainscot Cap: Bullnose cap.
C. External Corners: Bullnose shape with a radius of at least 3/4 inch unless
otherwise indicated.
e. Internal Corners: Coved (round-in).
f. Jambs: Bullnose where tilework projects from jamb.
3. Shapes for Thinbed Installations:
a. Base: Straight, roundtop if no wainscot.
b. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose.
C. External Corners: Surface bullnose.
d. Interior Corners: Field-butted square comers.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Ceramic Tile
09330-3 96013
2.02 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Thin-Bed Method: Where thin-bed method applications are indicated, use the following
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mortar Bond Coat: Latex-Portland cement mortar, ANSI Al 18.4.
B. Thick-Bed Method: Where thick-bed method applications are indicated, use materials
complying with ANSI A 108.1 and as follows:
1. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches by 2 inches - W0.3
by W0.3 (16 ASW gage or 0.0625-inch diameter); comply with ASTM A 185 and
ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.
2. Latex additive (water emulsion) as follows, replacing pat-l or all of gauging water,
specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with job-mixed
portland cement and aggregate mortar bed, manufacturer’s standard.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: Proprietary backing and underlayment panels composed of
a concrete core with glass fiber mesh reinforcing on both faces covered with portland
cement treatment; average weight 3.7 Ibs. per sq. ft.; thickness, 7/16”, ‘Wonder-Board”,
by Modulars, Inc., “Durarock”, by USG, Inc., or equal.
I. Glass Fiber Tape: Coated glass fiber tape, 2 inches wide.
2.03 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: Proprietary preblended compound of portland cement,
selected and graded aggregates, color pigments and chemical additives gaged with latex
additive to comply with manufacturers directions.
1. Use latex additive in grout which is compatible with latex additive in latex-Portland
cement mortar.
2. Colors as indicated on the drawings.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sealants: Specified in Section 07920.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Zinc alloy or stainless steel, l/8” wide at top edge with integral
provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout.
D. Marble Thresholds: Group “A”; ASTM C 503, for exterior use with minimum hardness of
10.0 per ASTM C 241; white with honed finish unless otherwise indicated.
20 October 1997 Ceramic Tile
Carlsbad City Library 09330-4 96013
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with applicable parts of ANSI 108 series of tile
installation standards included under “American National Standard Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile”.
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation”; comply with
TCA installation methods indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as applicable to instal-
lation conditions shown.
Cementitious Backer Units:
1. Install horizontally, with end joints over framing members. Secure to each framing
member with screws spaced not more than 8 inches on center and not closer than
318 inch from the edge. Install screw heads flush with the surface of the board.
2. Joint Treatment: Fill horizontal and vertical joints and comers with latex-portland
cement mortar. Apply glass fiber tape over joints and comers and embed with same
adhesive.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a
complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
20 October 1997 Ceramic Tile
Carlsbad City Library 09330-5 96013
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and
other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minjmize tile
cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown.
For tile mounted in sheets make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work.
Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including
control, contraction and isolation joints, where indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings
and locations recommended in TCA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation”, and
approved by Architect.
1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of referenced
standards and sealant manufacturer.
Grout tile to comply with referenced installation standards, using grout materials
indicated.
Mix and install proprietary components to comply with grout manufacturer’s directions.
FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS
Ceramic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed
methods, TCA installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout
types:
Thick-Bed Method, Concrete Subfloor, TCA F112:
1. Portland Cement Mortar Bed: ANSI Al 08.1.
2. Reinforcing: Wtre fabric.
3. Mortar Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement mortar.
4. Grout: Latex-Portland cement.
Thin-Bed Method, Concrete Subfloor, TCA F113:
1. Tile Installation Specification: ANSI A108.5.
2. Grout Installation Specification: ANSI Al08.10, latex-portland cement grout.
20 October 1997 Ceramic Tile
Carlsbad City Library 09330-6 96013
3.04
F--- A.
B. Thin-Bed, Cementitious Backer Units, Metal Studs, TCA W244:
,.-
3.05
A.
B.
3.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
WALL INSTALLATION METHODS
Ceramic Tile: Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with
requirements indicated below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related
to subsurface conditions, and grout types:
1. Membrane (in wet areas): Roofing felt or polyethylene film.
2. Cementitious Backer Units Installation Specification: ANSI Al 08.11.
3. Tile Installation Specification: ANSI A108.5.
4. Grout Installation Specification: ANSI A108.10.
MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION METHODS
Thresholds: TCA TH611.
Expansion Joints, Vertical & Horizontal: EJ171.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so
they are free of foreign matter.
Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer’s printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect
metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.
Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped,
broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work.
Protection: When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with Kraft
paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage and
wear.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is
completed.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Ceramic Tile
09330-7 96013
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
,-
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections and interrelation
of mechanical and electrical systems,
a. Reproduction of contract drawings as the basis of shop drawings for the work
of this section is not acceptable.
b. Field check existing walls and ceiling conditions before making layout so that
shop drawings reflect the existing conditions.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers. Submit samples as follows:
a. 12-inch long samples of main tees, cross tees and perimeter molding.
b. Full sized samples of each type acoustical board and tile used in the work.
20 October 1997 Acoustical Ceilings
Carlsbad City Library 0951 o-1 96013
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
-A.
B.
C.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Codes and Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the following:
1. Uniform Building Code, 1994 edition.
2. ASTM C 635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel
Ceilings.
3. ASTM C 636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-In Paneling.
SITE CONDITIONS
Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust
generating activities have terminated and overhead mechanical work is completed, tested
and approved.
Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.
Maintain uniform temperatures of minimum (60’ F) and humidity of 20 percent to 40
percent prior to, during and after installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
MAINTENANCE
Deliver to the Owner for use in future modifications an extra stock of 100 tiles of each
color and pattern in each material installed under this Section, packaging each type of
material separately, distinctly marked, and adequately protected against deterioration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Suspension System: 15/l 6” Donn DX Exposed Tee Grid.
1. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, furring clips, splices, and edge moldings as required
to complete and complement suspended ceiling grid system.
2. Materials/Finish: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating; white
baked-on vinyl finish on exposed surfaces.
20 October 1997 Acoustical Ceilings
Carlsbad City Library 095 1 o-2 96013
3. Carrying Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application
and to rigidly secure the complete acoustic unit ceiling system, with maximum deflec-
tion of l/360.
B. Acoustic Panels: ‘Acoustone Frost” with “SLB” edge, by USG, or approved equal, “24”
x 48” x 314” fine textured mineral board, rabbeted and beveled panel edge for 15116”
exposed tee grid. NRC Range .65 - .75; CAC Range 40 - 44,
2.03 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02 /-
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Install acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with the Standard Building Code and
ASTM C 363 to produce finished ceiling true to lines and levels and free from warped,
soiled or damaged grid or lay-in panels.
Provide all necessary bracing to comply with building code requirements for lateral
resistance.
Install ceiling systems in a manner capable of supporting all superimposed loads, with
maximum permissible deflection of I/360 of span and maximum surface deviation of I/8
inch in 10 ft (l/960).
Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers
with other work. Ensure the layout of hangers and carrying channels are located to
accommodate fittings and units of equipment which are to be placed after the installation
of ceiling grid systems.
20 October 1997 Acoustical Ceilings
Carlsbad City Library 0951 o-3 96013
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
-L.
M.
N.
0.
3.03
A.
B.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the
nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span the required
distance.
Supply hangers or inserts for installation to the respective section in ample time and with
clear instructions for their correct placement. Provide additional hangers and inserts as
required.
Hang independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the longitudinal axis or face plane of
adjacent members.
Center ceiling systems on room axis leaving equal border pieces.
Do not support fixtures from or on main runners or cross runners if weight of the fixture
causes the total dead load to exceed the deflection capability. In such cases, support
fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each comer, or support
the fixtures independently.
Do not install fixtures so that main runners and cross runners will be eccentrically
loaded. Where fixture installation would produce rotation of runners, provide stabilizer
bars.
Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum
lengths, straight, true to line and level. Miter comers. Provide edge moldings at
junctions with other ceiling finishes. Where bullnose concrete block comers occur,
provide preformed closers to match edge molding.
Fit acoustic lay-in panels in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental
to appearance and function. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces.
Install lay-in panels level, in uniform plane and free from twist, warp and dents.
ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING
Adjust any sags or twists which develop in the ceiling systems and replace any part
which is damaged or faulty.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension members; comply with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning and touch-up
of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned
and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Acoustical Ceilings
09510-4 96013
SECTION 09520
ACOUSTICAL WALL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
,-
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
Manufacturers specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
Product certificates signed by manufacturers of acoustical wall panels certifying that
their products comply with specified requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility for Acoustical Wall Panels: Obtain each type of acoustical
wall panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality
in appearance and physical properties without delaying the progress of the Work.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
20 October 1997 Acoustical Wall System
Carlsbad City Library 09520-l 96013
C
1.04
A.
B.
? .05
A.
Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical wall panels with surface-burning
characteristics as indicated below, as determined by testing assembled materials
composed of facings and backings identical to those required in this Section, per ASTM
E 84, by a testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Protect acoustical wall panels from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and
handling. Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air
circulation. Do not deliver material to building until ‘wet work” such as concrete and
plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Do not begin installation until spaces to receive acoustical wall panels have been
enclosed and maintained at approximately the same humidity and temperature conditions
as planned for occupancy. Maintain temperature and humidity as recommended by panel
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: “Fabri-Trak” by Unique Concepts, Inc.; “Wall Technology”, by Broomfield
Co.; “Sonotrol-Sonowall”, by Armstrong World Industries; “Vicracoustic”, by A Forbo
Group Co.; or “Silentwall”, by Noise Control Products.
1. Fabric Types:
a. Type 1 for Auditorium:
Hytex Industries, Inc. (58 York Avenue, Randolph, MA, (617) 9634400)
Pattern: blue Ridge Facade.
Item: No. 77-05, 54” wide.
b. Type 2 for All other Locations:
Maharam
300801
Tek-Wall 1000
Color: 171 Seaside Green, 54” wide.
Content: 100% Polyolefin with Teflon.
20 October 1997 Acoustical Wall System
Carlsbad City Library 09520-2 96013
B. Acoustical Wall Panels: Fabric facing stretched over fiberglass board core with resin
reinforced edges, square profile eased l/16”, wrapped with fabric. All assemblies to be
Class A.
1. Mounting: Concealed clips and/or velcro tabs.
2. Type 1: I” thick high impact resistance fiberglass core.
3. Type 2: I” and 2” thick high impact resistance fiberglass core.
4. Type 3: 5/8” tackable core.
C. High Impact Resistant Core: I” (or 2” where shown) 7 pounds per cubic foot fiberglass
sheet with bonded face sheet of l/8” 20 pounds per cubic foot fiberglass.
D. Tackable Core: 518” or 314” high density mineral fiberboard.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
/- A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer’s
recommended installation procedures.
Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges
plumb, top edges level, and in alignment with other panels, scribed to fit adjoining work
accurately at borders and at penetrations. Comply with panel manufacturer’s printed
instructions for installation of panels using type of mounting accessories indicated or, if
none indicated, as recommended by manufacturer.
20 October 1997 Acoustical Wall System Carlsbad City Library 09520-3 96013
1. Remove and replace panels which are damaged and are unacceptable to Architect.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean panels with fabric facing, upon completion of installation, to remove dust and other
foreign materials from the facing, using a dry brush or a vacuum or both.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Acoustical Wall System
095204 96013
SECTION 09545
WOOD CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Certification:
1. Furnish letter certifying that the suspension system complies with applicable UBC
requirements.
2. Furnish letter of certification indicating compliance with flame spread requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section,
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997 Wood Ceilings
Carlsbad City Library 09545-I 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wood Ceiling: Linear Wood Ceiling, suspended between structural steel beams and
purlins, “Natural Lines”, by Conwed Corp., or approved equal.
1. Open style panels, random panel lengths 4’ to 12’, panel width 3-l/2” with l/2”
between. -
2. Panel Thickness: 1 l/16”.
3. Wood: Aspen, select grade, no knots, mineral stains or color variation.
a. Finish: One coat stain to match Architect’s sample. After stain application,
complete panels shall be finished with a clear subliming coating to provide a
flame spread rating not to exceed 25 per ASTM E84.
4. Each panel shall be furnished a full 12” to the foot so that panels butt end to end for
a continuous effect. Each panel shall be furnished with a connecting cleat on one
end. Secure non-cleated end of next panel to cleated end to assure that no gaps
exist between ends.
B. Acoustical Insulation: Each panel shall have a 1” thick, 1 PCF density, layer of
incombustible black fiberglass sound absorbing material laid on the panel. Noise
reduction coefficient on the acoustical membrane shall be 0.70 to 0.75.
C. Suspension System: Intermediate duty per ASTM C635, painted black, erected as
required to provide support for wood panels. System shall conform to all applicable
codes and seismic requirements.
D. Attachment: Panels shall be screwed to exposed grid using 1” self-tapping finish-head
screws applied through connector bars, spaced not more than 4’ on center on panel
length with two screws per panel width. Provide blocking and furring at all walls as
detailed.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Wood Ceilings
09545-2 96013
f-
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
1. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
1. Coordinate installation with fire sprinkler locations and finish trim requirements.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements ofgovernmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures to produce ceiling true to lines
and levels and free from warped, soiled or damaged wood panels.
C. Provide all necessary bracing to comply with requirements for lateral resistance.
D. Install wood panel trim pieces per manufacturers direction and as indicated.
3.03 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING
A. Adjust any sags or twists which develop in the wood ceiling system.
r B. Replace any part which is damaged or faulty.
C. Clean exposed surfaces of wood ceilings. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage.
D. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired so as to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Wood Ceilings
Carlsbad City Library 09545-3 96013
SECTION 09550
WOOD FLOORING
PART
1 .Ol
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
1.04
A.
B.
1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturers specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
4. Samples: Submit sets of range samples for each type of wood flooring. Include
finish where factory-finished flooring is required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Specialized wood flooring firm with not less than 3 years
successful experience in installation of flooring types specified.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
Comply with recommendations of “Maple Flooring Manufacturer’s Association (MFMA).
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Protect wood flooring from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling.
Deliver in unopened cartons or bundles and store in a dry place, with adequate air
circulation. Do not deliver material to building until “wet work” such as concrete and
plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Wood Flooring
09550-I 96013
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning: Do not proceed with installation of wood flooring until spaces have been
enclosed and are at approximate humidity condition planned for occupancy. Condition
wood for 5 days prior to start of installation by placing in spaces to receive flooring and
maintaining ambient temperature between 65 deg.F and 70 deg.F (18 deg.C and 21
deg.C) before, during, and after installation. Open packages of wood flooring which are
sealed (if any) to permit natural adjustment of moisture content.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wood Flooring: 25/32” x 2-l/4” maple flooring, MFMA Grade 2”” & Better, over 2 layers
of l/2” CDX plywood on 3/8” minimum resilient pads over 6 mil vapor barrier. Provide
edge trims as indicated on drawings. Stain color as selected by Architect, matte finish.
B. Resilient Pads: “Pion-Aire”, by Pioneer Products, Inc., “Duracushion I”, by Connor Aga,
or “Action Thrust I”, by Action Floor Systems, or approved equal.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the
manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Expansion Space: Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and
terminations of flooring
20 October 1997 Wood Flooring Carlsbad City Library 09550-2 96013
3.03 PROTECTION
.- A. Protect completed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with heavy Kraft
paper or other suitable covering, so that flooring and finish will be without damage or
deterioration at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Wood Flooring
Carlsbad City Library 09550-3 96013
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
4. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
5. Samples of each item, color, and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Deliver materials to the job site and store in their original unopened containers with all
labels intact and legible at time of use. Store in strict accordance with the manufacturers’
recommendations.
Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during
and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades.
20 October 1997 Resilient Flooring
Carlsbad City Library 09650-I 96013
D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary and at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: As recommended by manufacturer.
B. Linoleum: Marmoleum Marbelized Linoleum, l/8” thick, 6’-7” wide by 105” - 108” long,
by Forbo Floor coverings, Inc., or approved equal. color to be selected by the Architect.
C. Rubber Wall Base: 4” high; with matching stops and preformed comer units; standard
top-set cove, by Roppe Rubber Corp., or approved equal. Color to be selected by the
Architect.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Surface shall be smooth; level, at the required finish elevation, without more than 118” in
lo’-0” variation from level or slopes shown.
1. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered
as acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper
installation of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer’s
recommended installation procedures.
3.03 BASE INSTALLATION
A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18” between joints.
20 October 1997 Resilient Flooring
Carlsbad City Library 09650-2 96013
.-
B. Miter internal comers. Use premolded sections for external comers and exposed ends.
C. Install base on solid backing. Adhere tightly to wall and floor surface.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions.
E. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus l/8 inch over 10 feet (l/960).
3.04 LINOLEUM INSTALLATION
A. Clean substrate. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to
ensure adhesion over entire area. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation
of flooring before initial set.
B. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to ensure full adhesion.
C. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce minumum number
of seams.
D. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.
E. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to
produce tight joints.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove excess adhesive or other surface blemishes from base, using neutral type
cleaners recommended by the manufacturer. Protect installed base from damage until
acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Resilient Flooring
09650-3 96013
SECTION 09680
CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
8. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
a. Clearly indicate the location of all seams, method of joining seams, direction of
carpet, type of adhesive to be used, method of integrating edge strips with
carpet and installation procedures.
4. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
a. Submit one sample of carpet to be used, sufficiently sized to clearly indicate
construction. In addition, submit one duplicate sample of each color selected.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Carpeting
09680-I 96013
B.
1.04
A,
B.
C.
D.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
1.07
A.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete
and ceilings and overhead work, tested, approved and completed.
Test concrete s+ab for moisture and alkalinity. A maximum hygrometer reading of 65%
is acceptable. Any pH reading of 10 or above are unacceptable and must be corrected.
Carpet and adhesives should be conditioned on site between 68OF and a maximum
temperature of 90°F for 24 hours before installation Relative humidity should not exceed
65%. These conditions should be maintained prior to, during, and for at least 48 hours
after completion of installation.
Provide sufficient lighting.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
MAINTENANCE
Deliver to the Owner for use in future modifications an extra stock of approximately 10%
of each color and pattern in each material installed under this Section, packaging each
type of material separately, distinctly marked, and adequately protected against
deterioration.
WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer’s commercial fifteen-year non-prorated limited warranty, including:
1. Wear:Carpet will lose no more than 10% of pile face fiber, by weight.
2. Backing Integrity/Delamination: None during warranty period.
3. Edge Ravel: None during warranty period.
4. Dimensional Stability: Carpet shall remain dimensionally stable, no shrinking or
stretching, “cupping”, “doming”, “curling”, or “dishing” during warranty period.
5. Static Protection: Carpet will prevent static build-up in excess of 3.5KV when tested
using AATCC Test Method 134 at 70°F and 20% relative humidity during the
warranty period.
6. Smoke Density: Carpet will generate less than the generally accepted maximum
rating of 450 specific optical density for smoke, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E662 (NFPA 258) during the warranty period.
20 October 1997 Carpeting
Carlsbad City Library 09680-2 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
,-
A. Carpet: Shaw Networx 72, by Shaw Industries, inc., or approved equal.
6. Primary Carpet:
Specification Data:
1. Style Number:
2. Style Number:
3. Color:
4. Description:
5. Fiber Content:
6. Tufted Yam Weight:
7.’ Tufted Pile Height:
8. Finished Pile Thickness:
9. Total Thickness:
10. Gauge:
11. Stitches Per Inch:
12. Primary Backing:
13. Secondary Backing:
14. Total Weight:
15. Density:
16. Weight Density:
17. Coefficient of Friction:
18. Special Features:
Rhythm 72
59067
No. 530 Magic
Patterned loop
100% DuPont Antron Legacy BCF
Nylon 70% solution dyed, 30% yam
dyed
26.0 ounces per square yard
.187 inches
.lOO inches
.293 inches
l/12
10.0
Polypropylene
Permabac with Flosept
154.0 ounces per square yard
9360 ounces per cubic yard
243,360
.69
Flosept incorporated into backing
polymer passes GSA requirements
for antimicrobial protection
Tufted pattern repeat = 18”W x 36”L
Product Data:
1. Flammability:
Pill Test: (Dot FFl-70) PASS
Radiant Panel (Direct Glue):
ASTM E648 - Class I
NBS Smoke Density - (ASTM E662)
Flaming Mode - ~450
Non-flaming Mode
2. Static:
AATCC-134:
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Carpeting
09680-3
At 4 Minutes: ~300
At 4 Minutes: ~300
c3.5KV
96013
Type Static Control: Permanent conductive fiber
3. Electrical Resistance:
Burroughs Method:
IBM Method:
Pass
Pass
4. FHA Data UM44D:
Type - Class
N/A
N/A
N/A
5. Warranties: 15 year non-prorated commercial wear, edge ravel and delamination
warranties when recommended installation guidelines are followed.
C. Carpet Accents:
Specification Data:
1. Style Number:
2. Style Number:
3. Color:
4. Description:
5. Fiber Content:
6. Tufted Yam Weight:
7. Tufted Pile Height:
8. Finished Pile Thickness:
9. Total Thickness:
10. Gauge:
Il. Stitches Per Inch:
12. Primary Backing:
13. Secondary Backing:
14. Total Weight:
15. Density:
16. Weight Density:
17. Coefficient of Friction:
18. Special Features:
Product Data:
1. Flammability:
Pill Test: (Dot FFl-70) PASS
Radiant Panel (Direct Glue):
ASTM E648 - Class I
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Carpeting
09680-4
Synthesis II Square
59110
To be selected
Random tip shear loop modular car-
pet 100% DuPont Antron Legacy BCF
Nylon with Duratech soil protection
30.0 ounces per square yard
.187 inches
.129 inches
.304 inches
l/10
10.0
Polypropylene
Pennabac with Flosept
158.0 ounces per square yard
8372 ounces per cubic yard
251,160
.76
Flosept incorporated into backing
polymer passes GSA requirements
for antimicrobial protection
96013
NBS Smoke Density - (ASTM E662)
Flaming Mode - ~450
Non-flaming Mode
At 4 Minutes: ~300
At 4 Minutes: ~300
2. Static:
AATCC-134: <3.5KV
Type Static Control: Permanent conductive fiber
3. Electrical Resistance:
Burroughs Method:
IBM Method:
Pass
Pass
4. FHA Data UM44D:
Type Class
N/A
N/A
N/A
5. Warranties: 15 year non-prorated commercial wear, edge ravel and delamination
warranties when recommended installation guidelines are followed.
B. Installation Adhesive: “SureSet 5000”, environmentally safe pressure sensitive adhesive,
by Shaw Industries.
C. Seaming Cement: Netwotx 72 seam sealer.
D. Leveling Underlayment: ‘Ardex K-55” fast-setting trowelable underlayment, by Ardex,
Inc., or approved equal.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Examine substrates for moisture content, alkalinity, and other conditions under which
carpeting is to be installed. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions or rough areas
using material recommended by carpet or adhesive manufacturer.
C. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive
carpeting; vacuum clean immediately before installation. Check concrete surfaces to
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Carpeting
09680-5 96013
D.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
-D.
E.
F.
G.
I.
3.03
A.
ensure no “dusting” through installed carpet; apply sealer where required to prevent
dusting.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturers recommended installation procedures.
Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soiling
of carpet during remainder of construction period.
Comply with manufacturers’ instructions and recommendations for seam locations and
direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doors, center
seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorways.
Extend carpet under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and
furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space.
Provide cut-outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by
protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.
Expansion Joints: Do not bridge ‘building expansion joints with continuous carpeting,
provide for movement.
Installation:
1. Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges
and butter cuts with seaming cement.
2. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s instruc-
tions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps.
3. Roll entire carpet lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond.
4. Remove adhesive promptly from face of carpet.
CLEANING
Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer’s recommended cleaning agent.
20 October 1997 Carpeting
Carlsbad City Library 09680-6 96013
B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial machine
with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed.
Remove protruding face yam.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and installer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial
Completion.
B. Deliver usable scraps of carpet to Owners designated storage space, properly packaged
(paper wrapped) and identified.
1. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less than 9’-0” length, and pieces
of more than 3 sq. ft. area and more than 8” wide.
2. Dispose of smaller pieces as “construction waste”.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Carpeting
Carlsbad City Library 09680-7 96013
SECTION 09800
ELASTOMERIC COATING
YAK I
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
1 - GtNtKAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended application procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual application procedures used on the Work.
4. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
5. Submit 6” square samples of elastomeric coating applied to a rigid backing, in color
and texture selected.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01660.
WARRANTY
Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver
to the Architect two copies of a Warranty signed by the Contractor and cosigned by the
subcontractor for the work of this Section, agreeing to replace and reapply all work of this
section found defective in material or workmanship, including peeling, fading, cracking,
blistering, or crazing within a period of five years from date of Substantial Completion.
a+- , 20 October 1997 Elastomeric Coating
Carlsbad City Library 09800-I 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer: Thoro System Products, by Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc., or approved
equal.
B. Elastomeric Coating: “Thorolastic”. Colors to be selected by the Architect.
C. Crack Filler: ‘Thorolastic Knife Grade”.
D. Primer: “Thor0 Primer 1000” for use on chalky surfaces.
E. Patching Mortar: ‘Thorite” cement-based patching mortar, for repairs.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. Preparation of new substrates shall comply with coating manufactuer’s recommenda-
tions.
2. Surfaces to receive elastomeric coating shall be free of defects. The surface shall
be free of all laitance, dirt, dust, grease, form release treatments, efflorescence,
curing compounds, paint, and any other foreign material.
B. Commencement of application of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper application
of products of this Section.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Apply the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer’s
recommended application procedures.
20 October 1997 Elastomeric Coating
Carlsbad City Library 09800-2 96013
C. Patching: All cracks l/16” wide or those determined to be moving, must be cleaned out
to a minimum width and depth of l/4”. Flush out prepared crack with water to remove
any loose and dirty residue. Fill crack with crack filler using a putty knife or another flat
instrument. Crack is to be completely filled with material allowing a slight hump to
protrude. Allow crack filler to cure a minimum of four hours.
D. Elastomeric Coating Application: Apply to all exterior stucco.
1. Apply primer to chalky surfaces.
2. Apply material by brush or roller; spraying not allowed.
3. Dampen equipment prior to use.
4. Coat all other cracks with material using a brush. Brush material into cracks for
filling. Allow material to build up at enter, then featheredge away from center.
5. Apply one coat of elastomeric coating in a uniform manner moving in one direction
across the area. Utilize screen for rollers to prevent aggregate buildup and streaking
from roller marks.
6. Allow full curing time as recommended by the manufacturer. Protect material from
weather during the curing period.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Elastomeric Coating
09800-3 96013
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
-.-v 1 AC..--.*
/-
YAK I 1 - kitNtKAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
DESCRIPTION
Extent of painting work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified.
Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces
throughout project, except as otherwise indicated.
Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming
and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.
Work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces
of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise
indicated.
“Paint” as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions,
enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime,
intermediate or finish coats.
Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as
a surface not to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated
in “schedules”. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same
as similar adjacent materials or areas. Architect will select colors or finishes.
Following categories of work are not included as part of field-applied finish work.
1. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when
factory-finishing or installer-finishing is specified for such items.
2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on
surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible
areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, pipe spaces, and shafts.
./-
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Painting
09900-I 96013
3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless othetise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized
aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished
materials will not require finish painting.
4. Operating Parts: Unless othewise indicated, moving parts of operating units,
mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages,
sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan.shafts will not require finish painting.
H. Following categeries of work are included under other sections of these specifications:
1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is
included under various sections for metal fabrication, metal doors and frames, and
similar items.
2. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as
architectural woodwork, wood casework, and shop-fabricated or factory-built
mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories is included under other sections
of these specifications.
-I. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters’ Laboratories and
Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or
nomenclature plates.
1.03 SUBMIll-ALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Manufacturer’s Data:
1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this
Section.
2. Manufacturers’ specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance
with the specified requirements.
3. For information only, submit two copies of manufacturer’s specifications and
application instructions for each material.
C. Samples: Following the selection of colors and glosses by the Architect, submit samples
for the Architect’s review of color and texture only Provide a listing of material and
application for each coat of each finish sample.
1. On 12” x 12” hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material, with texture
to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by Architect until
acceptable sheen, color, and texture is achieved.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Painting
09900-2 96013
2. On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4” x 8” samples of natural and stained finish.
Label and identify each as to location and application.
F-
3. On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building components,
duplicate painted finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on
at least 100 sq. ft. of surface, as directed, until required sheen, coior and texture is
obtained; simulate finished lighting conditioning for review of in-place work.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Environmental Protection: Provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of
the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and local Air Pollution Control District. Notify
the Architect of any paint specified herein which fails to conform to the Air Quality
Management District Rules for the location of this project. In localities where the
specified coating or paint is prohibited, the Architect may direct the substitution of
acceptable coating systems.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by
same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer,
and use only within recommended limits.
C. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime
paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various
substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of
finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.
r D. The number of colors to be used in any given room or space shall be determined by the
Architect but will not exceed three.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new, and unopened containers bearing the
manufacturer’s name and label.
C. Provide proper storage to prevent damage to, and deterioration of, paint materials.
D. Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during, and after
installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades.
E. In the event of damage, immediately make ail repairs and replacements necessary to the
approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. t
,-
20 October 1997 Painting
Carlsbad City Library 09900-3 96013
1.06
A.
B.
1.07
A.
8.
1.05
A.
SITE CONDITIONS
Surface Temperatures: Do not apply solvent-thinned paints when the temperature of
surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperature are below 45 degrees F,
unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
Weather Conditions: Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity
exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces. Applications may be continued during
inclement weather within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
MAINTENANCE
Amount: Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Owner an extra stock
equaling 10% of each color, type, and gloss of paint used on the Work, but not more than
five gallons for each.
Packaging: Tightly seal each container and clearly label with the contents and location
used.
WARRANTY
Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver
to the Architect two copies of a Warranty signed by the Contractor and cosigned by the
subcontractor for the work of this Section, agreeing to replace and reinstall all work of this
section found defective in material or workmanship within a period of two years from date
of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
MATERIALS
Principal paint materials, unless othewise indicated, shall be as manufactured by Sinclair
Paint Company, Dunn-Edwards Corp., or approved equal.
Colors and Glosses: The Architect will be the sole judge of acceptability of the various
glosses obtained from the materials proposed to be used in the Work.
Undercoats and Thinners: Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer
as the finish coat. Use only the thinners recommended by the paint manufacturer, and
use only to the recommenced limits. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat,
and thinner material as parts of a unified system of paint finish.
Elastomeric Coating: Specified in Section 09800.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Painting
09900-4 96013
2.02
*- A.
B.
2.03 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation of the work of this Section, shall be new first-quality of their respective kinds,
and as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
For application of the approved paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for
application of the particular paint by the manufacturer of the particular paint.
Compatibility: Prior to actual use of application equipment, use all means necessary to
verify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible with the material to be applied
and that the integrity of the finish will not be jeopardized by use of the proposed
application equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.03
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Inspection: Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed
work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence. Verify that painting may be completed in strict
accordance with the original design and with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Discrepancies: Do not proceed in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have
been fully resolved.
MATERIALS PREPARATION
Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers.
Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition,
free from foreign materials and residue.
Stirring: Stir all materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and
as required during the application of materials. Do not stir into the material any film
which may form on the surface. Remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material
before using.
SURFACE PREPARATION
Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint
manufacturer’s recommendations.
,/-’
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Painting
09900-5 96013
8.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Remove all removable items which are in place and are not scheduled to receive paint
finish, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting
operations.
Following completion of painting in each space or area, reinstall the removed items by
using workmen skilled in the necessary trades.
Clean each surface to be painted prior to applying paint or surface treatment. .
Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents of low toxicity and a flash
point in excess of 100 degrees F, (38 degrees C) prior to start of mechanical cleaning.
Schedule the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall onto wet newly painted surfaces.
Preparation of Metal Surfaces:
1. Thoroughly clean all surfaces until they are completely free from dirt, oil, and
grease. Clean cutting oil from exposed pipes.
2. On galvanized surfaces, use solvent for the initial cleaning and then treat the surface
thoroughly with phosphoric acid etch. Remove all etching solution before
proceeding.
3. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint.
4. Apply primer the same day pretreatment is applied.
PAINT APPLICATION
On all removable panels and all hinged panels, paint the back sides to match the
exposed sides.
Apply one heavy coat of flat black paint on ail construction visible through screen vents
and grilles.
Drying: Allow sufficient drying time between coats. Modify the period as recommended
by the material manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions.
Brush and Roller Application: Apply all coats onto the surfaces in an even film.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush or roller marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other
surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
Spray Application: Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the
equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Do not double back with spray equipment for
the purpose of building up film thickness of two coats in one pass.
20 October 1997 Painting
Carlsbad City Library 09900-6 96013
i-
F. Completed work shall match the approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage.
Remove, refinish, or repaint all work not in compliance with specified requirements.
3.05 PAINTING SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR
Sinclair
A. Flat Finish:
1. Galvanized Metal:
Pretreat: 7113 Vinyl Wash
1st Coat: 14 Corro Prime
2nd Coat: 1300 Stuc-O-Life
3rd Coat: 1300 Stuc-O-Life
2. Concrete:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
36 Uni-Poxy
1300 Stuc-O-Life
1300 Stuc-O-Life
B. Semi-Gloss Finish:
1. Galvanized Metal:
Pretreat:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
7113 Vinyl Wash
14 Corro Prime
4800 Aqua Sash
4800 Aqua Sash
2. Ferrous Metal:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
15 Red Oxide Primer
14 Corro Prime
4800 Aqua Sash
3.. Wood:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
248 Sash & Trim
Primer
4800 Aqua Sash
4800 Aqua Sash
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Painting
09900-7
Dunn-Edwards
QD 43-7 Galv-Alum
W 701 Evershield
W 701 Ever-shield
W 709 Eff-Stop
W 701 Evershield
W 701 Ever-shield
QD 43-7 Galv. Alum.
W 901 Permasheen
W 901 Permasheen
43-5 Corrobar
W 901 Permasheen
W 901 Permasheen
W 708 E-Z Prime
W 901 Permasheen
W 901 Permasheen
96013
3.06 PAINTING SCHEDULE - INTERIOR
A. Flat Finish:
1. Gypsum Board:
1st Coat: 895 X-Tra Seal
2nd Coat: 1700 Sinwall
3rd coat: 1700 Sinwall
2. Wood:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
22 Aqua Prime
1700 Sinwall
1700 Sinwall
3. Ferrous Metal:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
34 Corro-Tee
34 Corro-Tee
1700 Sinwall
4. Galvanired Metal:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
49 Prime-X
1700 Sinwall
1700 Sinwall
W 101 Vinylastic
W 401 Decovel
W 401 Decovel
W 707 Unikote
W 401 Decovel
W 401 Decovel
43-5 Corrobar
W 401 Decovel
W 401 Decovel
42-44 Versaprime
W 401 Decovel
W 401 Decovel
B. Eggshell Enamel Finish:
1. Gypsum Board:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
1770 Pigmented PVA
Sealer
1790 Aqua Coater
3000 Aquasuede
W 101 Vinylastic
W 440 Decosheen
W 440 Decosheen
2. Wood:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
22 Aqua Prime
3000 Aquasuede
3000 Aquasuede
W 707 Unikote
W 440 Decosheen
W 440 Decosheen
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Painting
09900-8 96013
3. Ferrous Metal:
r-
1st Coat: 34 Corro-Tee
2nd Coat: 34 Corrotec
3rd Coat: 3000 Aquasuede
4. Galvanized Metal:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
49 Primex
3000 Aquasuede
3000 Aquasuede
C. Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish:
1. Gypsum Board:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
895 X-Tra Seal
1790 Aqua Coater
4000 Aqua Satin
2. Wood:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
22 Aqua Primer
Undercoater
1400 Since Satin II
1400 Since Satin II
3. Ferrous Metal:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
34 Corro-Tee
34 Corro-Tee
1400 Since Satin II
4. Galvanized Metal:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
49 Prime-X
1400 Since Satin II
1400 Since Satin II
D. Gloss Enamel Finish:
1. Gypsum Board:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
895 X-Tra Seal
22 Aqua Primer
Undercoater
1600 Since Gloss II
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Painting
09900-9
43-5 Corrobar
W 440 Decosheen
W 440 Decosheen
42-44 Versaprime
W 440 Decosheen
W 440 Decosheen
W 101 Vinylastic
W450 Decoglo
W450 Decoglo
W707 Unikote
W 450 Decoglo
W 450 Decoglo
43-5 Corrobar
W 450 Decoglo
W 450 Decoglo
42-5 Versaprime
W 450 Decoglo
W 450 Decoglo
W 101 Vinylastic
W 960 Permagloss
W 960 Permagloss
96013
2. Wood:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
3. Ferrous Metal:
1st Coat:
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
4. Galvanized Metal:
1st Coat: 49 Prime-X
2nd Coat: 1600 Since Gloss II
3rd Coat: 1600 Since Gloss II
- E. Stained Wood Finish:
1. Stained Finish:
1st Coat:
Filler
2nd Coat:
3rd Coat:
4th Coat:
20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
22 Aqua Primer
Undercoater
1600 Since Gloss II
1600 Since Gloss II
34 Corro-Tee
34 Corro-Tee
1600 Since Gloss II
2640 Lac-O-Rite
50 Paste Wood
Filler
2600 Sanding
Sealer
2602 Semi-Gloss
2602 Semi-Gloss
END OF SECTION
Painting
09900-l 0
W 707 Unikote
W 960 Permagloss
W 960 Permagloss
43-5 Corrobar
W 960 Permagloss
W 960 Permagloss
42-44 Versaprime
W 960 Permagloss
W 960 Permagloss
LW 120 Stain
8-9 Paste Wood
Filler
E LQ 101
Decolac
E 1Q 104
Decolac
E 1Q 104
Decolac
96013
SECTION 09950
WALL COVERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
.-
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section,
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
4. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
5. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
a. Submit full width samples of each type of wallcovering, illustrating range of color
and pattern variation; submit sets of sample moldings.
6. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s printed instructions for
maintenance of installed work, including precautions for use of cleaning materials
which could damage wall covering.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Manufacturer: Provide each type of wallcovering as produced by a single manufacturer,
including recommended primers, adhesives, and sealants.
20 October 1997 Wall Covering
Carlsbad City Library 09950-l 96013
C.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
1.06
A.
B.
Installer: A firm specializing in wallcovering work with not less than three years of
experience in installing wallcoverings similar to those required for this project.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Deliver materials to project site in original packages or containers clearly labeled to identify manufaoturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification.
Store materials in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not store rolled goods
in upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40°F (4°C).
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Schedule installation with other construction activities to minimize the possibility of
damage and soiling during the remainder of the construction period.
MAINTENANCE
Deliver to the Owner for his use in future modifications an extra stock of 30 linear feet
of each color and pattern from the same production run in each material installed under
this Section, packaging each type of material separately, distinctly marked, and
adequately protected against deterioration.
SITE CONDITIONS
Maintain constant minimum temperature 0fSOOF (16°C) at areas of installation for at least
72 hours before and 48 hours after application of materials.
Illuminate areas of installation using building’s permanent lighting system; temporary
lighting alone will not be acceptable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Wallcovering: Fed. Spec. CC-W-408, 20 oz., B.F. Goodrich General Products, or
approved equal. Colors and patterns to be selected by the Architect.
B. Adhesive: Heavy duty strippable premixed vinyl adhesive as recommended by
wallcovering manufacturer.
C. Primer-sealer, if required: same as adhesive, refer to manufacturer’s printed instructions.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
20 October 1997 Wall Covering Carlsbad City Library 09950-2 96013
PAK I
7- 3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F. f--
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
- - -- - -.a--* ._.A.. 3 - tXtGU I IUN
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Gypsum Drywall:
1. Nails and screws shall be recessed.
2. Joints and screw depressions shall be taped and floated.
3. Surface shall be sanded, dusted, and primed with one coat of primer-sealer.
Complete all other work that penetrates the substrate before beginning wall covering
installation.
Remove switch plates, wall plates, and surface-mounted fixtures in areas where wall
covering is to be applied.
Test substrate with electronic moisture meter to verify that surfaces to be covered do not
exceed moisture content permitted by the manufacturer.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design and the
manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Install each roll in sequence starting from the highest to lowest number and each strip
in the same sequence as cut from the roll. If pattern is not random, examine for repeat
design. Some patterns should be lined up, matched, or reversed for best results.
Apply adhesive to back of wall covering and place in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions. Install seams plumb, and at least 6” away from comers. Always bring
material 6” around inside and outside corners being sure to fit into comers to avoid
bridging or spanning. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Overlap seams and
double-cut to assure tight closure. Roll, brush, or use broad knife to remove air bubbles,
wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. Cut wall covering evenly to edges of outlet boxes
or support.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Wall Covering
09950-3 96013
E. Trim selvages as required to assure color uniformity and pattern match.
F. Remove excess adhesive along finished seams while it is still wet using warm water and
clean sponge, and wipe dry. Use of clean warm water, a natural sponge, and clean
towels is recommended. change water often to maintain water cleanliness.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Replace removed plates and fixtures; verify cut edges of wall coverings are completely
concealed.
B. Vinyl Wallcovering: Remove excess adhesive along finished seams and perimeter edges
while still wet using warm water and a clean sponge; wipe dry.
C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wall covering installation
upon completion of work, and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition.
D. Protection: Provide protective methods and materials needed to ensure that
wallcoverings will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Wall Covering
09950-4 96013
SECTION 10005
KEY LOCK BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lock Box: Knox Box Model No. 3200R for recessed mounting, black, with tamper switch,
contacts for alarm system interface, and aluminized to resist salt air corrosion.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturers
recommended installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
,--- 20 October 1997
Cat&bad City Library
Key Lock Boxes
10005-l 96013
F
SECTION 10100
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997 Visual Display Boards
Carlsbad City Library 10100-1 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Greensteel, Inc., Best-Rite Chalkboard Co., Claridge Products and
Equipment, Inc., or approved equal.
B. Marker Boards:
1. Construction: 24 gage face sheet over particleboard.
2. Color: Match Greensteel DMB7 White.
C. Tackboards:
1. Construction: l/4” cork laminated to l/4” fiberboard.
2. Color: Match Greensteel GlO Tan.
3. Framing Materials:
a. Finish: clear anodized satin aluminum finish.
b. Trim: No chalkrail or display rail
4. Mounting: Aluminum hanger bar and clips, match Greensteel AZ Series
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
20 October 1997 Visual Display Boards
Carlsbad City Library 10100-2 96013
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Visual Display Boards
10100-3 96013
SECTION 10155
TOILET PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturers specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colons and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
.-
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Toilet Partitions
10155-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Toilet Partitions: Floor mounted, solid phenolic core, Duraline Series 1180, by Bobrick
Washroom Equipment, Inc., or approved equal. Color to be selected by the Architect.
B. Pilaster Shoes: AISI Type 3021304, 20gage stainless steel, 3” high, finish to match
hardware. Furnish shoes at each pilaster.
C. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturers standard, non-ferrous alloy with satin chrome finish.
D. Hardware and Fittings:
1. Stainless steel, ASTM A167, Type 302/304, satin finish.
2. ‘Zamac” alloy and cast aluminum hardware are unacceptable.
2. No door hardware or mounting brackets shall be exposed on exterior of compart-
ments except for outswinging doors.
E. Fasteners: Stainless steel, with factory installed threaded steel inserts for mounting
hardware.
F. Door Hardware:
1. Hinge: Self-lubricating, gravity return movement, adjustable to hold door open at any
angle up to 90”.
2. Latch: Combination rubber faced door strike and keeper, equipped with emergency
access.
3. Coat Hook: combination unit with hook and rubber tipped pin.
4. Door Pull: Outswing door type.
5. Provide closer on handicapped stalls.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
20 October 1997 Toilet Partitions
Carlsbad City Library 10155-2 96013
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
C. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb and level in accordance with manufacturers printed
instructions.
D. Hardware Adjustments: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation after
installation.
1. Set hinges on in-swing doors to hold doors open approximately 30 deg from the
closed position when unlatched.
2. Set hinges on out-swing doors to return to fully closed position.
3.03 CLEANING AND FINAL ADJUSTMENTS
A. Perform final adjustments to leveling devices, door hardware, and other operating parts.
Clean exposed surfaces and touch up minor finish imperfections using materials and
methods recommended by partition manufacturer.
B. Replace damaged units which cannot be satisfactorily field repaired, as directed by
Architect.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Toilet Partitions
10155-3 96013
SECTION 10200
METAL WALL LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
r 20 October 1997 Metal Wall Louvers
Carlsbad City Library 10200-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fixed Louvers: High performance fixed drainable louver, Model No. 4097, Kynar enamel
finish, by Construction Specialties, Inc., or approved equal. Color to be selected by the
Architect.
B. Linear Grilles: 6/S Linear Grilles, by Construction Specialties, Inc., Kynar enamel finish,
or approved equal. Color to be selected by the Architect.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
3.03
A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly
into position.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
Clean surfaces of louvers and adjacent structure.
Repair any damage to louvers to match original, or replace.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
Metal Wall Louvers
10200-2 96013
SECTION 10270
ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
B.
C.
D.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
4. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
5. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing complete layout of access flooring based
on field verified dimensions; include dimensional relationships to adjoining work. Include
full size details, with descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes, fasteners, typical and
special edge conditions, accessories, understructure and other data to permit a full
evaluation of entire access flooring system.
Certification and Test Data: Submit manufacturers certification including supporting
laboratory test data that access flooring provided complies with indicated performance
requirements.
Calculations for Seismic Force Resistance: Submit manufacturer’s calculations verifying
ability of access floor system to resist seismic forces indicated.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Access Flooring
10270-I 96013
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The removable free access, floating floor system consists of an assembly of panels
mounted on adjustable pedestals to provide an underfloor space for the accommodation
of electrical conduit.
1. Floor Loads:
a. Flooring shall be capable of supporting a uniform live load minimum of 300
pounds per square foot with a maximum deflection of 0.040” and with permanent
set not greater than 0.010”.
b. Panels, in place, shall be capable of supporting a 1000 pound concentrated load
placed on one square inch at any location on the panel without deflecting more
than 0.080” and without permanent deformation in excess of 0.010”.
C. Ultimate Load: 3,500 Ibs. minimum at weakest point.
d. Rolling Load: Panels shall withstand a rolling load of 1,200 Ibs. applied through
a 3” dia. x l-l 3/l 6” wide phenolic caster for 10 cycles. Panels shall withstand
a rolling load of 800 Ibs. applied through a 6” dia. x l-12” wide hard ruber-
surfaced wheel for 10,000 cycles over the same path with no damage to the
panel surface. Permanent set at the conclusion of the test shall not exceed
.020”.
e. Impact Load: 100 lb. load dropped from 36” onto a one inch square indentor
shall not cause system failure.
2. The floor system shall be laterally stable to withstand a siesmic event in all directions
whether or not panels are in place.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Installer Qualifications: Firm who is approved by access flooring manufacturer and who
has successfully installed access flooring systems of a scope similar to this project.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
Codes and Reference Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and
regulations, comply with the following:
1. NFPA Standard: Provide access flooring which, when installed, complies with
requirements of NFPA No. 75 for raised floors, unless otherwise indicated.
20 October 1997 Access Flooring
Carlsbad City Library 10270-2 96013
2. ICBO Research Report No. 2281.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: “Tee-Crete II”, by C-TEC, Inc., or approved equal
B. Field Panels: Provide manufacturer’s standard 24 inch square units of construction
indicated below:
1. Lightweight-Concrete-Filled Steel Pan Panels: Fabricate panels with die-formed
electrolytic, zinc-coated steel bottom pan filled with lightweight concrete which is
reinforced and bonded to pan by shear ties.
a. Size and Squareness: Plus or minus 0.015 inch of required size, with a
squareness tolerance of plus or minus 0.015 inch.
b. Flatness: Plus or minus 0.020 inch measured on a diagonal on top of panel.
C. Pedestals: Manufacturers standard, adjustable, with round or square base and type of
head indicated.
a. Head: Of proper type for grid system indicated.
b. Height: 12” unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stringer Systems: Manufacturer’s standard steel modular stringer system interlocking
with pedestal heads to form a grid pattern with member under each edge of each floor
panel, as indicated.
1. Bolted Grid: Stringers screw-fastened to pedestal heads.
E. Finish: Carpet to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standards.
F. Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard units as follows:
1. Cutouts for cabled openings with plastic edging and foam rubber and service outlets,
if any, complying with following requirements:
a. Trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer’s standard plastic molding with tapered
top flange.
b. Fit cutouts with manufacturer’s standard grommets in sizes indicated or for
cutouts too large for grommets, trim edge with plastic molding indicated above.
20 October 1997 Access Flooring
Carlsbad City Library 10270-3 96013
C. Seal annular space formed in cutouts by cables with foam rubber pads; use
edge trim profile which provides support for pad.
2. Service Outlets: Manufacturers standard assemblies for recessed mounting flush
with top of floor panels and complying with requirements indicated for cover and box
type, location, receptacle characteristics, and wiring method.
3. Panel lifting devices to suit panel floor covering indicated.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3.- EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
B.
C.
D.
E.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Install floor system and accessories under supervision of the manufacturer’s authorized
representative to ensure rigid, firm installation free of vibration, rocking, rattles, squeaks,
and other unacceptable performance.
Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at the floor perimeter to
a minimum. Scribe panel assemblies at perimeter to provide a close fit with no voids
greater than l/8” where panels abut vertical surfaces.
Locate each pedestal and complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum
clean the subfloor of all dust, dirt and construction debris before starting installation. Set
pedestals in adhesive as recommended by the floor manufacturer to provide full bearing
of the pedestal base on the subfloor.
Secure grid members to pedestal heads in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
20 October 1997 Access Flooring Carlsbad City Library 10270-4 96013
F. Thoroughly vacuum clean the subfloor area as installation of floor panels proceeds.
Extend cleaning under installed panels as far as possible.
G. Cutting and trimming or other dirt or debris producing operations will not be permitted in
the rooms where the floor is being installed.
H. Perform cutting and trimming or other dirt or debris producing operations as remotely as
possible from installation area and in manner to prevent contamination of subfloor
surfaces under sections of access floor which already have been installed.
I. Level installed access floor to within 0.10” of true level over the entire area and within
0.0625” in any 10’ distance.
3.03 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND FINAL ADJUSTMENTS
A. After completion of installation, vacuum clean the entire floor system and cover with
continuous sheets of reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain and repair damages to
protective covering until directed to be removed by the Architect.
B. Replace access floor panels which are chipped, broken, stained, scratched, or otherwise
damaged, or do not conform to specified requirements.
3.04 EXTRA STOCK
A. Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish maintenance material matching
products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
appropriate labels.
B. Spare Panels and Pedestals: Provide five (5) spare nonperforated panels and pedestals.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Access Flooring
Carlsbad City Library 10270-5 96013
SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Flagpoles
10350-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Flagpole: Cone tapered seamless aluminum, spun aluminum collar, 40’-0” high, Bone
White Kynar enamel finish, with ball top ornament finished to match pole, by American
Flagpole, Morgan-Francis Co., EMC, or approved equal. Provide 6’ x 10’ American flag.
B. Base: Provide manufacturers standard base and anchorage system for type of flagpole
installation required, including necessary brackets and bracing.
C. Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard to suit size and type of pole, as follows:
1. Finial ball.
2. Double-truck.
3. Two 9” cleats.
4. Two continuous halyards of braided nylon with steel or bronze core, with 2 swivel
snaps on each.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Flagpoles
10350-2 96013
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Flagpoles
10350-3 96013
SECTION 10410
DISPLAY CASES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
20 October 1997 Display Cases
Carlsbad City Library 10410-1 96013
A. Manufacturers: Poblocki & Sons, Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc., or approved
equal. To establish quality and quantities, products of Poblocki & Sons are described.
B. Type A:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Locking Poster Case: Model B, Poblocki & Sons.
Construction: complete case.
Usage: Exterior.
Mounting: Recessed, with face flush to stucco finish.
Dimensions: Two at 24” W x 40”H masonry opening, and two at 32”W x 56”H
masonry opening. Field verify all openings.
Door Swing: Left hinged.
Doors: Side hinged, glass with metal frame.
Glazing: l/4” thick, clear tempered.
Finish: Acrylic polyurethane, to match color of steel window sash.
10. Background: Black painted cork tackable surface.
C. Type B:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Locking Poster Case: Model B, Poblocki & Sons.
Construction: Complete case.
Usage: Interior.
Mounting: Recessed, with finish wood framing per casework detail.
Dimensions: Refer to casework details. Field verify all openings.
Door Swing: Sliding.
Doors: Regular sliding doors with ratchet lock.
Glazing: l/4” thick, clear tempered.
Finish: Acrylic polyurethane, to match color of steel window sash.
Background: l/4” natural cork.
20 October 1997 Display Cases
Carlsbad City Library 10410-2 96013
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
,- A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Display Cases
Carlsbad City Library 1041 o-3 96013
SECTION 10425
SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following: .
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections. Include plans,
elevations, and large scale sections of typical members and other components.
a. Provide message list for each sign required, including large scale details of
wording and lettering layout.
b. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other
anchors to be installed as a unit of work in other sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of
color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with
requirements indicated.
1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture:
a. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturers color charts consisting
of actual sections of material including the full range of colons available for each
material required.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Signs
10425-l 96013
b. Aluminum: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6-inch long sections of
extrusions and not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate, showing the full
range of colors available.
2. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with
requirements indicated.
a. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Provide a sample panel not less than
8-l/2 inches by 11 inches for each material, color, texture, and pattern required.
On each panel include a representative sample of the graphic image process
required, showing graphic style, and colors and finishes of letters, numbers, and
other graphic devices.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
-B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
C. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those
indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and
sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the
work.
D. Single Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from
one source of a single manufacturer.
E. Design concept: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. sign units by other
manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not
change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof is on the
proposer.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer: ASI Sign Systems, Inc., or approved equal.
2.02 INTERIOR PANEL SIGNS
A. Panel Signs: ASI lnhouse Series with tactile letters and Grade 2 braille.
20 October 1997 Signs
Carlsbad City Library 10425-2 96013
B. Cutout Letters and Numbers: ASI LPP Series cut acrylic letters.
F~ 2.03 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS FOR BUILDING EXTERIOR
A. Fabricated Aluminum Letters: Form individual letters and numbers by fabrication.
Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp comers, and precisely formed lines and
profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Weld aluminum angle lugs
into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with
requirements indicated on drawings for finish, style, and size.
2.04 FINISHES
A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of
materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related
to appearance, provide color matches, as selected by the Architect from the
manufacturer’s standards.
B. Aluminum Finishes: Class II Clear Anodized Fine Satin Finish, AA-M31 C21A31.
2.05 SIGNAGE TYPES
A. Type A: Cut aluminum letters, clear anodized, mount on studs to solid blocking in framed
walls, set in epoxy at concrete masonry walls.
B. Type B: Clear dot fuse embedded acrylic tactile signs. Sign format and size as
scheduled, surface mount per Section 1117B.5.
C. Type C: Transfer sheet vinyl letters, on back side of glass where indicated.
D. Type D: Acrylic signage for sanitary facilities surface mount per Section 1115B.
E. Type E: Similar to Type B format “A” graphics, automotive paint on anodized aluminum.
F. Type F: Accessible parking sign per Section 1129B. Refer to site plan. Automotive
paint on anodized aluminum. Mount bottom edge of parking signs 36” above grade on
galvanized l-112” dia. pipe. Additional message “Van Accessible” at one location.
2.06 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
20 October 1997 Signs
Carlsbad City Library 10425-3 96013
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturers recommended installation procedures.
C. Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type
described.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion or other defects in appearance.
- D. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods
indicated below.
1. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign
manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use
double-sided vinyl tape where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold the
sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured.
2. Where signs must be surface-mounted to glazing, provide a black acrylic transfer
sheet at opposite side of glass.
E. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening
methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall
construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to
establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners,
1. Flush Mounting: Mount letters with backs in contact with the wall surface.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Signs
104254 96013
SECTION 10520
FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: J.L. Industries, Larsen’s Manufacturing Company, or approved equal.
20 October 1997 Fire Fighting Equipment
Carlsbad City Library 10520-l 96013
B. Fire Extinguishers: Multi-purpose dry chemical type, Type 2A-l O-BC, 5 pounds capacity,
in enameled steel container.
C. Semi-Recessed Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:
1. Manufacturers standard enameled steel box with trim, frame, door and hardware to
suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
2. Door: “Dug panel.
3. Baked enamel finish, including cleaning and pretreatment, 2 coats baked enamel
finish over shop prime coat and thermosetting top coat.
4. Provide fire rated lining at units located in rated partitions.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, the
manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures and as directed by the Fire Marshal.
Provide approved identification to meet Fire Marshal requirements.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Fire Fighting Equipment
10520-2 96013
SECTION 10650
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
C. Acoustical Certification from an independent testing agency stating that product and
materials furnished comply with specified requirements. Include certified laboratory
testing data indicating that panels and materials meet specified test requirements.
Include STC ratings and square foot weight of panel.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
20 October 1997 Operable Partitions
Carlsbad City Library 10650-l 96013
C. Sound Transmission Requirements: Operable partition assembly tested in a full-scale
opening (14 feet by 9 feet) for laboratory sound transmission loss performance in
accordance with ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413 and rated for a STC plus or
minus 1 as indicated:
1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 38.
D. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide operable partitions with Class A surface
burning characteristics, as determined by testing assembled materials composed of
surface coverings, backings, and other construction identical to those required in this
section, per ASTM E 84, by a testing organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Modemfold, Inc., Advanced Equipment Corp., or approved equal. To
establish quality and quantities, the products of Modemfold, Inc. are described.
B. Operable Partitions: Modemfold ‘Acousti-Seal” Model 935, bi-parting sliding doors.
B. Panel Face Sheets: Top reinforcing as required to support suspension components.
Internal insulation as required to achieve specified acoustical rating.
1. Panel skins shall be gypsum board, ready for field painting.
2. Panel Thickness: 3 inches.
3. Panel Weight: As determined by panel construction, surface covering, and
accessories.
C. Carriers: Two steel carriers with four steel-tired ball bearing wheels at each
panel/segment.
D. Suspension Tracks: Heavy-duty steel, with overhead supports of adjustable steel hanger
rods; heavy-duty, ball-bearing, trolley system supports specifically designed for use with
size and type operable partition assembly indicated. Track deflection independent of
structural support system no more than 11360th of opening width.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
20 October 1997 Operable Partitions Carlsbad City Library 10650-2 96013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.?- 3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C. Install operable partitions and accessories in compliance with ASTM E 557.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
.c A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly
into position for long life under hard use.
Upon completion of the installation, inspect each component.
1. Verify that each item has been fabricated and installed in accordance with the
specified requirements.
2. Make necessary adjustments.
3. Touchup as necessary to make surface blemishes permanently invisible to the
unaided eye from a distance of five feet.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Operable Partitions
10650-3 96013
SECTION 10700
MOTORIZED LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997 Motorized Louvers
Carlsbad City Library 10700-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Motorized Louvers: Skyshield Skylight Blind, Model No. 88, by Skyshield Products, Inc.,
DelRay Beach, FL (800) 962-7253, or approved equal, full black-out louvers with
perimeter black-out frame, motorized with with manual switching, consisting of rack arm
mechanisms, tilting devices, slats, and mountings.
1. Finish: Clear satin anodized aluminum.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Motorized Louvers
10700-2 96013
SECTION 10750
TELEPHONE SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer‘s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers,
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Telephone Specialties
10750-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Acoustics Development Corp., American Specialties, Inc., or approved
equal. To establish quality and quantities, products of Acoustics Development Corp. are
described.
B. Telephone Encksure: Series No. 20, wall mounted recessed panel housing, with writing
shelf, No. 4 satin finish stainless steel, by Acoustics Development Corp.
2.02
A.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Telephone Specialties
10750-2 96013
SECTION 10800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
-1-- 1 --..--.. YAK I
1 .Ol
A.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.05
A.
1 - GtNtKAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section shall include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Submit manufacturer’s catalog and data sheets, parts list, and installation requirements
for each accessory item specified.
Submit maintenance, operating instructions and keys required for each type of equipment
and lock.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Deliver items in manufacturer’s original unopened protective packaging.
Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage, or
wetting.
Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces.
Maintain protective covers on all units until installation is complete. Remove covers at
final clean-up of installation.
GUARANTEE
Mirrors shall be guaranteed for 15 years against silver spoilage. Accessories guaranteed
to be free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of one year.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Toilet Accessories
10800-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co., or approved equal, as follows:
1.
2.
2A.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
9A.
9B.
9c.
9D.
9E.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B-5805 Series, one piece grab bar, l-1/4” dia., 36” x 54”, satin finish, snap
flange.
(toilet partitions, Section 10155)
(urinal screens, Section 10155)
B-31 90, paper towel dispenser, recessed.
B-43500, recessed sanitary napkin/tampon dispenser, 10 cents, “Contura”
Series.
B-43944, paper towel amd waste receptacle, 16 gal. capacity, recessed,
“Contura” Series.
B-8221, counter top mounted soap dispenser, 4” spout.
B-290, stainless steel welded frame mirror.
(toilet partitions, Section 10155)
B-3579, combination toilet tissue/seat cover dispenser/napkin disposal, surface
mounted (Women).
B-3479, Combination toilet tissue/seat cover dispenser, surface mounted (Men).
B-347, Combination toilet tissue/seatcover dispenser centered in parttion for two
compartments (Men).
B-357, Combination toilet tissue/seatcover dispenser/napkin disposal centered
in parttion for two compartments (Women).
B-3474, toilet tissue/seat cover dispenser, recessed (Men).
B-3574, toilet tissue/seat cover dispenser, napkin disposal, recessed (Women).
B-51 81, phenolic folding shower seat.
(service sink, Div. 15)
(floor drain, Div. 15)
B-224, mop rack with shelf 36” long, stainless steel.
20 October 1997 Toilet Accessories
Carlsbad City Library 10800-2 96013
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
B-683, stainless steel shelf (Shower Room).
B-4063, recessed soap dispenser “Contura” Series.
(pipe insulation, Div. 15)
(2” ceramic tile, Section 09330)
B-212, hook and bumper.
Folding Changing Table, Koala Bear Kare Changing Station, horizontal design.
B-672, double robe hook, stainless steel.
B-6047, extra heavy duty stainless steel curtain rod, with:
B-204-1 stainless steel hooks
B-204-2 vinyl shower curtain
B-60, soap dispenser, translucent plastic.
(shower head, Div. 15)
(controls, Div. 15)
B-58616.99, one piece grab bar (shower) 24” x 36”, peened grip, snap flange.
Teledyne Water Pik, 60” flexible shower hose
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
1. Check wall opening for correct dimensions, plumbness of blocking or frames, and
other preparation that would affect installation of accessories.
2. Check areas to receive surface mounted units for conditions that would affect quality
and execution of work.
3. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures that would affect installation of accessories.
20 October 1997 Toilet Accessories
Carlsbad City Library 10800-3 96013
8. Commencement Of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturers recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly
into position for long life under hard use.
C. Install accessories at locations and heights indicated, level and plumb. Installation
methods shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. All exposed
fasteners to be tamperproof. Finish of exposed fasteners to match items secured.
D. Install manufacturers recommended anchor system for all grab bars.
E. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting and filing on adjacent finishes.
F. Fit flanges of accessories snug to wall surfaces. Provide for calking in gaps between 90
deg. return flanges and finish wall surface after accessories are installed.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust accessories for proper operation.
B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces prior to final inspection.
C. Deliver accessories schedule, keys and parts manual as part of project close-out
documents. For Owner’s permanent records, provide two sets of the following items of
manufacturer’s literature:
1. Technical data sheets of each item used for the project.
2. Service and parts manuals.
3. Name of local representative to be contacted in the event of need of field service or
consultation.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Toilet Accessories
108004 96013
SECTION 11026
WALL SAFES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wall Safes: Model Bl317, by Allied Safe and Vault Co., Inc., or approved equal. Net
inside dimensions of safe shall be 12-l/4” wide x 15” deep x 12” high.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Wall Safes
11026-l 96013
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
-A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, and the manufacturers recommended installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Wall Safes
11026-2 96013
SECTION 11050
LIBRARY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturers recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Samples: 6” x 6” samples of each exposed finish required.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain library equipment from a single manufacturer for
entire project.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Book Depository:
1. Locking Book Depository: Model No. 1112SD, by Mosler, Inc., or approved equal.
20 October 1997 Library Equipment
Carlsbad City Library 11050-l 96013
2. Locking Video Depository: Model No. 1112SD, by Mosler, Inc., or equal.
3. Return: Model No. K-300, 47” H x 43” W.x 32” D, by Kingsley, Inc., or approved
equal
4. Fasteners: Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated steel, manufacturer’s standards and
sizes.
B. Book Security Bystem: 3M Model 3802 Dual Aisle Detection System with integral
electronics package and patron counter, by 3M Library Systems, St. Paul, MN (800) 328-
0067. Two aisles, 36” clear. Floor mounted system, wiring under floor. See Contractor
instructions for Model No. 3802 with Buried Cable.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A, Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.03
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section,
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Install book depository unit in wall construction at location indicated.
Book Security System to be installed by trained employees of the vendor. Contractor to
coordinate electrical and finish work per manufacturer’s recommendations.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
Adjust units after installation to ensure that units are level and that moving parts operate
freely and in manner intended.
20 October 1997 Library Equipment
Carlsbad City Library 11050-2 96013
B. Clean exposed surfaces and touch-up or replace damaged or marred finishes.
F-- 3.04 TRAINING
A. Training of library employees shall be provided by manufacturer at time of installation
without additional charge.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Library Equipment
11050-3 96013
PART
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
SECTION 11055
BOOK AND VIDEO RETURNS
1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997 Carlsbad City Library
Book and Video Returns
11055-I 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Book Returns: Model K-300 Curbside Book Return, 47” high;43” x 52” base, with self-
closing, fire deterrent book door, by Kingsley Library Equipment Co., or approved equal.
Color to be selected by the Architect.
B. Video Returns: -Model KVC-2000 video cassette return, 47” high, 24” x 24” base, by
Kingsley Library Equipment Co., or approved equal. Color to be selected by the
Architect.
2.02
A.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. ’
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.81
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section where directed in strict accordance with the original
design, the approved Shop Drawings, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation
procedures.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Book and Video Returns
11055-2 96013
YAK I - - -- 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications, installation instructions, and general
recommendations, including data which substantiates that materials comply with
requirements. Provide all equipment and accessories for a complete operating
performance stage.
Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis for
accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certifications that each fabric used in stage curtains
complies with requirements for flame resistance.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including plans, elevations, and detail sections
of typical rigging elements. Show anchors, hardware, operating equipment, and other
components included in manufacturer’s standard product.
Samples: Submit fabric manufacturer’s standard color card, together with 12” square
physical sample (any color) for each fabric required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than five years of successful
experience in fabrication and installation of stage curtains similar to those required for
this project.
Flame Resistance Requirements: Provide stage curtains which are certified to be flame
resistant in accordance with requirements of NFPA 701. Permanently attach label to
each curtain indicating whether curtain is permanently and inherently flame resistant, or
whether it will require retreatment after dry cleaning
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
SECTION 11061
STAGE RIGGING AND CURTAINS
f- 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Stage Rigging and Curtains
11061-I 96013
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cyclorama Setting - Rear Curtains and Valance Fabric:
1. Woven Cotton Velour: Napped fabric of 100% cotton: 54” width minimum; not less
than 40 backing ends per inch, 40 pile ends per inch, and 32 picks per inch; 640 pile
tufts per square inch. Heavy Weight Fabric weighing not less than 23 ounces per
linear yard before flameproofing, with pile height of approximately 125 mils.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following heavy weight
velour fabrics:
a. “Saluda”; Baxter-Kelicy Mills.
b. “Symphony”; Dazians, Inc.
C. “Memorable”; K&M Fabrics, Inc.
d. ‘Wilson”; Melfabco, Inc.
3. Colors: Match Architect’s samples.
B. Metal Products:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheet of commercial quality
complying with ASTM A 526, G60 zinc coating; 14 gage minimum thickness. (Paint
as noted above).
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength and
corrosion resistance, mill finish, ASTM B 221 for extrusions.
3. Supports, Clamps, and Anchors: Sheet steel in manufacturer’s standard gages.
galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 153, Class B.
4. Support Chain: Not less than 2/O welded link chain.
5. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard units, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
20 October 1997 Stage Rigging and Curtains
Carlsbad City Library 11061-2 96013
2.03 FABRICATION
F-- A. Cyclorama Setting:
1. Rear Curtains: Shall consist of four panels containing sufficient width to provide 50%
additional fullness, and shall be box pleated to heavy jute webbing at the top so that
when in operation all strain will be carried by the webbing with no pull on the fabric.
The webbing shall be of proper length to fit specified track, and set with #2
grommets 12” O.C. as a means of attaching to tile traverse track. Bottom hems shall
be not less than 6” deep with a separate interior fabric chain pocket with cadmium
plated jack chain weighing no less than one pound to three feet of chain. Stitch chain
pocket so chain rides 2-l above bottom edge of curtain. Provide 9” side hems on
leading edges, 24” side hems on offstage edges.
2. Valance: Shall consist of one panel containing sufficient width to provide 50%
additional fullness, and shall be box pleated to heavy jute webbing at the top.
Valance shall be constructed for tack-on installation without grommets or mounting
hardware. Provide 3” bottom hem.
B. Curtain Tracks:
1. Cyclorama Track: Back Curtain Track shall be Atlas Silk Model No. 300, Stagecraft
#1400, or approved equal, complete with all necessary components. Provide
continuous track for walk/draw operation. Track length as required for specified
curtains as shown on drawing.
7 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
PREPARATION
Furnish layouts for support beams, inserts, clips and other supports required to be
installed by other trades for support of tracks and battens.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
f- 20 October 1997 Stage Rigging and Curtains
Carlsbad City Library 11061-3 96013
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
C. Ceiling Mounted Track: Drill track at intervals not greater than manufacturer’s
recommended spacing and fasten either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-screws
or other devices which are secure and appropriate to substrate, and which will not
deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures.
D. Curtains:
1. Track Hung: Secure curtains to track carriers with track manufacturer’s special
heavy duty “S” hooks or snap hooks.
2. Tack-on: Secure Curtains to nailer in such a manner as to hide fasteners.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Stage Rigging and Curtains
11061-4 96013
SECTION 11132
PROJECTION SCREENS
/--
PART
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
1.04
A.
B.
1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
Provide projection screen as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer,
including necessary mounting brackets, accessories, fittings and fastenings.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed and ready for screen
installation. Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage and
installation.
20 October 1997 Projection Screens
Carlsbad City Library 11132-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Maufacturers: Stewart Filmscreen Corp., Torrance, CA (800) 762-4999, Da-Lite Screen
Company, Inc., Warsaw, IN (800) 622-3737, or approved equal.
B. Auditorium Room 128, Rear Projection Screen:
1. Manufacturer: Stewart Filmscreen Corp.
2. Model: Stewart Model A-B.
3. Size: Image lo’-0” wide x 7’6” high, with 6” black drop above image, black edges
at sides and black bottom batten.
4. Motor: Internal electric 120V AC 60HZ motor with low voltage switching and
adjustable front limit switching.
5. Case: Aluminum.
6. Finish: Paint exposed portion of case to match adjacent ceiling.
7. Mount: Recessed ceiling mount.
8. Screen: Stewart Filmscreen 200 (2.0 Gain), Seamless Rear Projection Screen.
C. Auditorium Room 128, Front Projection Screen:
1. Manufacturer: Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc.
2. Model: Director Electrol.
3. Size: Image 1 O’-0” wide x lo’-0” high, with 12” black drop above image.
4. Motor: Internal electric 120V AC 60HZ motor with low voltage switching and
adjustable front limit switching.
5. Case: Aluminum.
6. Finish: Paint exposed portion of case to match adjacent ceiling.
7. Mount: Recessed ceiling mount.
8. Screen: Da-Lite Matte White Screen.
D. Meeting Room 150, Front Projection Screen:
1. Manufacturer: Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc.
20 October 1997 Projection Screens
Carlsbad City Library 11132-2 96013
2. Model: Director Electrol.
3. Size: Image 8’-0” wide x 6’-0” high.
4. Motor: Internal electric 120V AC 60HZ motor with low voltage switching and
adjustable front limit switching.
5. Case: Aluminum.
6. Finish: Paint exposed portion of case to match adjacent ceiling.
7. Mount: Recessed ceiling mount.
8. Screen: Da-Lite Matte White Screen.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
3.03
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures, anchoring all components firmly
into position for long life under hard use.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
Upon completion of the installation, inspect each component.
1. Verify that each item has been fabricated and installed in accordance with the
specified requirements.
20 October 1997 Projection Screens
Carlsbad City Library 11132-3 96013
2. Make necessary adjustments.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Projection Screens
11132-4 96013
SECTION 11452
APPLIANCES
PHK I
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
#-
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain required products from a single manufacturer.
Accessories: Provide accessory items only as produced or recommended by
manufacturer of primary products.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
1 - CjtNtKAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
Appliances
11452-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
-C.
D.
2.02
A.
MATERIALS
Refrigerator: The design is based on General “Profile” Series, 24.7 cu. Ft., Model
TBX25PAY.
1. Size: 67” H x 34-l/2” W x 31” D (without handle).
2. White.
Microwave: The design is based on General Electric “Spacemaker II” Model JEM25WV.
1. Nominal Size: 16-l/4” H x 26-l/8” W x 16” D.
2. Color: White on white.
3. Provide “built-in” installation kit.
Under-Counter Refrigerator: The design is based on General Electric “Spacemaker”
Model TAXGSNX with custom trim kit to match cabinets.
1. Size: 34-l/4" H x 23-5/8” W x 25-7/8” D.
Dishwasher: The design is based on General Electric “Quiet-Power Plus” Model
GSD1380XWW. Color to be white on white.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Appliances
11452-2 96013
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Upon completion, clean all surfaces which have become soiled or coated as a result of
work of this section, using proper methods which will not scratch or otherwise damage
finished surfaces.
B. for cleaning, use only products and techniques acceptable to manufacturer of products
being cleaned.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Institute protective procedures and install protective materials as required to ensure that
work of this section will be without damage or deterioration at substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Appliances
Carlsbad City Library 11452-3 96013
SECTION 12505
SHUTTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Shutters: “Ante Bellurn”, 3-l/2” wide shutters with l-1/4” stiles, painted, by Pinecrest, or
approved equal.
20 October 1997 Shutters
Carlsbad City Library 12505-l 96013
1. Color to be selected by the Architect.
2. Panel sizes indicated on drawings.
3. Lay out shutter panels to align with vertical window mullions. Coordinate dimensions
as required.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Position shutters plumb and true, securely anchored in place with recommended
hardware and accessories.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Shutters
12505-2 96013
SECTION 12512
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
5. Color charts showing colors and finishes available from the proposed manufacturer
in the specified products.
6. Samples of each item, color, pattern and finish available in specified grades from the
proposed manufacturers.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Provide complete assemblies produced by one manufacturer for each type required,
including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets, and fastenings.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
20 October 1997 Horizontal Louver Blinds
Carlsbad City Library 12512-1 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 HORIZONTAL BLINDS
A. Manufacturers: Del Mar Window Coverings, Hunter Douglas, Inc., Levelor Lorentzen,
Inc., or approved equal.
B. Manufacturers standard vertical lifting and horizontal tilting unit complete with headrail,
bottom rail, slate, and accessories as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Headrail formed from sheet steel into channel-shaped section housing tilting
mechanism; with top and end braces, top cradles, cord lock and required accesso-
ries; finished to match slats.
Bottom rail formed from steel sheet into tubular shape, with end caps, finished to
match slats.
Aluminum slats formed from spring-tempered aluminum with manufacturers standard
baked enamel finish, slat width 1 -inch (25mm) nominal slats, with other components
sized to suit.
Ladders: Braided polyester cord design with integrally braided ladder rungs.
Tilting mechanism to hold tilting rod, slats and bottom rail at any set angle, wand
operation.
Lifting mechanism consisting of crash-proof cord locks with cord separators, braided
polyester or nylon lift cords, and cord equalizers.
Installation brackets, including mounting hardware, as recommended by manufactur-
er for installation indicated.
Operation to provide full-tilting slats rotating approximately 180 deg with operating
controls on left side; full height raising with lifting cord locks and cords on right-hand
side of units, unless otherwise indicated.
Finish units with manufacturer’s standard baked-on synthetic enamel finish. Colors
as scheduled on the drawings,
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units to completely fill openings as indicated, from head-to-sill and jamb-to-
jamb.
2.03 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
20 October 1997 Horizontal Louver Blinds
Carlsbad City Library 12512-2 96013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
r 3.01
A.
B.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Provide units plumb and true, securely anchored in place with recommended hardware
and accessories to provide smooth, easy operation.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997 Horizontal Louver Blinds
Carlsbad City Library 12512-3 96013
SECTION 12530
DRAPERY AND CURTAIN HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
,-
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
8. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Drapery: Leo-P fabric, No. 2006-802 color, 66” wide, by DesignTex, or approved equal.
Fiber shall consist of 80% polyester, 18% silk, and 2% flax, and shall meet Class A
flamespread rating in accordance with ASTM E 84, and State of California Technical
bulletin No. 117, Section E (CS-191-53).
B. Curtain Track: Kirsch Co., or approved equal. Provide all bearings, stops, hooks and
the like as required for a complete operating system.
f- 20 October 1997 Drapery and Curtain Hardware
Carlsbad City Library 12530-l 96013
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
3.02
-A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Conect conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Drapery and Curtain Hardware
12530-2 96013
SECTION 12710
AUDITORIUM SEATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
3. Shop drawings prepared from Architect’s drawings and from field measurements
including lay out of seating units, chair sizes, and aisle widths, in sufficient detail to
show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section
with the work of other Sections.
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, samples of each exposed material from
which seating units and accessories are composed, in each color, finish, pattern, and
texture indicated. If these qualities are not indicated, submit, for initial selection,
manufacturer’s color charts or samples of actual materials showing full range of standard
colors, finishes, patterns, and textures available. Include samples of the following:
1. Fabric.
2. Plastic laminate.
3. Baked enamel finishes for metal components.
4. Wood materials and finishes.
5. Molded plastic.
6. Exposed fasteners.
f- 20 October 1997 Auditorium Seating
Carlsbad City Library 12710-l 96013
D.
E.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
Certification: Submit certificate from manufacturer that materials provided for auditorium
and theater seating have met fire performance requirements.
Qualification data to demonstrate Installer’s capabilities and experience. Include list of
completed projects with project name, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus
other information specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Compatibility: Provide each type of auditorium seating by a single manufacturer,
including accessories, mounting,and installation components.
Installer Qualifications: Engage a manufacturer-approved, locally based, experienced
Installer who regularly installs and services auditorium and theater seating similar in kind,
quality, and extent to that indicated for Project.
Sizes and Layout: Provide varying width backs and seats as necessary to comply with
approved shop drawings, with standards in each row spaced laterally so that end stan-
dards are in alignment from first to last row, regardless of whether aisles are constant
width or converging.
Fire Performance Characteristics of Upholstered Seating: Provide upholstered auditorium
and theater chairs which have been tested and certified as complying with BIFMA F-l
sponsored by the Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer’s Association.
Fabric: Provide fabric complying with Class 1 flammability requirements of the U.S.
Department of Commerce Commercial Standard 191-53 per Bulletin No. 117 (California
Code).
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Field Measurements: Take necessary measurements in the field to assure proper
dimensions for the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600.
Deliver seating in manufacturers unopened cartons clearly labeled with manufacturers
name and contents.
Store seating in dry location protected from damage and soiling under environmental
conditions acceptable to manufacturer.
Handle seating in a manner to prevent damage.
20 October 1997 Auditorium Seating
Carlsbad City Library 12710-2 96013
1.05
/c A.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching
products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
clearly describing contents.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions: Do not install seating until space is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet-work in space is complete and nominally dry, installation of finishes
including painting is complete, other units of Work above ceiling are complete; and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions will be continuously maintained at values
near those indicated for final occupancy.
1. Upholstery fabric in size and quantity required to reupholster 2 percent of each size
of installed seats and backs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Seating: Auditorium seating shall be Marquee No. 52548 by Irwin Seating Company, or
approved equal.
B. Steel: All steel shall have smooth surfaces and shall be of sufficient gage thickness and
designed to withstand strains of normal use and abuse.
C. Wood:
1. Plywood, exposed or concealed, shall be hardwood. All plywood shall be hot press
laminated using high frequency process. Interior plies shall be Class 3, or better.
Exposed exterior plies shall be Class 1, and selected as to color.
2. All exposed hardwood, solid or veneer, shall be plain-sliced maple.
3. Particle board core shall be resin bonded of wood particles, 5/8” minimum thickness,
55 lb./cubic foot density.
D. Injection molded plastic shall be one-piece, high impact, linear polyethylene with built-in
ultra-violet light inhibitors to retard fading, and anti-static compounds to retard dirt
attraction.
E. Plastic laminate shall be composed of a core of kraft paper impregnated with phenolic
resins, decorative surface sheet, and overlay sheet containing melamine. Plastic shall
meet or exceed performance standards as established by NEMA.
1. Horizontal surfaces thickness, 0.050”.
2. Vertical surfaces thickness, 0.030”.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Auditorium Seating
12710-3 96013
F. Plastic shall have a maximum bum rate of 1” per minute when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 635, or Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 302.
G. Fabric: “Cordura” S/l01 “Powertwill” 827 Copen, by Irwin Seating Company, or approved
equal
H. Padding Material: Seat and back padding material shall be of new (prime manufacture)
polyurethane foam. Padding material shall comply with the flammability requirements
outlined in the California Technical Information Bulletin No. 117, Resilient Cellular
Materials, Section A & D dated February 1975, when tested in accordance with Federal
Test Method Standard 191, Method 5903.2.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
2.03 FABRICATION
-A. Fabricate auditorium seating units in contoured form for maximum comfort, using
materials which are carefully selected to be free of defects, objectionable projections, or
irregularities. Smoothly round comers, edges, and exposed fasteners, to present least
possible snagging and pinching hazards.
1. The face of the seat and the face of the back shall be upholstered, while rear-of-the-
back, the seat shell insert, and the aisle standard decorator panel shall be of solid
hardwood or veneer of the identical species.
2.04 FINISHES
A. Iron and Steel: Unless otherwise indicated, finish exposed iron and steel components
with manufacturer’s baked-on enamel, in color(s) as selected by Architect from
manufacturer’s standards.
B. Wood and Plywood: Seal and stain wood to match Architect’s sample, and apply lacquer
in sufficient film thickness to afford protection under heavy usage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
20 October 1997 Auditorium Seating
Carlsbad City Library 12710-4 96013
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
C. Install chairs in locations indicated on approved shop drawings, with required clearances,
elevations, and sight lines.
D. Standards: Install standards in locations necessitated by seating layout, with each
standard attached to substrate by not less than 2 anchoring devices of recommended
size.
E. Chairs: Install chairs by mounting components to standards or brackets mounted on
standards, using manufacturer’s recommended hardware and fasteners. Insure that
chairs in curved rows are installed at proper radius, and verify that moving components
operate properly.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust seat uplift mechanisms as required to assure that seats in each row are aligned
when in upright position.
B. Touch-up minor abrasions and imperfections in painted finishes with coating which
matches factory-applied finish.
C. Replace any upholstery which has been damaged in installation.
END OF SECTION
,- 20 October 1997 Auditorium Seating
Carlsbad City Library 12710-5 96013
SECTION 14212
HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications, and the Drawings.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Elevator El:
1. Capacity: 3,500 pounds.
2. Car speed: 125 ft. per minute
3. Operation: Selective collective microprocessor control with door nudging (non-
proprietary control requiring no special proprietary hand held tools, leased special
equipment, etc.)
4. Car Inside Dimension: 6’-8” x 5-5” minimum
5. Power Supply: 480 volts, three phase, 60 HZ
6. Machine Location: Adjacent to shaft
7. Travel: 14’-0”
8. Stops: Two.
9. Openings: Front, 3’-6”, left hand.
IO. Hoistway Entrances: UL labeled with square design frames
11. Type: Two speed
12. Hoistway Size: 8’4” x 6’-11”
13. Finish:
a. Door Panels: Stainless steel No 4 satin finish
b. Frames: Stainless steel No. 4 satin, unit type
C. Sills: aluminum
20 October 1997 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators
Carlsbad City Library 14212-1 96013
14. Door Operation: Power operated, heavy duty operator, power eyes door protection
15. Car Enclosure: Dover Seville 35
a.
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
9.
h.
i.
j.
Plastic laminate wall
Stainless steel car door, fixed front return, entrance columns and header, and
base material
Cab Height: 8’-0”
Ceiling Type: Vinyl egg crate diffusers in clear anodized aluminum frame with
fluorescent lighting
Rear Handrail: single stainless steel bar
Single Handrail: single stainless steel bar
Car Sill: Aluminum
Single speed exhaust fan
Car pads and hooks
Finish Flooring: Primary carpet specified in Section 09680.
16. Signals: Integral car operation panel, recessed flush mounted Braille plates, 2”
digital car position indicator, car direction indicator in car column, integral hairline fit
door telephone cabinet with auto telephone dialer, and one hall push button riser
B. Elevator E2:
1.
2.
3.
Capacity: 2,500 pounds.
Car speed: 125 ft. per minute
Operation: Selective collective microprocessor control with door nudging (non-
proprietary control requiring no special proprietary hand held tools, leased special
equipment, etc.)
4. Car Inside Dimension: 6’-8” x 4’-3” minimum.
5. Power Supply: 480 volts, three phase, 60 HZ
6. Machine Location: Adjacent to shaft
7. Travel: 14’-0”
8. Stops: Two.
20 October 1997 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators
Carlsbad City Library 14212-2 96013
9. Openings: Front
10. Hoistway Entrances: UL labeled with square design frames
11. Type: Center opening
12. Size: 3’6” x 7’-0”
13. Finish:
a. Door Panels: Stainless steel No 4 satin finish
b. Frames: Stainless steel No. 4 satin, unit type
c. Sills: aluminum
d. Door Operation: Power operated, heavy duty operator, power eyes door
protection
14. Car Enclosure: Dover Marquis 25
a.
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
9.
h.
i.
j.
Plastic laminate wall
Stainless steel car door, fixed front return, entrance columns and header, and
base material
Cab Height: 8’-0”
Ceiling Type: Vinyl egg crate diffusers in clear anodized aluminum frame with
fluorescent lighting
Rear Handrail: single stainless steel bar
Single Handrail: single stainless steel bar
Car Sill: Aluminum
Single speed exhaust fan
Car pads and hooks
Finish Floor: Primary carpet specified in Section 09680.
15. Signals: Integral car operation panel, recessed flush mounted Braille plates, 2”
digital car position indicator, car direction indicator in car column, integral hairline fit
door telephone cabinet with auto telephone dialer, one hall push button riser, hall
lanthern and floor landing numbers on both sides of door jamb.
20 October 1997 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators
Carlsbad City Library 14212-3 96013
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
B.
-C.
D.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to:
1. ANSI A17.1 - American Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters,
Escalators, and Moving Walks.
2. Applicable provisions of the Elevator Safety Orders of the State, Standard Building
Code, current edition, Handicapped Requirements, and all other applicable local and
state rules and regulations.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with applicable provisions of Section 01300.
Samples: Submit samples of all exposed finishes.
1. Submit actual finish on the base material which is to be installed.
Submit shop drawings and product data indicating space requirements, general
arrangement of elevator equipment, and material being supplied. Show connections,
attachments, reinforcing, anchorage and location of exposed fastenings, and location and
amount of loads and reactions to be carried on the building structure.
1. If substitutions of controls or elevator equipment requires any changes in the
electrical work from that shown on the drawings, the extra cost of the equipment or
electrical work shall be the responsibility of the elevator contractor.
Submit descriptive brochures or detail drawings of landing buttons, hall fixtures, floor
numbers, car operating panels, car interior and hoistway doors and frames for review.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Maintain entire elevator installation for one year after acceptance by the Owner.
Include systematic examination, adjustment and lubrication of elevator equipment, repair
or replace worn electrical and mechanical parts of the elevator equipment using only
genuine standard parts produced by manufacturer of equipment concerned.
Replace seals, packing, and valves to maintain required factor of safety.
Perform work without removing cars during peak traffic periods.
Provide 24 hour emergency call back service during maintenance period.
Ensure that competent personnel handle maintenance service. Maintain locally an
adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes and have qualified
personnel available at such places to ensure the fulfillment of this service without
unreasonable loss of time.
20 October 1997 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators
Carlsbad City Library 14212-4 98013
1.06
F-- A.
B.
C.
D.
1.07
A.
8.
C. Control Wiring: All low voltage and line voltage conduit, wiring, and junction/outlet boxes
shall be provided in this section. Installation of these items shall comply with Division 16.
.F- 1.08 WARRANTY
A. Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer,
agreeing to replace/repair/ restore defective materials and workmanship of elevator work
during warranty period. “Defective” is hereby defined to include, but not by way of
limitation, operation or control system failures, performances below required minimums,
excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions,
the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar unusual,
unexpected and unsatisfactory conditions.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver items or materials to site after area in which they are to be installed is ready to
receive them in their place of final installation.
Store materials in a storage area allotted and in such a manner as to prevent deteriora-
tion, damage, or loss of their essential properties.
Fully protect moveable and operating equipment from weather.
Wrap and crate factory finished materials in manner to protect their finishes.
ELECTRICAL/ELEVATOR REQUIREMENTS
The power wiring, safety switches, circuit breakers, and electrical connections of the
elevator equipment to the electrical power source shall be provided under Division 16.
The electrical components of elevator equipment, including, but not limited to, motors,
motor controllers (starters), control or pushbutton stations, switches, solenoid valves and
other devices functioning to control elevator equipment shall be provided as part of this
section. Interconnection wiring for packaged equipment shall be provided as an integral
part of the equipment.
1. The warranty period is 12 months after acceptance by the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Dover Elevator International, Amtech Reliable, or approved equal. For convenience,
products of Dover Elevator are described.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Hydraulic Passenger Elevators 14212-5 96013
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Motors, pumps, controllers, hydraulic fluid reservoir, cylinder, casing, plunger, piping,
guide rails, buffers, buttons, wiring, indicators, and hardware and fittings to provide a fully
operational elevator.
B. Machine: A.C. type specifically designed for elevator service having motor, pump, tank
valves and muffler mounted and aligned on steel bedplate.
C. Cylinder/Plunger: Machined polished steel tube having internal couplings where jointed,
welded stop on bottom, sliding in high strength steel pipe cylinder having closed bottom
and stuffing box with packing gland at top and all necessary piping connections.
1. Jack cylinder and any underground piping shall be double wrapped with an approved
coating designed to help protect it from electrolytic and chemical corrosion.
2.03 CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. The elevator shall be rated 480 volts, 23 phase, NEMA size as indicated. The motor
controller shall be reduced voltage, closed-transition, auto-transformer (50 percent tap)
type. Split winding reduced voltage starting is not acceptable. The motor controller shall
have an overload relay in each line and reverse phase, phase protection.
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PREPARATION
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Ensure that shafts and openings for moving equipment are plumb, level and in line and
that pit is to proper depth, waterproofed and drained with necessary cylinder opening,
and ladder guard.
Ensure that machine room is properly illuminated, heated and ventilated and equipment
foundations correctly located complete with floor and access door.
Supply in ample time for installation, inserts, anchors, pipe sleeves, bearing plates,
brackets, supports and bracing including setting templates and diagrams for placement.
Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as
acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation
of products of this Section.
20 October 1997 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators
Carlsbad City Library 14212-6 96013
3.02
r I A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
/+--
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
3.03
A.
B.
3.04
A.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other
work for interface with the work of this Section.
Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved
Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.
Perform work with competent mechanics skilled in this work and under the direct control
and supervision of the elevator manufacturer’s experienced foreman.
Set hoistway entrances in alignment with car openings and true with plumb sill lines.
Install machinery, guides, controls, car and equipment and accessories in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions, applicable codes, and standards to provide a quiet,
smoothly operating installation, free from sidesway, oscillation, or vibration.
Install guide rails to allow for future adjustment.
Excavate for plunger and cylinder, set in place plumb and accurate. After the hydraulic
cylinder is set in place the outer casing shall be backfilled with clean dry sand. Cover
the top of the outer casing to prevent rainwater from filling the casing.
Mount machine in machine room on concrete foundation. Isolate and dampen machine
vibration with properly sized sound-reducing anti-vibration pads.
Install and hook-up piping between machine and cylinder
Erect hoistway sills, headers and frames prior to erection of rough walls and doors; erect
fascias and toe guards after rough walls finished.
Grout sills and hoistway entrance doors.
Furnish stainless steel license holders in each elevator car to suit certificate issued.
Design holder with non-visible tamper-proof fastenings.
CLEANING
Prior to final acceptance remove protection from finished or ornamental surfaces and
clean and polish surfaces with due regard to type of material.
At completion of work of this Section, remove tools, equipment and surplus materials
from site.
ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Make necessary adjustments of equipment to ensure elevator operates smoothly and
accurately.
20 October 1997 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators
Carlsbad City Library 14212-7 96013
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Locate and protect moveable equipment and controls in such a way that they can only
be operated by authorized persons.
3.06 INSPECTION
A. Obtain and pay for inspections and permits and make such tests as are required by
regulations of authorities. Make tests in presence of Architect.
B. Final inspection shall be after elevator installation, hoisting enclosure and machine room
are complete.
C. Inspect installation in accordance with ANSI A17.2.
D. Deliver test certificates and permits to Architect.
END OF SECTION
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Hydraulic Passenger Elevators
14212-8 96013
VOLUME 3 of 3
SPECiFiCATiONS - DiViSiONS 15-16
for
CARLSBAD CITY LIBRARY
for
CITY OF CARLSBAD
at
6925 El Camino Real
Carlsbad, California 92008
Prepared by:
CardweWMcGraw Architects
McGraw/Baldwin Architects
Architecture Planning Interiors
701 B Street, Suite 200
San Diego, California 92101
Telephone: 619-231-0751
Fax: 619-231-4396
Cardwellmhomas & Associates / Architects
1221 Second Avenue, Suite 300
Seattle, Washington 98101
Telephone: 206-622-2311
Fax: 206-442-9165
Project No. 96013
October 20, 1997
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME 3 OF 3
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 Mechanical General Requirements
15300 Fire Protection - Wet System
15310 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
15400 Plumbing
15800 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15900 Building Control System
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16011
16050
16110
16112
16114
16120
16130
16140
16420
16440
16450
16460
16470
16471
16475
16480
16490
16510
16530
16610
16620
16720
16721
16730
16740
16741
16770
16915
16920
16930
16950
General Requirements, Electrical
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Raceways and Fittings
Manholes, Utility Boxes, Pads, and Vaults
Cable Trays
Wire and Cable (600 Volts and Below) Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes
Wiring Devices
Service Entrance and Metering Equipment
Disconnect Switches
Grounding
Transformers
Panelboards
Distribution Panelboards
Overcurrent Protective Devices
Motor Starters, Motor Controllers, and Motor Control Centers
Automatic Transfer Switches
Lighting, Ballasts and Accessories
Exterior Lighting
Uninterruptible Power System
Diesel Engine-Generator Set
Security Access System
Fire Alarm Detection Systems
Master Clock System
Telephone/Data Systems
Prewire Computer Cable System
Paging System
Lighting Dimming System
Low-Voltage Switching System
Theatrical Lighting Dimming System
Acceptance Testing of Electrical Power Distribution
END OF VOLUME 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS
20 October 1997 Carlsbad City Library
Table of Contents, Volume 3 96013
SECTION 15050
MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL REQUWlylWCS m
1.2
1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS:
A. The general conditions and Division 1 are a part of this section and the contract for
this work and apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein. This section,
15050, applies to all Division 15 categories, including but not limited to:
Section 15300 Fire Protection, Wet System
15310 Fire Protection, Clean Agent Suppression System
15400 Plumbing
15800 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
B. Reference to Other Sections: The applicable requirements from the above sections
shall form a part of the mechanical work and each section shall consult the other
sections in detail for general and specific requirements.
1.3
SCOPE:
A. These Division 15 specifications and the accompanying drawings are intended to
comprise the furnishing of all labor and the furnishing and installing of all materials,
equipment and supplies as specified herein and required for the satisfactory
completion by the Contractor of all work pertaining to mechanical trades.
EXPLANATION OF DRAWINGS AND REFERENCE TO SCHEDULES:
A. The drawings and these specifications are complementary to each other in that all
apparatus, materials and equipment outlined in the drawings and/or specified herein
shall be considered essential to the contract.
B. The specifications are intended to describe the quality and character of the
materials and equipment and methods of installation. All miscellaneous items of
work and materials necessary for the completion of the installation shall be
provided, whether or not mentioned in the specifications or shown on the drawings.
C. Space allotted, clearances, access, electrical data, structural supports, etc., on
drawings, is for equipment models and sizes as listed in schedules on plans. The
Contractor shall assume the responsibility for the coordination with other trades
required in the use of equal or substitute equipment or materials and pay all
differences in cost arising from such substitutions, regardless of approval.
20 October 1997 Mechanical General Requirements
Carlsbad City Library 15050-l 96013
D. Separate Sections cover the Site Work, Architectural Work and the Electrical Work.
The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the entire specification.
E. Should there be any question as to the scope of the work for which the Contractor
is responsible, he shall ask the Architect for an interpretation before submitting his
bid. In the event that the Contractor finds discrepancies or omissions or is in doubt
as to the exact meaning of the plans and/or specifications, he shall, before
submitting his bid, contact the Mechanical Engineer for clarification.
F. For purposes of dearness and legibility, drawings are essentially diagrammatic and,
although size and location of equipment are drawn to scale wherever possible, the
Contractor shall make use of all data in all the contract documents and shall verify
this information at building site.
G. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes and suggest
proper routes to conform to structure, avoid obstructions and preserve clearances.
However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets and it shall
be the work of the Contractor to make the installation in such a manner as to
conform to structure, avoid obstruction, preserve headroom and keep openings and
passageways clear.
H. It is intended that all apparatus be located symmetrical with architectural elements.
Refer to architectural details in completing the correlating work.
I. The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding any and all peculiarities and
limitations of the spaces available for the installation of all work and materials
furnished and installed under the contract. He shall exercise due and particular
caution to determine that all parts of his work are made quickly and easily
accessible.
J. The Contractor shall study all drawings and specifications to determine any con&t
with ordinances and statutes. Any errors or omissions shall be reported, and any
changes shall be shown in the as-built drawings and the additional work performed
at no cost to the Owner.
K. The submittal of bid shall indicate that the Contractor has examined the site and the
drawings and has included all required allowances in his bid. He shall also
determine in advance and make allowances for the methods of installing and
connecting the equipment, the means of getting equipment in to place and he shall
make himself familiar with all the requirements of the contract. No allowance will
be made for any error resulting from the Contractor’s failure to visit job site and to
review drawings. The bid shall include costs for all required drawings and changes
as outlined above.
L. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent, the general location and arrangement
of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. Equipment and piping shall be located to avoid
20 October 1997 Mechanical General Requirements
Carlsbad City Library 15050 -2 96013
1.4 DEFINITIONS:
M.
N.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
interference with electrical, plumbing and structural features. All locations for
mechanical work shall be checked and coordinated with the building, structural and
electrical work.
If any conflicts occur necessitating departures from the Contract Drawings, details
of departures and reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practical for
written approval and the piping, ductwork, fixtures or equipment affected shall not
be installed until approval is received.
Reference to Drawing Schedules:
1. Refer to equipment schedule for unit identification number and
corresponding capacity and design requirements.
2. Wherever schedules or notes appear on the Drawings or in the
specifications in which sizes and capacities of equipment are indicated, the
equipment furnished and installed under this contract shall meet the
following requirements under operating conditions:
a. The RPM, the outlet velocities, tip speed and the dB ratings
specified are the maximum that will be accepted.
b. The motor horsepower, the CFM, the static pressure on fans, are the
minimum that will be accepted.
C. The working pressure, the GPM at required pressure, the BTUH
input are the minimum that will be accepted.
“Provide” shall mean “provide complete in place,” that is, “furnish and install.”
“Piping” shall mean pipes, fittings, valves and all like pipe accessories connected
thereto.
Pressure ratings specified, such as for valves and the like, is the design working
pressure and is for and with reference to the fluid which the device will serve.
“Ductwork” shall mean ducts, plenums, compartments, casings or any like devices,
including the building structure, which is used to convey or contain air.
“Building Boundary” shall mean exterior building walls.
“Mechanical Work” shall mean all work specified and shown in the Division 15,
“Mechanical,” categories. Mechanical work generally includes: Plumbing, Heating,
Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Fire Protection systems.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Mechanical General Requirements
15050 -3 96013
1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS:
A. All work, material or equipment shall comply with the requirements of codes,
ordinances and regulations of the local Government having jurisdiction at the
location of the work, including the regulations of serving utilities and any
participating government agencies having jurisdiction.
B. The latest editions of the following Specification, Codes and Standards shall form
a part of these specifications, and same as if herein written out in full, and all
materials and installations include but not be limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
20 October 1997 Mechanical General Requirements
Carlsbad City Library 15050 -4
UMC (Uniform Mechanical Code).
ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning).
UL (Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.).
AMCA (Air Moving and Conditioning Associates).
California State Division of lnd.ustrial Safety.
SMACNA Low Velocity Duct Manual.
UBC (Uniform Building Code).
NFPA (National Fire Protection Association).
City of Carlsbad Codes
California Administrative Code, Title 24.
Requirements of the State Fire Marshal.
National Electrical Code.
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials).
AGA (American Gas Association).
OSHA
UPC (Uniform Plumbing Code).
FM (Factory Mutual)
96013
C. No requirement of these drawings and specifications shall be construed to void any
of the provisions of the above standards. No apparatus, equipment, device or
construction shall be installed which will provide a cross connection permitting any
backflow or siphonage from any source into the domestic water supply system.
1.6 PERMITS AND FEES:
A. Obtain all permits, patent rights, and licenses that are required for the performing
of the work by all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, or orders of any officer
and/or body, give all notices necessary in connection therewith, and pay all fees
relating thereto and all costs and expenses incurred on account thereof. No work
shall be covered before inspection by the jurisdictional authority and the Architect.
1.7 SUPERVISION AND COOPERATION:
A. The Contractor shall include the services of experienced superintendents for each
sub-section who shall be constantly in charge of the work, together with the qualified
journeymen, helpers and laborers required to properly unload, install, connect,
adjust, start, operate and test the work involved, including equipment and materials
furnished by others.
B. The work under this section shall be in cooperation with the work of other trades to
prevent conflict or interference and to aid in rapid completion of the overall project.
1.8 PROJECT SITE VISIT:
A. Periodic visits to the project site by the Engineer are for the expressed purpose of
verifying compliance with the contract documents. Such site visits shall not be
construed as construction supervision, i.e., the Engineer assumes no responsibility
for providing a safe place for the performance of the work by the Contractor or the
Contractor’s employees or the safety of the supplies of the Contractor. Neither shall
such site visits relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the discovery of his
own errors and the correction of them, nor of the responsibility of properly
performing the work.
1.9 COORDINATION:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all information, drawings or layouts
of equipment or work under this section which affect the work of the other trades.
B. In case changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are necessary due to
developed conditions in the construction, or rearrangement of furnishings or
equipment, these changes shall be made without extra cost to the Owner, provided
the change is ordered before work directly connected is installed, and no extra
materials are required.
20 October 1997 Mechanical General Requirements
Carlsbad City Library 15050-5 96013
1.10 EXISTING UTILITIES:
A. The location of existing utilities shown on the plumbing plans is the best known
information available at time of design. The Contractor shall contact the appropriate
agencies and confirm the information and make arrangements for connection
thereto, prior to excavation and installation of any piping or systems.
6. Prior to installation of any waste and soil lines, the Contractor shall physically verify
whether the building sewer can be installed and properly connected to the sewer
main. Any work requiring added expense which is caused by the Contractor to
make such physical verification shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.11 UTILITY SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION:
A. All water and electric power used for construction shall be paid for by the
Contractor.
1.12 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Equipment and materials shall be submitted to the Architect for approval within 30
days after award of Contract and prior to fabrication or purchase of equipment and
materials.
B. Installation of materials or ordering of equipment prior to approval of submittals is
done entirely at the risk of the Contractor.
C. Unless otherwise specifically directed in the following specifications, the submittals
by the Contractor to the Architect shall be as follows:
1. Submit all items at one time in a neat and orderly manner with index tabs.
A partial submittal will not be acceptable.
2. Reference catalog cuts and brochures of products to proper paragraph in
specifications. Furnish numerical index by specification article number,
listing product name, catalog number and reference to page number of
submittal brochure.
3. Cross reference individual catalog numbers of substitute products to number
of specified materials.
4. Bind submittal in booklet form.
5. Submit manufacturers’ certification that equipment meets or exceeds the
minimum requirements as specified.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Mechanical General Requirements
15050 -6 96013
6. Where materials, equipment and installations are specified to conform with
societies or agencies such as ANSI, ASHRAE, SMACNA, etc., submit
certification of such compliance.
7. The submittal shall be complete and with catalog data and information
properly marked to show, among other things, material capacity and
performance to meet capacities or performance as specified or indicated.
Arrange the submittals in the same sequence as the specifications and
reference in the upper right-hand comer, the particular specification
provision for which each submittal is intended. molete submittals will k
reiected. unless onor approval for martial submittal has been obtained.
8. The Contractor is responsible for confirmation of code approval of material
and equipment. Certification of code conformance by the manufacturer shall
be submitted for:
a. Water heaters.
b. Backflow preventers.
9. If the Contractor submits a product that is specified, a complete set of
brochures, rating tables, etc., is still required for future reference.
10. Review of the submittal is only for general conformance with design concept
of project and general compliance with information given in the contract
documents. The Contractor is responsible for confirmation and correlation
of the dimensions, quantities and sizes; for information that pertains to
fabrication methods or construction techniques; and for coordination of work
of all trades. Deviations from drawings and specifications shall be clearly
and completely indicated (by a separate letter) in the submittal.
Il. For items which are not manufactured and which have to be specifically
fabricated including drawings and typical duct construction and complicated
portions of ductwork, six copies of shop drawings and detail descriptions
shall be submitted. Shop drawings shall be submitted with such promptness
as to allow ample time for examination and any resubmittal.
1.13 SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Bidders wishing to obtain approval of an article, device, product, material, fixture,
form or type of construction other than those specified by name, make or catalog
number shall request in accordance with Section 01630 Substitutions.
B. If the use of substitute equipment results in an increase in the cost, including the
work of other trades, this Contractor shall be solely responsible for payment of said
increase in cost.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Mechanical General Requirements
15050 -7 96013
1.14
A.
B.
1.15
1.16
A.
B.
C.
GUARANTEE:
In addition to the guarantees required elsewhere, all work, materials and equipment
provided under the mechanical sections shall be guaranteed for a period of one
year from the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner. Should any trouble
develop during this period due to defective materials or faulty workmanship, the
Contractor shall immediately furnish all necessary labor and materials to correct the
trouble without cost to the Owner. The Contractor, under this guarantee, shall be
responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by equipment
furnished under this section.
Furnish written certified guarantee, in acceptable form, to the Owner, against
defective workmanship, materials and operating equipment, for a period of at least
one year after acceptance by owner. Compressors shall have five year warranty.
Repair, replace and make satisfactorily operative any and all defective items and
work, holding the Owner free from any cost and liability in connection therewith, for
the term of the guarantee.
DAMAGE BY LEAKS:
The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the grounds, walks, roads,
buildings, furnishings, piping systems, electrical systems and their equipment and
contents caused by leaks in the piping systems being installed or having been
installed herein. He shall repair at his expense all damage so caused.
IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING & EQUIPMENT:
Identify all equipment with nameplate bearing equipment name and number using
l-l/2 inch wide, white Bakelite with l/2 inch black letters permanently mounted in
a conspicuous place.
Markings: Each piping system shall be identified and the direction of flow indicated
by means of legends, color bands and flow arrows, all as manufactured by W.H.
Brady, Seton or equal. The markings shall be applied after all painting and cleaning
of the piping and insulation is completed. The stick-ons shall be taped all around
the pipe in addition to being cemented on.
Location:
1. The identification shall be applied to all piping except those located in furred
spaces without access to permit entrance of personnel and piping buried in
the ground or concrete.
20 October 1997 Mechanical General Requirements
Carlsbad City Library 15050 -8 96013
r
-
2. The symbol and flow arrow shall be applied at all valve locations, at all
points where piping enters or leaves a wall, partition, cluster of piping or
similar obstruction and at approximately 30-foot intervals on runs with at
least one symbol or flow arrow in each space or room.
3. Variation or changes in locations and spacing may be made only with the
direction of the Architect to meet conditions.
4. Wherever two or more pipes run parallel, the printed symbol and other
markings shall be applied in the same relative locations so as to be in either
vertical or horizontal linearity, whichever the case may be.
5. The markings shall be located so as to be conspicuous and legible at all
times from any reasonable point.
D. Sizes shall be as recommended in ANSI Al 3.1.
E. As an alternate to the above, the Contractor may submit a system of painted
stenciled letters on a color coded background per ANSI Al 3.1. Complete data,
color chart and sizes shall be submitted for review.
F. Valve charts shall be provided for each piping system and shall consist of schematic
drawings of piping layouts showing and identifying each valve and describing its
function. Upon completion of the work and after approval by the Architect, one copy
of each chart, mounted on rigid backboard placed under glass and framed, shall be
mounted where directed by the Owner. Valve lists shall be furnished as required.
G. Name Tags: Provide l-1/4 inch plastic square or l-1/4 inch round with l/4 inch
letters for all valves, Seton or approved equal. Black letters on white tags shall be
and marked for type of service intended. Attach tags to valve handles by “S” hooks.
Furnish four printed lists showing valve number, service and location. One of these
lists shall be individually framed with metal frames and glass fronts and mounted
where directed by the Owner after approval. One additional copy shall be furnished
as required.
H. Emergency Repairs:
1. The Owner reserves the tight to make emergency repairs as required to
keep equipment in operation without voiding the Contractor’s guarantee
bond nor relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 The specification of the mechanical products is detailed in the individual
specification sections of Division 15.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Mechanical General Requirements
15050 -9 96013
PART 3 EXECUTION N
3.1
A.
3.2 PROTECTION OF PIPING SYSTEMS:
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install and maintain pipe and
equipment which is reasonably clean and free from rust, dirt, scale, etc. Where
necessary, the Contractor shall provide temporary airtight wvers at all pipe and
equipment or fixture pipe connections.
B.
3.3
A.
B.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:
The requirements of “mechanical” installation is detailed in the individual
specification sections of Division 15. In addition, the following general requirements
shall apply:
1. Obtain Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions to aid in property
executing work of installing equipment whenever such instructions are
available. Submit three copies of such instructions to the Architect prior to
time of installation for use of supervising the work.
2. Erect equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner. Align, level and adjust
for satisfactory operation. Install so that connecting and disconnecting of
piping and accessories can be made readily and so that all parts are easily
accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Minor
deviation from arrangements shown on drawings may be made, as
approved by the Architect.
Before turning the systems over to the Owner, all piping systems shall be
thoroughly flushed of all scale and dirt. Drains shall be installed at the low points
of the systems to facilitate flushing of the piping systems.
PROTECTION OF AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS:
The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection to keep dirt and
foreign matter from getting into the air handling system.
Ductwork shall not be left open for any extended period of time. Open section and
open fittings shall be capped wherever they occur until such time as final
connections are made to equipment, grilles, registers, etc.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Mechanical General Requirements
15050 - 10 96013
/” 3.4
3.5
PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
A. Do not route liquid-filled pressure and drain piping over electrical equipment,
switchboards, motor control centers and the like. When unavoidable, install
galvanized drain pans to prevent liquid from dripping or squirting onto such
equipment.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:
A. See “Earthwork“ section of the specifications for requirements. In addition, the
following shall apply:
1. Execute all excavation to grades to accommodate elevations indicated.
Where invert elevations are not indicated, provide minimum coverage
(above top of pipes) as follows:
a.
b.
Any piping under building slab (top of pipe to top of slab) shall be 12
inches, unless noted otherwise.
Any piping outside of the building in other locations shall be 24
inches.
2. Excavation for pipes shall be cut a minimum of six inches below the required
grade. A six-inch bed of sand shall be then placed and properly compacted
to provide an accurate grade and uniform bearing throughout the length of
the pipe.
a. Shape bottom of trench to fit the bottom l/4 of the circumference of
pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand. At each pipe joint dig bell
holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure
continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
3. Backfilling shall not be placed until the work has been inspected, tested and
approved.
a. Backfill buried piping with sand to a minimum of 6 inches above the
top of the pipe.
b. Backfill the next 6 inches above the sand with fine earth. Excavated
material may be used which is free of excessive amounts of clay,
debris, rubbish, rocks, or clods.
C. Backfill above 12 inches from top of piping may be with excavated
material.
d. Apply backfill in g-inch deep layers for the full width of the trench.
/- I 20 October 1997 Mechanical General Requirements
Carlsbad City Library 15050-11 96013
e. Moisten each layer (do not flood or puddle) and tamp to a minimum
90 percent compaction before proceeding with the next layer of
backfill.
4. Sand backfill used shall be washed river sand normally used for backfill
purposes, free of clods or lumps of clay, rock, debris and rubbish.
5. Clay, rocks or clods or lumps one inch in size or larger will not be permitted
in the backfill. If the excavated material is not suitable, adequate material
shall be provided by hauling from other locations.
6. Surplus earth or material remaining after backfilling shall be removed from
the site.
7. Do not excavate under or near foundations or footings except in manner
permitted and approved by the Architect.
3.6 RECORD DRAWINGS:
A. The Contractor shall keep an accurate dimensional record of the as-built locations
of all work under this Contract. Refer to Section 01720 Project Record Documents
for requirements and procedures.
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. Perform all cutting and fitting required for work of this Section in rough construction
of the building.
B. All patching of finished construction of building shall be performed under the section
of specification covering these materials.
C. All cutting of concrete work by this Contractor shall be by core drilling or concrete
sawing. No cutting or coring shall be done without first obtaining the permission of
the Architect.
D. Information regarding requirements for openings, recesses, chases in the walls,
partitions, framing or openings shall be provided for work under the appropriate
sections of the specifications in advance of the work. Should this be neglected,
delayed or incorrect and additional cutting is found to be required, this work shall be
accomplished at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. All access panels shall be approved by the Architect as to location, appearance and
finish.
20 October 1997 Mechanical General Requirements
Carlsbad City Library 15050 - 12 96013
F 3.8 VIBRATION ELIMINATION AND CONNECTORS:
A. Rotating or reciprocating mechanical equipment shall be mounted on or suspended
from vibration isolators to prevent vibration and structural borne noise transmission
to the building. Refer to each mechanical trade section of these specifications for
specific details. Flexible duct connections shall be used between all fan openings
and sheet metal work. Flexible connectors shall be used in piping connections to
rotating or reciprocating equipment. See individual mechanical sections for
specifications.
3.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR FINAL INSPECTION:
A. All of the following items must be completed prior to final inspections. No exception
and no final payment will be made until all items are completed and approved. For
specific requirements, see the individual section in the Division 15 Category.
F-
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Cleaning equipment and premises.
Test and balance of systems.
Test and balance reports are reviewed by the Engineer.
Service manual.
Pipe and valve identification.
Pipe and valve identification schedule.
Operating tests.
Operating instructions.
As-built drawings.
Certification of water sterilization.
3.10 EARTHQUAKE RESTRAINTS:
A. General:
1. All earthquake resistant designs for mechanical equipment such as air
handling units, water heaters, blowers, motors, ductwork, mechanical and
plumbing piping, shall conform to the regulations of the Uniform Building
Code, Chapter 16, Sec. 1630 “Structural Forces” and Table 16-O of that
code.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Mechanical General Requirements
15050-13 96013
2. The restraints which are used to prevent disruption of the function of the
piece of equipment because of the application of the horizontal force shall
be such that the forces are carried to the frame of the structure in such a
way that the frame will not be deflected when the apparatus is attached to
a mounting base and equipment pad, or to the structure in the normal way,
utilizing the attachments provided. Equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., shall
besecured to withstand a force in any direction equal to the value shown in
Table 16-O.
B. Piping:
1. All HVAC, plumbing and fire protection piping shall be secured by bracing
at every fourth hanger transversely and every eighth hanger longitudinally.
Bracing shall be done in accordance with the NFPA Code and as described
in paragraph “Sway Bracing” of that code.
2. As approved by code authority, the SMACNA “Guidelines for Seismic
Restraints of Mechanical Systems” may be used as a guide.
C. No sway bracing is required for pipes. that are installed on very short hangers (12
inches or less).
D. As approved by the code authority, a bracing system as manufactured by
“Superstrut”, “Michigan Hangers” or “B-Line” may be used.
3.11 ADJUSTMENTS OF SYSTEMS AND OPERATION TESTS:
A. When the work included in these specifications is complete, and at such time as
directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall adjust all parts of the systems,
advising the Architect when this has been done and the work is ready for their final
tests. Refer to “Balancing and Testing Procedures” in Section 15800.
B. The Owner may require operation of parts of all of the systems prior to final
acceptance. If it becomes necessary for temporary use of the systems before all
parts are complete, the Contractor shall adjust all parts as far as possible in order
to make such temporary use as effective as possible. After temporary use and
before acceptance tests, all systems shall be readjusted to meet permanent
operational requirements. This occupancy shall not be construed as final
acceptance. Cost of utilities for such operation will be paid by the Owner.
20 October 1997 Mechanical General Requirements
Carlsbad City Library 15050 - 14 96013
C. Operation Test:
1. At completion, the Contractor shall operate all mechanical systems for a
period of at least two eight-hour days to demonstrate fulfillment of the
requirements of the contract. During this time all adjustments shall be made
to equipment until the entire system is in satisfactory operating condition
acceptable to the Architect and the Owner.
2. Final Operation and Instruction: Upon completion of the installation of the
equipment and after final acceptance, at a time approved by the Owner, the
Contractor shall place a competent man, or men, at the building who shall
operate the systems for a period of one eight-hour day instructing the
Owner’s Representatives in all details of operation and maintenance.
3. Any required instructions from manufacturer’s representatives shall be given
during this period. The two days specified under “Operation Test” does not
substitute for this day of final operation and instruction.
4. All arrangements for operation periods shall be made through the Architect.
D. For specific requirements, see individual Mechanical Sections.
3.12 RUBBISH REMOVAL AND CLEANING:
A. Upon completion of the work under this section, the Contractor shall remove all
surplus materials, equipment and debris incidental to his work, and leave the
premises clean and orderly.
3.13 PAINTING:
A. Excepting piping identification specified in the specific section, all painting is
specified in the Painting Section of the Specifications.
B. Surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned of cement, plaster and other spills.
C. Factory finishes shall be repaired to original condition when scratched or dented.
* l * END OF SECTION l l l
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Mechanical General Requirements
15050-15 96013
,- SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION -WET SYSTEM
PART I- GE-
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
A.
Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following work areas:
Design and installation of complete wet automatic fire sprinkler system the entire
building including all interior areas, all exterior soffits, patio covers, and all
concealed spaces and shafts as required by local fire authorities and Owner’s
insurance rating service, except Computer Server Room 109, which has a clean
agent suppression (see Section 15310).
Connection of fire sprinkler system to water main or lateral.
Inspection test valves, drain lines, and all other inspection components.
All boring, notching, and chasing required for pipe installation and as approved by
Architect.
All fire alarm and supervising systems, complete.
Fees, inspection and tests, including disinfection per County Health standards.
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
Mechanical General Requirements Section 15050
Plumbing Section 15400
Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression Section 15310
Electrical Division 16
Site Utilities Division 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications of Fabricators and Installers
1. For actual fabrication and installation of sprinkler systems, use only
personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the products
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Fire Protection -Wet System
15300 - 1 96013
involved and in the recommended methods of their fabrication and
installation.
2. In the acceptance or rejection of the sprinkler system, no allowance will be
made for lack of skill on the part of workmen.
3. Centractor shall have a California C-16 license or approved equal.
B. Qualifications of Design Engineer: Design and all calculations shall be prepared by
a registered fire protection engineer, experienced in preparation of designs for
similar systems.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all
requirements of:
1. City of Carlsbad, Fire and Building Department requirements, including but
not limited to:
a. Policies for automatic fire sprinkler systems.
2. NFPA 13,13A, 24, and 71.
3. UL and/or FM rating requirements for products.
4. Owners designated Insurance Underwriter and Services office.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings/Heat Layout
The contractor shall provide shop drawings for the Architect’s approval addressing
the design intent in the following areas and the contractor shall provide for additional
heads and lines beyond those required for coverage, as necessary to achieve the
design intent.
1. Coffered GWB Ceilings in Library Rooms 140, 224, 225: Sprinkler heads
shall form a repeated, symmetrical pattern centered in each of the ceiling
bays around the Main Hall on the first and second floors such that each bay
has the same layout.
2. Main Hall Wood Ceiling Room 141: Sprinkler heads shall form a repeated
symmetrical pattern centered in each of the ceiling panels defined by the
structural steel beams and puriins such that each bay has the same layout.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Fire Protection - Wet System
16300-2 96013
3. Auditorium High Bay Ceiling, Room 130: sprinkler heads shall form a
repeated, symmetrical pattern centered in each of the curbed suspended
wood ceiling panels. Exposed piping in the high bay above the panels shall
form a regular pattern and shall be painted out black.
4. Gallery High Bay Ceiling, Room 155: Sprinkler heads and lines will be
exposed at the circular high bay ceiling in the gallery. Sprinkler heads and
lines shall form a symmetrical pattern within this space and be placed such
that each quadrant has the same layout. Sprinkler heads at the lower GWB
soffit shall form a repeated symmetrical pattern centered on each of the
four walls of the Gallery.
5. Children’s Library Radial Ceiling Room 166: Sprinkler heads shall form a
symmetrical radial pattern centered on the cupola.
B. Shop Drawings/Calculations
Within 30 days after award of Contract, and per Section 15050, submit complete
shop drawings to the Architect, Insurance Services offices, and the City of Carlsbad
for review. Shop drawings and calculations shall include the following:
1.
2. Principle dimensions, including tie-in dimensions to water main point-of-
connection, and details of construction.
3.
4.
Sizes and locations of piping, valves, fittings, braces and hangers.
Hydraulic calculations: Contractor is responsible for sizing all supply and
distribution piping.
5. Fire alarm and supervising system diagram.
6. Approval stamp of the local Fire Department and all other authorities having
jurisdiction on drawings, calculations, data sheets, etc., requiring such
approval.
7. Certified performance requirements.
8. Provide equipment list describing all piping materials, valves, fittings,
supports, hangers, and appliances. These shall be approved by the
Architect prior to construction.
F-- 20 October 1997
Prior to submittal of complete piping and hydraulic design, the Contractor
shall submit a reflected ceiling plan of the complete project showing all
sprinkler head locations, lights, diffusers, registers, ceiling panels, etc.
Fire Protection - Wet System
96013 Carlsbad City Library 15300-3
B.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
1.7
A.
9. All welded sections shall be identified on drawings. All welded fittings or
formations shall be identified.
10. Components of hanger assemblies not listed by UL, and installation
methods thereof, shall be certified by a registered professional engineer.
Provide construction details, as necessary, to achieve this approval.
Maintenance Manual: Submit maintenance manual fully describing maintenance
schedules, replacement parts, and other operation requirements.
COORDINATION
Coordinate work with the work of other trades before any installation takes place.
Piping runs found to be in conflict with work of other trades as a result of neglected
coordination shall be removed and reinstalled in new locations designated by the
Architect at no expense to the Owner.
To achieve coordination, Contractor shall contract the Architect and obtain
necessary information to design his system to fit into allotted spaces without
interfering with work by other trades following in a later construction sequence.
GUARANTEE
Contractor shall guarantee fire protection system from leaks for a period of two
years after final acceptance.
Guarantee shall include repair of damage to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Coverage and Scope
1. System shall be designed to provide coverage and density for occupancy
type(s) within building as required by local Fire Department requirements
and NFPA hazard classifications.
2. Design the system on the basis that all the ceilings are as shown on
drawings.
3. Provide heads for all concealed spaces, attic, and soffit spaces at coverage
and density requirements per (1) above.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection -Wet System
Carlsbad City Library 15300 - 4 96013
4. Provide heads for all exposed structure areas as required by (1) above.
2.2
B. Water supply data for this system shall be determined using current (within one year
of bid date) flow test information. Contractor shall obtain and verify flows,
pressures, and related hydraulic data.
MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. All material, equipment, valves and devices installed shall be approved for use in
the fire protection installation by the referenced authorities, codes and standards,
new and without field modifications.
2.3 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Interior Finished Ceilings and Exterior Soffits and Exposed Areas.
1. Sprinkler heads shall be recessed pendent spray type with bright chrome
finish. Heads shall be Reliable, Star, Viking, Gem or approved equal.
B. Sidewall Sprinklers:
2.4
1. Sidewall sprinklers equal to 2.03(A) above may be used in exterior and
interior applications, subject to Architect’s approval. Heads shall be
Reliable, Star, Viking, Gem or approved equal.
C. Concealed Areas, Unfinished Ceilings, open structure ceilings:
1. Provide automatic upright spray, bronze finish for concealed areas and
unfinished ceilings in storage rooms, mechanical rooms, etc. Heads shall be
Reliable, Star, Gem, Viking or approved equal. Heads exposed in finished
rooms and patio cover shall be factory painted to match pipe color.
D. Temperature Ratings:
1. Heads shall have the temperature rating as required to match the hazard
rating of the installed area unless otherwise required by code authority and
NFPA.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide type approved by UL and NFPA 13 for use in this type of installation. Shop
fabricated supports shall be certified by a registered professional engineer for this
installation per NFPA 13.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Fire Protection - Wet System
15300 -5 96013
2.5 SPRINKLER PIPING
A. General
All piping shall be new and acceptable to governing agencies per applicable
standards and codes and as follows:
B. Product Characteristics
1. Black steel, Schedule 40, ASTM A-53, for all piping 2” or smaller diameters,
with threaded fittings and joints.
2. Thinwall steel, Schedule 10, ASTM A-53, UL listed with roll grooved fittings
may be used for pipe 2-112” and larger, unless noted othennrise.
3. All fittings shall be of cast iron or malleable iron conforming to ANSI 816.3
and ANSI B16.4.
4. Flanged fittings shall be provided where connection is made to valves.
5. One-piece reducing fittings shall be used where pipe size changes.
Bushings are unacceptable.
6. Thinwall steel connections shall be made using UL listing rubber-gasketed
malleable or ductile iron couplings. Installation shall be made following
manufacturer’s instructions.
7. “Strap-O-Let” and “Hooker” type fittings are unacceptable.
2.6 VALVES
A. Sprinkler valves shall be suitable for 175 psi working water pressure and shall be
listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories and approved by Factory Mutual Laboratories.
Butterfly valves may be used and shall be as approved by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Gate vales shall be OS&Y type, and shall be iron body, brass or bronze mounted.
Valves 3 inches and smaller shall be screwed ends. Valves 4 inches and larger shall
be flanged.
C. Check valves shall be of the horizontal swing check type and shall be iron body,
brass or bronze mounted and with nonferrous metal seat rings and bearings. Valves
3 inches and smaller shall be screwed ends. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be
flanged.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Fire Protection - Wet System
15300 -6 96013
D.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
2.0
A.
B.
2.9
N-- A.
B.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
Drainage and test valves shall be all bronze globe or gate pattern with screw ends.
Drain and test valves shall be installed where required and on the outlet side of
each control valve. Each drain valve shall be provided with 3/4 inch hose nipple.
ELECTRICAL ALARM VALVE:
Install an approved type electric alarm valve in main supply piping complete with
bell, 120 volt AC. or approved equal having an exterior hood.
U.L.1F.M. approved type flowswitch with double pole double throw contacts and an
adjustable delay from O-30 seconds.
Wiring is specified under Electrical Work Section of the specifications.
VALVE SUPERVISORS (TAMPER SWITCHES):
Install valve supervisors where indicated and as required by code authority and
Owner’s Insurance Underwriter, complete with required appurtenances.
Coordinate electrical point of connections with Electrical Section and connect.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
Flexible connections shall be of approved design and installed where deemed
necessary.
Where piping crosses seismic joints, install a flexible pipe expansion joint of
approved design to absorb the specified seismic movement in any direction. Shop
drawings of proposed joints shall be submitted.
ACCESSORY CABINET
Metal sprinkler cabinet for reserve supply of sprinkler heads, as required by NFPA
13, including one suitable sprinkler wrench for each type of new head installed.
Location to be as directed by Architect. Stock shall include all types and ratings
installed.
FIRE HOSE CABINET
Fire hose cabinet shall be U.L. approved, fully recessed with red baked enamel
doors with full glass, 75 feet unlined linen hose, fog nozzle and control valve with
swivel hose rack.
.-
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Wet System
Carlsbad City Library 15300 -7 96013
2.12
A.
SIGNS
Provide metal or plastic signs, permanently marked to show function, for all valves,
controls, and related assemblies. Locate as directed by Architect.
2.13
A.
VALVE CHART
Provide enclosed frame with chart enclosed, indicating all valves, pipe sizes,
locations, and system functions.
2.14
A;
GUARDS
Provide UL approved guard for sprinkler heads which are susceptible to mechanical
damage.
2.15
A.
SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS:
Pipe passing through walls, floors and partitions shall be provided with standard
weight steel pipe sleeves. Where located in the floor construction in sprinklered
areas, the sleeves shall project not less than 3 inches above the floor line. The
space between pipe and sleeves shall be caulked with oakum or fire rated material,
as required.
B. Escutcheons, as specified in the Plumbing Section of the specifications, shall be
furnished on pipes passing through finished walls and ceilings.
2.16 SEALS AND TAGS
A. Provide brass cross-link chain, with brass padlock and 2 keys, for each valve
required to be sealed in open position. Provide identification tags, 2” diameter, at
all control valves.
PART3 EXECUTION m
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection
1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all
other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point that this
portion of the work may properly commence in accordance with all
submittals, original design, and applicable codes.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Fire Protection - Wet System
15300-8 96013
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Discrepancies
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately ‘notify the Architect. Do not
proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies
have been fully reviewed.
A. General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
20 October 1997
All installation shall be per referenced standards. Follow manufacturer’s
direction and recommendations in all cases as required for rating
certification.
All cutting and framing shall be subject to approval by the Architect before
the work is done. Coordinate all framing requirements.
Structural elements, beams, decks, and other components shall not be cut
unless approved by the Architect.
Provide and install Victaulic type couplings where required to provide
expansion capability and for earthquake protection per NFPA standards.
Provide sway bracing as required.
Entire sprinkler system shall be installed in such a manner that it can be
drained, in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 13, to suitable points as
approved by Architect. Provide valve identification.
For pendent sprinkler installation, inverted U-bend nipples shall be provided.
Utilize top discharge from tee fittings to feed drops through finished ceilings.
No work shall be covered or enclosed until inspected, tested, and approved
by Architect or governing authority. Should any work be covered before
inspection, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, uncover the work and
after it has been inspected, tested and approved, provide for all repairs as
may be necessary to restore work to original and proper condition.
Heads shall form a symmetrical pattern, carefully integrated as shown on
approved drawings. Center heads in ceiling tile and between architectural
elements.
All penetrations of walls shall be suitably sleeved, patched and sealed in
order to preserve fire rating.
Any reductions in pipe size shall be accomplished using one-piece reducing
fittings. Bushings are unacceptable.
Fire Protection - Wet System
Carlsbad City Library 15300-g 96013
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing
1. Test as required to conform to current applicable requirements of NFPA and
approval agency, as well as Insurance Services organization.
2. l%sts to be conducted after systems are flushed out, accepted by, and in
the presence of representative of the Contractor and authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Provide 3 copies of final report and certification as prescribed by Insurance
Services organization and inspection bureau having jurisdiction.
4. Upon completion and approval of system, and prior to occupancy, provide
instruction to the Owner, or his representative, in all details of system
operation and maintenance, including preparation of Maintenance and
Operations manual per Section 15050.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of work, remove all surplus material, debris, and equipment
associated with or used in the execution of this work.
B. Equipment, apparatus, fixtures and exposed piping shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Sprinkler heads shall be thoroughly cleaned without the use of any solvents.
l ** END OF SECTION l **
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Fire Protection - Wet System
15300 - 10 96013
SECTION 15310
FIRE PROTECTON - CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION
1.2
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide complete design and installation of an engineered fire detection and
INERGEN total flooding, gaseous agent, fire suppression system for Computer
Service room 109 as manufactured by Ansul Fire Protection, Marinette, Wisconsin,
or approved equal. Room 109 has sub-floor and T-bar ceiling. See Architectural
drawings for detail information.
B. Drawings: The contract drawings indicate the general arrangements of the areas
to receive detection and INERGEN protection. Contractor is to review all drawings
so that all items affecting the operation of the fire detection/lNERGEN suppression
system (such as equipment location, air diffusers, damper closures, and door
openings) are considered in the design of the engineered system.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to thereafter by
basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the
reference thereto (latest edition):
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards:
No. 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
No. 70 National Electric Code
No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code
2. Factory Mutual Systems (FM) Publication
Factory Mutual Approval Guide
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publication
Fire Protection Equipment Directory with quarterly supplements
4. Department of Transportation (DOT)
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Parts 100 to 199
Transportation of Hazardous Materials, DOT3AAZ300 or 3AAZ15T
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publication
Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
6. Industrial Risk Insurers Interpretive Guide (Detection & Controls)
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 - 1 96013
7. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Protection of Stratospheric Ozone
59 FR 13044, March 18, 1994 (Final SNAP Ruling)
8. Requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
1.3 REQUIREMENTS:
A. This installation shall be made in strict accordance with the drawings, specifications
and applicable National Fire Protection Association Standards. All equipment and
devices used shall be listed in both the UL Fire Equipment Directory and the Factory
Mutual Approval Guide.
B. Design and installation of the fire detection/lNERGEN suppression system will be
in strict accordance with the following guidelines and regulatory agencies:
1. NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, Latest Edition
3. NFPA 70 National Electric Codes, Latest Edition
4. Americans with Disabilities Act, Title 24, Latest Edition
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
A. Furnish all engineering design and materials for a complete fire detection/lNERGEN
suppression system including charged INERGEN storage cylinders, nozzles, control
panel, detectors, wiring, annunciators, alarm and all other equipment necessary for
a complete operational system.
B. Major system components shall be produced by Ansul Fire Protection (no
alternatives) and shall be installed by an authorized Ansul distributor certified for the
design and installation and service of INERGEN suppression systems.
C. Contractor shall, as a minimum, provide 24-hour emergency service, 7 days a week
and shall be able to respond to an emergency situation within 2 hours of receiving
an emergency trouble call. In addition, contractor shall maintain no less than $2
million liability insurance.
SUBMITTAL
A. The following shall be submitted for approval within 21 days of award and prior to
delivery of materials:
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 -2 96013
1. Material and equipment information shall include manufacturer’s catalog cut
sheet and technical data for each component or device used in the system.
This shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a.
b.
::
t’
9. h.
i.
j. k.
Detectors
Manual discharge switches
Control panel
Release devices
Alarm devices
Agent storage cylinders
Mounting brackets
Discharge Nozzles
Abort stations
Piping isometrics
Flow calculations
B. Provide information outlining the warranty of each component or device used in the
system.
C. Provide information outlining the operation and maintenance procedures that will be
required of the owner. This information shall explain any special knowledge or tools
the owner will be required to employ and all spare parts that should be readily
available.
D. Drawings shall indicate locations, installation details and operation details of all
equipment associated with the INERGEN system. Floor plans shall be provided
showing equipment locations, piping, point-to-point wiring and other details as
required. Floor plans shall be drawn to a scale of not less than lW=l’-0”.
Elevations, cross sections and other details shall be drawn to a larger scale as
required. Isometric piping layouts shall be provided with the shop drawings. In
addition, point-to-point electrical layout drawings shall be provided.
E. Sequence of operation, electrical schematics and connection diagrams shall be
provided to completely describe the operation of the INERGEN system controls.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION:
A. The system shall be an INERGEN total flooding, gaseous, clean agent, fire
suppression system designed to provide a uniform concentration of INERGEN for
the protected area.
1. The amount of INERGEN to be provided shall be the amount required to
obtain a uniform (minimum) concentration as required by the design manual
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 -3 96013
for ten (10) minutes. Take into consideration such factors as unclosable
openings (ii any), “rundown” time of fans, time required for dampers to close
(and requirements for any additional dampers), and any other feature of the
facility that could affect concentration. The design concentration shall be by
volume at 70°F.
B. Cross-zoned or Counting Zone Smoke Detection: The INERGEN system shall be
automatically actuated by either counting zone detection circuits or cross-zoned
detection circuits. Smoke detectors shall be ionization detectors and photoelectric
with compatibility listings for use with the control unit. Smoke detectors shall be
installed at no more than 400 square feet (37 square meters) of coverage per
detector. The detectors shall be alternated throughout the protected area with the
system requiring two (2) detectors in alarm prior to automatic agent release.
2.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION:
A. Activation of any single detector in any detection zone shall:
1. Cause a first-stage alarm.
2. Energize a lamp on the activated detector and control panel (and graphic
annunciator, if included).
B. Activation of a detector on the second zone shall:
1. Transmit an alarm signal to remote monitoring or building alarm panel.
2. Cause a second-stage (pm-discharge) alarm to operate.
3. Operate auxiliary contacts for air conditioning shutdowns and automatic
dampers.
4. Initiate a programmable time delay (INERGEN agent release).
C. Upon completion of the time delay the INERGEN system shall:
1. Cause a discharge alarm to be activated.
2. Operate auxiliary contacts for emergency power off of all electrical
equipment (excluding lighting and emergency circuits for life safety).
3. Activate visual alarms (strobe) at protected area entrance.
4. Energize control solenoid for INERGEN cylinders releasing gaseous agent
into the protected area.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 - 4 96013
r 2.3 AUXILIARY COMPONENTS:
A. Double action manual releasing stations shall be provided at each exit of the
protected area and shall, when activated, immediately release the INERGEN agent
and cause all audible/visual alarms to activate. In addition, activation of the manual
releasing stations shall cause immediate shutdown of air and power circuits.
B. Abort stations shall be provided at each exit of the protected area and shall, when
operated, interrupt the discharge of INERGEN agent and emergency power-off
functions. The abort stations shall be momentary devices (dead-man) requiring
constant pressure to maintain contact closure. Note: Manual Releasing Station
activation shall override any abort station. Abort station operation shall be per IRI
and FM guidelines.
C. Graphic annunciator (optional) shall be provided at the control panel location. The
graphic annunciator shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer in an
approved NEMA enclosure with keyed face plate. The graphic annunciator shall
display the entire INERGEN protected area and shall indicate each smoke detector
and its proximity. Smoke detectors, when activated, will individually annunciate at
the graphic annunciator as follows:
Ceiling Detector: Red LED
Subfloor Detector: Amber LED
PART 3 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Materials and equipment shall be of a single manufacturer (Ansul Fire Protection).
Alternates will not be accepted. The name of the manufacturer and the serial
numbers shall appear on all major components.
3.2 GENERAL MATERIALS - ELECTRICAL:
A. All electrical enclosures, raceways and conduits shall be employed in accordance
with applicable codes and intended use and contain only those electrical circuits
associated with the fire detection and control system and shall not contain any
circuit that is unrelated to the system.
B. Unless specifically provided otherwise in each case, all conductors shall be
enclosed in steel conduit, rigid or thin wall as conditions dictate.
C. Any conduit or raceway exposed to weather or other similar conditions shall be
properly sealed and installed to prevent damage. Provisions for draining and/or
drying shall be employed.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carisbad City Library 15310 -5 96013
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
NEMA rating and/or electrically hazardous classifications shall be obsenred and any
equipment or materials installed must meet or exceed the requirements of service.
Any wiring shall be of the proper size to conduct the circuit current but shall not be
smaller than #I8 AWG unless otherwise specified for a given purpose. Wire that
has scrapes, nicks, gouges or crushed insulation shall not be used. The use of
aluminum-wire is strictly prohibited.
Splicing of circuits shall be kept to a minimum and are only to be found in an
electrical device suited for the purpose.
Wke spliced together shall have the same color insulation.
Wtre splices shall be made with appropriate devices suited for the purpose.
All wire terminations shall be made with crimp terminals unless the device at the
termination is designed for bare wire terminations.
All electrical circuits shall be numerically tagged with suitable devices at the
terminating point and/or splice. All circuit numbers shall correspond with the
installation drawings.
The use of wlored wires is encouraged but not required unless dictated by state or
local authorities.
White colored wire shall be used exclusively for the identification of the neutral
conductor of an alternating current circuit.
Green colored wire shall be used exclusively for the identification of the earth
ground conductor of an AC or DC circuit.
3.3 CONTROL SYSTEMS - GENERAL:
A. All control systems shall be UL Listed or FM approved and be utilized with listed or
approved compatible operating devices and shall be capable of the following
features:
1. Ground fault indication
2. Supervised detection circuit(s)
3. Supervised alarm circuit(s)
4. Supervised release circuit(s)
5. Supervised manual pull circuit (if applicable)
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 - 6 96013
.-
6. Supervised primary power circuit
7. Alarm overrides trouble logic
8. Battery standby
9. Front panel indicating lamps (LEDs)
10. Key lock steel enclosure
11. Programmable time delay
12. Programmable detection logic
13. Prioritized trouble logic
14. Microprocessor based logic
15. History buffer
3.4 CONTROL PANEL - AUTOPULSE 442R CONTROL SYSTEM:
A. The control panel shall be an Ansul model Autopulse 442R and shall communicate
with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system:
smoke detectors, manual release/abort stations, alarm notification appliances,
releasing components and other system controlled devices.
B.
C.
System Capacity - The control panel shall include two Style Y/Z (Class A/B)
notification circuits, two releasing circuits, Form- C alarm and trouble contacts, two
Style B/D (Class A/B) initiating circuits, one Style B/D (Class A/B) manual release
circuit, and a Style B/D (Class A/B) abort circuit.
System Display - The system display shall indicate the status of the following
system parameters:
AC POWER: Green LED
SYSTEM ALARM: Red LED
RELEASE: Red LED
SUPERVISORY: Yellow LED
SYSTEM TROUBLE: Yellow LED
CIRCUIT TROUBLE: Yellow LED
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carisbad City Library 15310 -7 96013
D.
ALARM SILENCED: Yellow LED
POWER TROUBLE: Yellow LED
System Control Switch Operation -
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tene Silence Switch: Activation of the control panel tone silence switch in
response to alarms, troubles, and supervisory conditions shall silence the
local panel piezo electric signal and change the system alarm or trouble
LED from flashing mode to steady ON mode. Occurrence of any new alarm
or trouble conditions in the system shall cause the control panel to resound
the local piezo sounder and repeat the alarm or trouble sequences.
Alarm Silence Switch: Activation of the alarm signal silence switch shall
cause all alarm notification appliances to return to the normal condition after
an alarm condition.
System Reset Switch: Activation of the system reset switch shall cause all
electronically-latched initiating devices, appliances as well as all associated
output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. Holding
system reset down shall perform a LAMP TEST function and will activate the
piezo sounder.
Alarm Activate Switch: Operation of the alarm activate switch shall activate
both notification circuits and the alarm relay. Alarm activation shall be a
latching function.
E. System Operation -
1. Zone Status LEDs: The alarm, supervisory or trouble LED(s) shall flash until
event(s) has been acknowledged. Any subsequent new alarm, supervisory
or trouble condition will resound all indications and flash new events.
2. Supervisory: A short circuit on this zone shall cause the supervisory LED
to flash. The tone silence switch shall silence the piezo causing the
supervisory LED to illuminate steady. An open circuit shall report as a zone
trouble.
3. Zone Disable: Disable/enable of any initiating circuit shall be accomplished
using a special sequence of operation of the four control switches. If a zone
has been disabled, an alarm shall activate the red zone LED but not the
piezo or any output circuit.
4. Last Event Recall: Last event recall shall allow the user to display the
previous panel status. Last event recall may be used to diagnose
intermittent trouble conditions.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carisbad City Library 15310 -8 96013
.- F. Optional modules shall include:
1. Optional module for four zone/function relays
2. Optional transmitter module (shall comply with 1993 NFPA-72)
3. Optional LED interface module and supervised remote annunciator (2
modules)
4. Optional digital alarm communicator
5. Optional volt and amp meters
G. The control panel shall also include the following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Output circuits shall be protected against false activations by using a 2-step
electronic activation circuit.
Battery/earth fault supervision shall be provided.
Adjustable delay timer shall be available, zero to thirty seconds.
Cross zone option shall be selectable (two zones in alarm before release).
Three abort functions options shall be selectable: (1) Standard UL method;
(2) IRI method; and (3) local AHJ method.
A second release circuit may be selected in place of the supervisory circuit.
A supervised manual release circuit shall be provided which, when
activated, shall override the Abort.
7 AH to 12 AH battery options shall be available providing up to 90 hours
standby.
A watchdog timer to supervise microprocessor shall be provided.
Slide-in zone identification labels shall be provided.
H. Power Supply -
1.
2.
The power supply shall be integral to the control panel and provide all
control panel and peripheral device power needs.
Input power shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The power supply shall provide an
integral battery charger for use with batteries up to 15 AH.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 -9 96013
3. The power supply shall also provide 2.25 amperes of regulated 24 VDC
power for release circuits and alarm notification devices, four-wire smoke
detector power of 24 VDC up to 200 ma, non-resettable power of 24 VDC
up to 200 ma.
4. The power supply shall be designed to meet UL and NFPA requirements for
pewer-limited operation on all notification and initiating circuits.
5. Positive-temperature-coefficient thermistors, circuit breakers, fuses, or other
over-current protection shall be provided on all power outputs.
I. Mechanical Design - The control panel shall be housed in a cabinet designed for
mounting directly to a wall or vertical surface. The back box and door shall be
constructed of .060 steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the
sides and top. The door shall provide a key lock and include a glass or other
transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. The cabinet shall be approximately
5 inches (127 mm) deep, and 14.5 inches (368 mm) wide, and 16 inches (406 mm)
high. An optional trim ring shall be used for flush mounting of the cabinet. Space
shall be provided in the cabinet for 7 AH or 12 AH batteries.
J. Batteries -
1. Batteries shall be 2 - 12 volt, Gell-Cell type providing 24 VDC.
2. Batteries shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not
less than 24 hours in standby plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC
power failure.
3. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are
required. Fluid level checks, refilling, spills and leakage shall not be
accepted.
3.5 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Smoke detectors shall be 24 VDC and shall be UL listed and FM approved.
B. Each detector shall include a visual status indicator, provide remote LED output,
and include a built-in test capability.
C. The sensitivity shall be factory set per UL 268.
D. The detector cover and screen shall be easily removable for field cleaning.
E. A special vandal-resistant locking screw shall be provided to lock the head to the
base.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 - 10 96013
F. The head-to-base connection shall be made by use of bifurcated contacts. Terminal
connections to the base shall be the screw type that are accessible with the base
installed on the mounting box.
G. Where specifically identified on the contract drawings, detector bases shall
incorporate a relay with Form C contacts rated at 1 amp, 120 VAC or 28 VDC for
remote LED alarm annunciation of the detector.
H. lonization-type smoke detector shall be the dual chamber type and compatible with
the Ansul control system. The detector shall have an LED in its base which is
illuminated in a steady-on mode when in alarm and pulse mode when in standby:
Reset of the detector shall be performed by the control unit reset switch.
I. The design of the ionization detector compensating circuits shall provide stable
operation with regard to minor changes in temperature, humidity and atmospheric
conditions.
J. Photoelectric-type smoke detector shall be the light reflective type and compatible
with the Ansul control system. The detector shall have an LED in its base which is
illuminated in a steady-on mode when in alarm and pulse mode when in standby.
Reset of the detector shall be performed by the control unit reset switch.
K. The design of the photoelectric detector compensating circuits shall provide stable
operation with regard to minor changes in temperature, humidity and atmospheric
conditions.
L. Photoelectric-type smoke detector with heat detector shall be the light reflective
type and compatible with the Ansul control system. The detector shall have an LED
in its base which is illuminated in a steady-on mode when in alarm and pulse mode
when in standby. Reset of the detector shall be performed by the control unit reset
switch.
3.6 INDICATING APPLIANCES:
A. Sounder/Strobe Combination -
1. The sounder/strobe combination shall operate on 24 VDC and shall be
approved for use with the listed control system.
2. The sounder/strobe combination shall be polarized and powered from the
control unit.
3. The device shall be UL listed or FM approved.
4. The strobe shall be listed to UL Standard 1971 for the Hearing Impaired,
approved for Fire Protective Service, and rated at either 15 cd or 75 cd.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310-11 96013
5. The sounder shall have eight (8) tone options selected by means of
programming clips.
B. Strobe -
1. The strobe shall operate at 24 VDC and shall be approved for use with the
listed control system.
2. The strobe shall be polarized and powered from the control unit.
3. The strobe shall be UL listed or FM approved.
4. The strobe shall be listed to UL Standard 1971 for the Hearing Impaired,
approved for Fire Protective Service, and rated at either 15 cd or 75 cd.
C. Sounder -
1. The sounder shall operate at 24 VDC and shall be approved for use with the
listed control system.
2. The sounder shall be polarized and powered from the control unit.
3. The device shall be UL listed or FM approved.
4. The sounder shall have eight (8) tone options selected by means of
programming clips.
3.7 MANUAL PULL STATIONS:
A. The manual pull stations shall be provided for the release (electrical) of the fire
suppression system in case of an emergency.
B. The device shall be UL listed.
C. Manual stations shall be metal with clearly visible operating instructions provided
on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front and both sides of the
stations.
3.8
D. Operation shall require two (2) actions.
ABORT SWITCH:
A. The abort switch shall be used where an investigative delay is desired between
detection and actuation of the fire suppression system.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carisbad City Library 15310-12 96013
..- B. This switch shall be a momentary contact “dead-man” type switch requiring constant
pressure to transfer one set of contacts. Clear operating instructions shall be
provided at the abort switch.
C. This switch shall be rated at 28 VDC @ 1.1 amp make/break or 6 amp continuous
carry.
D. The terminal connections shall be of the screw type.
3.9 MAINTENANCE LOCK-OUT SWITCH:
A. The maintenance lock-out switch shall be used where it is desired to disable the fire
suppression system during routine maintenance.
B. This switch shall be key operated allowing removal of the key in either the “Normal”
or “Lock-Out” position. A red indicator lamp shall be included on the switch
assembly to be illuminated when in the “Lock-Out” position. The control unit is to
indicate a trouble condition when in the “Lock-Out” position.
C. The switch shall include one (1) set of normally open and one (1) set of normally
closed contacts rated at 28 VDC @ 1 .l amp make/break or 6 amp continuous carry.
D. The terminal connections shall be of the screw type.
I 3.10 SELECTOR SWITCH:
A. The selector switch shall be used where a connected reserve is required.
B. This switch shall be key operated allowing removal of the key in either the “Main”
or “Reserve” position.
C. This switch shall be rated at 28 VDC @ 1 .l amp make/break or 6 amp continuous
carry.
D. The terminal connections shall be of the screw type.
PART 4 - SYSTFM ARRANGEMENT
4.1 INERGEN SUPPRESSION SYSTEM:
A. INERGEN fire suppression system shall be of the engineered, permanently piped,
fixed nozzle type with all pertinent components provided by Ansul Fire Protection.
B. All agent storage cylinders shall be centrally located as vertical, free-standing
cylinders with wall and/or floor mounted retaining brackets. Where multiple
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310-13 96013
cylinders are required for the same hazard, a wmmon manifold shall be employed.
(Cylinders mounted horizontally shall be installed in accordance to the
manufacturer’s design manual.)
C. On multiple cylinder arrangements (discharging into a common hazard), one
cylinder shall be designated as the pilot cylinder and employ both the restorable
electric and mechanical manual actuators. All remaining cylinders shall be
pneumatically operated from the INERGEN agent discharge of the pilot cylinder into
the manifold.
D. Manifolded cylinders shall employ a flexible discharge hose to facilitate installation
and system maintenance. Each cylinder on a manifold shall also include an agent
check valve installed to the manifold inlet.
4.2 FLOW CALCULATIONS:
A. Computerized verification of flow calculations shall be submitted for each INERGEN
tire suppression system and include the following data as a minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Quantity of agent per nozzle
Type of nozzle
Pressure at nozzle (psi)
Nozzle body nominal pipe size (inch)
Number and size of cylinders
Total agent
Pipe size per pipe section
Pipe schedule per pipe section
Number, size and type of fitting per pipe section
Actual length per pipe section (feet)
Equivalent length per pipe section (feet)
Discharge time (seconds)
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310- 14 96013
rc PART 5 0 EQUlPMENT AND MAJXHAUECHANICAU
5.1 PIPE MATERIAL - INERGEN SYSTEM:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
System piping shall be of non-combustible materials having physical and chemical
characteristics such that its integrity under stress can be predicted with reliability.
As a minimum, piping materials shall be black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-53A
ERW or ASTM A-l 06A seamless.
Under no conditions shall ordinary cast iron pipe, steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-
120 or ASTM A-53/A-l 20 be used.
Piping joints shall be suitable for the design conditions and shall be selected with
consideration of joint tightness and mechanical strength.
As a minimum, filings beyond the orifice union/nipple shall be black, 300 lb. class
fittings conforming to ANSI B-16.3. Ordinary cast iron fittings shall not be used.
The system manifold up to the orifice union nipple must be constructed of Schedule
80 piping and 2000 lb. or 3000 lb. forged steel fittings. Distribution piping
downstream of the orifice union must be a minimum of Schedule 40 with 300 lb.
fittings.
All piping shall comply with NFPA 2001.
Piping shall be installed in accordance with good commercial practice to the
appropriate codes, securely supported with UL Listed hangers.and arranged with
close attention to the design layout since deviations may alter the design flow
performance as calculated.
Piping shall be bracketed within 12” (.3 m) of all discharge nozzles.
All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with appropriate solvent to
remove mill varnish and cutting oils before assembly.
Multi-outlet fittings other than tees shall not be permitted.
Assembly of all joints shall conform to the appropriate standards. Threaded pipe
joints shall utilize Teflon tape applied to the male threads only.
5.2 EXTINGUISHING AGENT:
A. The agent shall be INERGEN, a trademark name registered to Ansul Fire
Protection.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 - 15 96013
5.3 INERGEN STORAGE CYLINDERS:
A. Cylinder assemblies shall be of steel construction with a standard RED epoxy paint
finish. Each cylinder shall be equipped with a pressure seat-type valve and gauge.
The system shall utilize Ansul’s CV-90 valve assemblies. When the system’s
capacity exceeds 40 cylinders, a second pilot valve shall be provided and used for
cylinder activation. Each valve shall be constructed of forged brass and shall attach
to the cylinder providing a leak tight seal. Each valve shall also include a safety
pressure relief device which provides relief at 3000-3360 PSI per CGA test
methods.
B. Filling of the cylinder assembly shall be by Ansul Fire Protection or an authorized
INERGEN systems distributor in conjunction with a factory authorized INERGEN
agent filling station. Initial filling and recharge shall be performed in accordance
with the manufacturer’s established procedures and shall not require replacement
components for normal service.
5.4 CYLINDER BRACKET:
A. Each cylinder assembly shall be furnished with a bracket made from welded steel.
The bracket shall hold the cylinders in a saddle with a front bracket piece that
secures the cylinders. The brackets shall be modular in design to allow added
bracketing or stacking of cylinders depending on installation requirements.
B. Cylinder brackets shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for use with the INERGEN
system.
5.5 VALVE ACTUATORS:
A. Electric valve actuators shall be of brass construction and stackable design with
swivel connections to allow removal of actuators for maintenance or testing.
B. Operation of actuators shall not require replacement of components. NO
ELECTRO-EXPLOSIVE DEVICES may be used to actuate the valve assembly.
C. Electric actuators shall be the magnetic latch, continuous duty type for 24 VDC
operation.
D. Actuation devices shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for use with the INERGEN
system.
5.6 DISCHARGE HOSE/CHECK VALVE:
A. When manifolding, all cylinder assemblies shall include a flexible discharge hose
and check valve for connection to the manifold inlet.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 - 16 96013